M4125idn_M4132idn Service Manual Rev.7

[CONFIDENTIAL]
Cover
ECOSYS M4132idn
ECOSYS M4125idn
PF-470/PF-471
AK-470/DF-470
FAX System 13
SERVICE MANUAL
Published in October 2019
Rev.7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
CONFIDENTIAL
FOR AUTHORIZED KYOCERA ENGINEERS ONLY. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE TO NON-AUTHORIZED PARTIES.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for
details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux
de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual

For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4.
Product name Print Display Scanning 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia

speed size method
TASKalfa 2510i 4.3 inch CIS ○ - - -
25 sheets/
TASKalfa 2520i 7 inch CCD ○ - - -
min
ECOSYS M4125idn 4.3 inch CIS - ○ ○ ○
ECOSYS M4132idn 32 sheets/ 7 inch
CCD - ○ ○ ○
min
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Revision history
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 2017/09/04 3-10Page Added: Zener PWB
3-11Page
9-15Page
6-89Page Correction: U332 Setting range/Initial setting
3-5Page Correction: Position number of DP motors
2-3Page Deleated: No,25 Warranty card
2 2018/01/05 1-1Page Correction: (1) Common function/Paper specification
1-3Page Correction: Numbers of continuous copying
2-37Page Change: Contents of country code list
4-82Page Added: Precaution when detach the PWB
5-1Page Added: OCR Dictionary, Comments when instal the OCR Dictionary
2-35Page
6-5Page Added: U930

6-167Page
6-5Page Change: U964 HDD → nonvolatile memory

6-170Page
6-121Page Change: Contents of country code list

6-179Page
7-1Page Change: The test sample to MIP-PG pattern
7-19Page Deleted: Border Erase function
7-4Page Correction: The description of (2-2 to 6) of the 7-1 Image formation problems
to 7-6Page
7-7Page Correction: The description of (2-8) of the 7-1 Image formation problems
7-9Page Correction: The description of (2-13 to 17) of the 7-1 Image formation
to 7-11Page problems
7-15Page Correction: The description of (3-4 to 9) of the 7-1 Image formation problems
to 7-17Page
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Revision Date Pages Revised contents

2 2018/01/05 7-37Page Correction: The description of (1-2) of the 7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-38Page Correction: The description of (1-5) of the 7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-40Page Correction: The description of (1-11) of the 7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
7-45Page Correction: The description of (J0000) of the 7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures

7-47Page Correction: The description of (J0501/J0502/J0503) of the 7-2 Feeding/
Conveying Failures
7-58Page Correction: The description of (J9000 to J9410) of the 7-2 Feeding/
Conveying Failures
to 7-62Page
7-152Page Correction: The description of (2 to4) of the 7-8 Abnormal Noise

to 7-152Page
7-155Page Correction: The description of (14) of the 7-8 Abnormal Noise
7-73Page Correction: The description of (C0980 to C1030) of the 7-3 Self Diagnostic
to 7-75Page
to 7-76Page
to 7-80Page
7-82Page Correction: The description of (C5101) of the 7-3 Self Diagnostic
3 2018.03.22 1-7Page Paper weight of PF-470/471 (52 to 163 g/m2 → 60 to 163 g/m2)
2-25Page Deleated: The fixing screw of SD card cover
5-4Page Correction: USB folder structure

6-4Page Correction: Delete the word "Duplex"
6-100Page
6-39Page Correction: Setting Range (0 -75)

6-93Page Correction: Description of setting of Auto sleep
6-102Page Correction: Test pattarn (2 1)

4 2018.06.19 7-95Page Deletion: Firmware update
5 2019.04.26 6-170Page Deletion: Supplement
6 2019.06.17 7-102Page Addition: F60X
7 2019.10.30 2-2Page Correction: Delete the word "Altitude adjustment"

6-14Page Correction: Delete the word "Altitude adjustment"
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

[CONFIDENTIAL]
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
[CONFIDENTIAL]
This page is intentionally left blank.

[CONFIDENTIAL]
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1 Specification .................................................................................................. 1-1
(2) Copy Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
(3) Printer Functions....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
(4) Scanner Functions .................................................................................................................................... 1-5
(5) Document Processor ................................................................................................................................ 1-6
(6) Option ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
(6-1)500 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder (PF-470) ........................................................................................... 1-7
(6-2)500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder (PF-471) ........................................................................................... 1-7
(6-3)500 sheets Finisher (DF-470) (32ppm model only) .......................................................................... 1-8
(6-4)FAX System (FAX System 13) ......................................................................................................... 1-9
1-2 Part Names ............................................................................................................................................. 1-10
(1) Exterior ................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
(2) Connectors/Interior ................................................................................................................................. 1-13
(3) With Optional Equipments Attached ....................................................................................................... 1-14
(4) FAX System ............................................................................................................................................ 1-15
(5) Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................................................. 1-16
1-3 Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................................ 1-18
(1) PF-470 <500 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder> ................................................................................................ 1-19
(2) PF-471 <500 sheets X 2 Paper Feeder> ................................................................................................ 1-20
(3) AK-470 <Attachment Kit> (32ppm model only) ...................................................................................... 1-21
(4) DF-470 <500 sheets Finisher> (32ppm model only) .............................................................................. 1-22
(5) Expansion memory ................................................................................................................................. 1-23
(6) SD/SDHC memory card.......................................................................................................................... 1-24
(7) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" .............................................................................. 1-25
(8) HD-6/HD-7 <SSD> ................................................................................................................................. 1-26
(9) IB-50 <Network Interface Kit>................................................................................................................. 1-27
(10) IB-51 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> .................................................................................................. 1-28
(11) IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (220 to 240 V only (100/120V: standard))................................ 1-29
(12) FAX System 12 <FAX Kit> ..................................................................................................................... 1-30
(13) Data Security Kit(E) <Data Security Kit> ................................................................................................ 1-31
(14) UG-33 <Thin Print Option> ..................................................................................................................... 1-32
2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items ................................................................................................... 2-3
(1-1)Main unit ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3
(2) Notes on main unit transportation ............................................................................................................. 2-4
(3) Attaching the job separator tray ................................................................................................................ 2-5
(4) Unlocking the scanner mirror frame (CCD model only) ............................................................................ 2-5
(5) Loading Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 2-6
(5-1)Precaution for Loading Paper .......................................................................................................... 2-6
(5-2)Set paper in the cassette ................................................................................................................. 2-7
(6) Switching the cassette heater switch ...................................................................................................... 2-10
(7) Connecting the Power Cord.................................................................................................................... 2-10
(8) Setting up the Toner Container............................................................................................................... 2-11
(9) Default Setting ........................................................................................................................................ 2-13
(9-1)Setting Date and Time ................................................................................................................... 2-13
(9-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ........................................................................................ 2-14
(9-3)Paper size and media type setting ................................................................................................. 2-14
(10) Installing Software .................................................................................................................................. 2-15
(11) Output Maintenance Report (Execute maintenance mode U000) .......................................................... 2-15
(12) Clearing the counts (Maintenance mode U927) ..................................................................................... 2-15
(13) Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278).............................................................................. 2-15
(14) Exiting from the maintenance mode ....................................................................................................... 2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(15) Completion of installing the main unit ..................................................................................................... 2-16

2 - 3 Installing the optional devices ................................................................................................................. 2-17
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items ................................................................................................. 2-17
(1-1)Paper Feeder (PF-470) (Option) .................................................................................................... 2-17
(1-2)Paper Feeder (PF-471) (Option) .................................................................................................... 2-19
(1-3)Attachment Kit (AK-470) (Option) .................................................................................................. 2-20
(1-4)500-sheet Finisher (DF-470) (Option) ............................................................................................ 2-21
(2) Optional unit installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-22
2 - 4 Installing the optional parts ..................................................................................................................... 2-23
(1) Expansion memory ................................................................................................................................. 2-23
(2) SD/SDHC memory card.......................................................................................................................... 2-25
(3) SSD (HD-6/HD-7) ................................................................................................................................... 2-27
(4) Card reader............................................................................................................................................. 2-29
(5) Handset (100V model only) .................................................................................................................... 2-31
2 - 5 About Optional Applications.................................................................................................................... 2-35
2 - 6 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system ........................................................................... 2-37
3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

(2) Cross-section view (CIS model) ............................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 Extension device construction (option) ..................................................................................................... 3-3
(3) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-470) ............................................................................................. 3-4
3-3 Electric parts ............................................................................................................................................. 3-5
(1-1)(Machine rear side) .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
(1-2)Machine inside ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs ......................................................................................................... 3-7
(2-1)Main PWB ........................................................................................................................................ 3-7
(2-2)Enginee PWB ................................................................................................................................... 3-7
(2-3)High voltage PWB ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
(2-4)Low voltage PWB ............................................................................................................................. 3-8
(2-5)Operation panel main PWB .............................................................................................................. 3-8
(2-6)DP PWB ........................................................................................................................................... 3-8
(3) PWBs ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
(3-1)Layout .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
(3-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-10
(4) Sensors and Switches ............................................................................................................................ 3-12
(4-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-12
(4-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-14
(5) Motors ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
(5-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16
(5-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-17
(6) Other parts.............................................................................................................................................. 3-19
(6-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-19
(6-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-20
3 - 4 Electric parts (Optional unit) ................................................................................................................... 3-22
(1-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-22
(1-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-22
(2-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-23
(2-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-24
(3-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-25
(3-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-25
(4-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-26
(4-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
3 - 5 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................... 3-29
(2) Drive location .......................................................................................................................................... 3-34
(3) Drive unit................................................................................................................................................. 3-35
3 - 6 Mechanical construction ......................................................................................................................... 3-36
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section .......................................................................................................... 3-36
(1-2)MP paper feed section ................................................................................................................... 3-38
(2) Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-1)Image scanner section (CIS model) ............................................................................................... 3-40

(2-2)Image scanner section (CCD model) ............................................................................................. 3-42
(2-3)Laser scanner unit .......................................................................................................................... 3-44
(3) Developer section ................................................................................................................................... 3-46
(3-1)Developer unit ................................................................................................................................ 3-46
(4) Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 3-48
(4-1)Drum unit ........................................................................................................................................ 3-48
(5) Conveying/transfer section ..................................................................................................................... 3-50
(6) Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 3-52
(7) Exit and feed-shift section....................................................................................................................... 3-54
(8) Duplex conveying section ....................................................................................................................... 3-56
(9) Document Processor .............................................................................................................................. 3-58
(9-1)Original paper feed section ............................................................................................................ 3-58
(9-2)Original conveying section, original reversing and exit section ...................................................... 3-60
(9-3) Reversing duplex scanning ........................................................................................................... 3-62
3 - 7 Mechanical construction (option) ............................................................................................................ 3-64
(2) Paper feeder (PF-471) ............................................................................................................................ 3-65
(3) Attachment Kit (AK-470) ......................................................................................................................... 3-67
(4) 500-sheet Finisher (DF-470)................................................................................................................... 3-68
(4-1)Finishing section ............................................................................................................................ 3-68
(4-2)Exit tray section .............................................................................................................................. 3-70
(4-3)Bundle exit operation ..................................................................................................................... 3-72
4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

(4) Screening of the toner container............................................................................................................... 4-2
4 - 2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit ................................................... 4-4
(2-1)Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the maintenance kit. ............................. 4-4
(2-2)Maintenance mode to execute after replacing the unit .................................................................... 4-4
4 - 3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................................ 4-5
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed unit .......................................................................................... 4-5
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner ................................................................................... 4-6
(2) MP feed section ........................................................................................................................................ 4-8
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the MP feed roller .................................................................................. 4-8
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching MP separation pad ................................................................................ 4-9
(3) Transfer section ...................................................................................................................................... 4-10
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the transfer unit ................................................................................... 4-10
(4) Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 4-11
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit ....................................................................................... 4-11
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit ................................................................... 4-12
(5) Developer section ................................................................................................................................... 4-14
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit ................................................................................ 4-14
(6) Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 4-16
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit ....................................................................................... 4-16
(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP feed roller ............................................. 4-17
(7-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller .............................................................................. 4-18
4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) ............................................................................. 4-19
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed unit ........................................................................................ 4-19
4 - 5 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures............................................................................................. 4-20
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the front cover ..................................................................................... 4-20
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the controller box cover ....................................................................... 4-21
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the rear cover ...................................................................................... 4-21
(1-4)Detaching and reattaching the main tray ....................................................................................... 4-22
(1-6)Detaching and reattaching the MP tray .......................................................................................... 4-29
(2) Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 4-36
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the LSU ............................................................................................... 4-36
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the document processor ...................................................................... 4-40
(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (CCD model) .................................................. 4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (CIS model) .................................................... 4-61
(3) Drive section ........................................................................................................................................... 4-71
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the drive unit ........................................................................................ 4-71
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the main motor .................................................................................... 4-73
(4) Detaching and attaching the other parts. ................................................................................................ 4-74
(4-1)Detaching and attaching the language sheet. ................................................................................ 4-74
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the exit fan motor ................................................................................ 4-75
(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the controller fan motor ....................................................................... 4-76
(4-4)Detaching and reattaching the conveying fan motor. ..................................................................... 4-79
(4-5)Detaching and reattaching the temperature/humidity fan motor. ................................................... 4-80
(4-6)Fan motor attachment direction ..................................................................................................... 4-81
(5) PWBs ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-82
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ..................................................................................... 4-82
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the Enginee PWB ................................................................................ 4-85
(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the low voltage PWB ........................................................................... 4-87
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB .......................................................................... 4-90
(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB .................................................................... 4-95
(5-6)Detaching and reattaching the DP PWB ........................................................................................ 4-97
4 - 6 Disassembly & Reassembly (option) ...................................................................................................... 4-99
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit .................................................................................. 4-99
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB ...................................................................................... 4-100
(2) Finisher (DF-470).................................................................................................................................. 4-101
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the DF front cover ............................................................................. 4-101
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the DF rear cover .............................................................................. 4-101
(2-3)Aligning the phase of the upper and lower drive gears of the DF bundle eject belt ..................... 4-101
4 - 7 Periodical maintenance procedure (CH:Check CL:Clean AD:Adjust LU:Lubrication RE:Replace) ...... 4-102
(2) Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 4-104
(3) Paper Feeder (PF-470/471) (Option).................................................................................................... 4-106
(4) Attachment Kit (AK-470) (Option) ......................................................................................................... 4-107
5 Firmware ........................................................................................................ 5-1

5 - 1 Firmware update ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode ........................................................................................ 6-1

6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing the maintenance mode ............................................................................................................ 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ............................................................................................................................ 6-2
6-2 Service mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-176
(1) Service mode execution method .......................................................................................................... 6-176
(2) Service mode table ............................................................................................................................... 6-176
7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 7-1

7 - 1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP) .............................................................................................. 7-2
(2-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-2)Colored background. ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
(2-3)Black dots ......................................................................................................................................... 7-5
(2-4)Blurred characters ............................................................................................................................ 7-5
(2-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Front side) ........... 7-6
(2-6)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Back side) ........... 7-6
(2-7)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................... 7-6
(2-8)Vertical streaks, band (black or color) .............................................................................................. 7-7
(2-9)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Front side) ............ 7-7
(2-10)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Back side) ........... 7-8
(2-11)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................................................... 7-8
(2-12)Moiré .............................................................................................................................................. 7-8
(2-13)Missing entire image (White / Black) .............................................................................................. 7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-14)Image is dark partly or light ............................................................................................................ 7-9

(2-15)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-10
(2-16)Image is missing partly ................................................................................................................. 7-10
(2-17)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-11
(2-18)Entire image is light ...................................................................................................................... 7-11
(3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass) ......................................................................... 7-12
(3-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................. 7-14
(3-2)Colored background ....................................................................................................................... 7-14
(3-3)Black dots ....................................................................................................................................... 7-14
(3-4)Blurred characters .......................................................................................................................... 7-15
(3-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the output image .......................... 7-15
(3-6)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................. 7-15
(3-7)Vertical streaks or bands ................................................................................................................ 7-16
(3-8)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original and output image ...................................... 7-17
(3-9)Vertical streaks, band (white) ......................................................................................................... 7-17
(3-10)Moiré ............................................................................................................................................ 7-17
(3-11)No image comes out (White or Black) .......................................................................................... 7-18
(3-12)Image is dark partly or light .......................................................................................................... 7-18
(3-13)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-19
(3-14)Image is missing partly ................................................................................................................. 7-19
(3-15)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-20
(3-16)Entire image is light ...................................................................................................................... 7-20
(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation) ........................................... 7-21
(4-1)Black dots (toner dirt) ..................................................................................................................... 7-22
(4-2)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots) ........................................................................ 7-23
(4-3)Blank image ................................................................................................................................... 7-23
(4-4)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image ............................ 7-23
(4-5)Dirty reverse side ........................................................................................................................... 7-24
(4-6)Entire image is light ........................................................................................................................ 7-24
(4-7)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black) ......................................................................................... 7-24
(4-8)Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image
(variation of paper leading edge timing) ................................................................................................ 7-25
(4-9)Blurred characters .......................................................................................................................... 7-25
(4-10)Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25
(4-11)Fusing failure ................................................................................................................................ 7-26
(4-12)Paper skew at the trailing edge .................................................................................................... 7-26
(4-13)Uneven transfer ............................................................................................................................ 7-26
(4-14)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-27
(4-15)Vertical streaks or bands .............................................................................................................. 7-27
(5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)................................................................................................... 7-28
(5-1)Background image is foggy. ........................................................................................................... 7-30
(5-7)Image is missing partly ................................................................................................................... 7-32
(5-8)Blank image ................................................................................................................................... 7-32
(5-9)No image comes out (Black) .......................................................................................................... 7-33
(5-10)Periodic toner dirt ......................................................................................................................... 7-33
(5-11)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black) ....................................................................................... 7-34
(5-12)Vertical streaks or bands .............................................................................................................. 7-34
(5-13)Vertical streaks, band (white) ....................................................................................................... 7-34
(5-14)Horizontal uneven density ............................................................................................................ 7-35
(5-15)Vertical uneven density ................................................................................................................ 7-35
(5-16)Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 7-35
(5-17)Gradation reproducibility is low .................................................................................................... 7-36
(5-18)Blurred image ............................................................................................................................... 7-36
(5-19)Trailing image ............................................................................................................................... 7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................................... 7-37

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ................................................................................... 7-37
(1-2)Paper jam from paper factor .......................................................................................................... 7-37
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl .......... 7-38
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide ............................................................................................................ 7-38
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette ..................................................... 7-38
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper ................................................................................................ 7-38
(1-7)Paper jam from the factor of conveying roller, motor or clutch ....................................................... 7-38
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor .......................................................................................................... 7-39
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure .............................................................................. 7-39
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity .......................................................................................... 7-39
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.) ..................................................................................... 7-40
(2) Paper misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................... 7-41
(2-1)Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 7-41
(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................................. 7-42
(3) Jam Codes.............................................................................................................................................. 7-44
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures ......................................................................................................... 7-63
(4-1)Paper creases (Fuser factor) ......................................................................................................... 7-63
(4-2)Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor) ............................................................................. 7-63
7 - 3 Self Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65
(1) Self diagnostic error codes ..................................................................................................................... 7-66
(1-1)Error codes list ............................................................................................................................... 7-66
(2) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline.................................................................................................................. 7-94
(2-1)System Error code list .................................................................................................................... 7-94
(2-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ....................................................................................... 7-94
(2-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ......................................................................................................... 7-97
7 - 4 FAX Related Errors............................................................................................................................... 7-106
(1-1)C0030: FAX PWB system error ................................................................................................... 7-106
(1-2)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ........................................................................... 7-106
(1-3)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error ................................................................ 7-106
(1-4)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ........................................................................... 7-107
(1-5)C0920: FAX file system error ....................................................................................................... 7-107
(1-6)The FAX cannot be sent .............................................................................................................. 7-107
(1-7)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished .......................................................... 7-108
(1-8)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted,
all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data ............................................................................................ 7-108
(2) Communication Errors .......................................................................................................................... 7-109
7 - 5 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................................. 7-128
(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or
the security software settings .............................................................................................................. 7-128
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear ....................................................................................... 7-128
(1-3)The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent .................................................. 7-128
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes) ............................................................................................................... 7-129
(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes ......................................................................................................... 7-129
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 7-132
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes ............................................................................................................ 7-136
7 - 6 Print Errors............................................................................................................................................ 7-138
(1) The paper loading message appears ................................................................................................... 7-139
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray ............................................................................................................... 7-140
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer properties ................................................................... 7-141
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)....................................................................... 7-142
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1) ................................................................... 7-145
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (5) ................................................................... 7-146
(26) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears .......................................................................................................... 7-147
7 - 7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................... 7-148
(3) [Error occurred in cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 2, 3) even after removing/inserting the cassette and
[CONFIDENTIAL]
checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit ........................................................................... 7-149

(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray........................................ 7-150
7-8 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................................... 7-151
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section ............................................................................ 7-152
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section .................................................................................................. 7-153
(8) Abnormal sound from the MP feed section........................................................................................... 7-154
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ............................................................................................ 7-155
7-9 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 7-156
8 PWBs .............................................................................................................. 8-1

8 - 1 Description for PWB ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-1)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-2)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................................................. 8-2
(2) Enginee PWB ........................................................................................................................................... 8-9
(2-1)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
(2-2)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-9
(2-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-10
(3) High voltage PWB................................................................................................................................... 8-17
(3-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-17
(3-2)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-17
(3-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-18
(4) Low voltage PWB ................................................................................................................................... 8-19
(4-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-19
(4-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-20
(5) Operation PWB ....................................................................................................................................... 8-22
(5-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-22
(5-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-24
(6) DP PWB.................................................................................................................................................. 8-28
(6-1)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-28
(6-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-29
8 - 2 Description for PWB (OPTION) .............................................................................................................. 8-31
(1-2)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-31
(2) BR PWB (AK-470) .................................................................................................................................. 8-34
(2-2)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-34
(3) DF PWB (DF-470) .................................................................................................................................. 8-36
(3-2)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-36
9 Appendixes .................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1 Repetitive defects gauge .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2 Firmware environment commands ........................................................................................................... 9-2
9-3 Chart of image adjustment procedures................................................................................................... 9-10
9-4 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................ 9-14
(1) Engine..................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
(2) Engine / ISU/ EH/ LVU/ Fuser ............................................................................................................... 9-15
(3) Operation Panel / LCD............................................................................................................................ 9-16
(4) Main/ Engine/ Operation Panel/ ISU/ LSU .............................................................................................. 9-17
9-5 Wiring diagram (Options) ........................................................................................................................ 9-19
(1) Paper feeder (PF-470/PF-471) ............................................................................................................... 9-19
(2) Attachment Kit (AK-470): 32ppm model only.......................................................................................... 9-20
(3) 500 sheets Finisher (DF-470): 32ppm model only.................................................................................. 9-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9-6 Installation guide ..................................................................................................................................... 9-22

(1) IB-50 ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-22
(2) IB-51 ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
(3) IB-36 ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
(4) PF-470/PF-471 ....................................................................................................................................... 9-28
(5) AK-470/DF-470 ....................................................................................................................................... 9-31
(6) Fax System 13 ........................................................................................................................................ 9-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
1 Specification
1 - 1 Specifications
(1)Common function
Item Description
32 ppm model 25 ppm model
7 inch LCD 4.3 inch LCD

Type Desktop
Printing Method Electro-photography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2
Multi Purpose 60 to 256 g/m2

Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Vellum, Rough, Letterhead, Color,
Prepunched, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as Simplex, exclude Vellum)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency, Preprinted, Labels, Bond, Recycled, Vellum, Rough,
Tray Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Envelope, Cardstock, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II, 216×340 mm,
Folio, 8K, 16K
Multi Purpose A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement,
Tray Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom(98 x 148 to 297 x 432 mm)
Printable Area Print margin for top and bottom is 4 mm, both sides is 3 ± 2.5 mm
Warm-up Time Power on 21 seconds or less (Wi-Fi available model)

(23°C/73.4°F, 20 seconds or less (Wi-Fi unavailable model)
60%)
Low Power 8 seconds or less
Sleep 16.4 seconds or 13.9 seconds or less

less
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m2)*1

500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multi Purpose 100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m2)

Tray 25 sheets (lager than A4/Letter)(64 g/m2)
Output Tray Main tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)

Capacity
Job separator 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electro-photography
Light source Tri-color LED White LED
Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD Flat surface scanning by the CIS
image sensor image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Charging system Contact main charger roller system
1-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
Item Description
7 inch LCD 4.3 inch LCD

Developer Mono component jumping developer system
system Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
Transfer system Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter separation and separation needle (Impressing DC voltage)
Cleaning system Counter blade
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Heat/pressure fusing with fuser heat roller + Fuser pressure roller
Heat source: Halogen heater
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermal-cutout
Memory Standard: 1024 MB (On-Board)

Maximum: 3072 MB (On-Board +2048MB DIMM)
Large capacity storage SSD 32 GB / 128 GB
Interface Standard Hi-Speed USB: 1

Hi-Speed USB Host: 2
Network interface: 1 (1000Base-T/100Base-Tx/10BASE-T)
USB-Host: 2 (USB Flash memory slot)
Option eKUIO: 2 (FAX can be installed in the Slot1 only)
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Environment
Humidity 10 to 80%
Altitude 3500 m/11482 ft maximum
Brightness 1500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 590 × 590 × 688 mm / 23.23" × 23.23" × 27.09"
Weight (without toner container) Approx. 52 kg / Approx. 114.6 lbs Approx. 49 kg / Approx. 108.0 lbs
Space Required (W × D) 873 × 590 mm / 34.37" × 23.23" (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 100V AC, 50/60Hz, 14.0A

120V AC, 60Hz, 11.8A
220-240V AC, 50Hz, 6A
*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(2)Copy Functions
Item Description

Copy Speed A4/Letter 32 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
(Cassette paper A4-R/Letter-R 23 sheets/min 18 sheets/min

feed section)
A3/Ledger 17 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B4/Legal 17 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B5 32 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B5-R 20 sheets/min 16 sheets/min
A5-R 15 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
First Copy Time 5.2 seconds or less 5.8 seconds or less

(A4, place on the platen, feed from
Cassette)
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%,
50%, 25%
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(3)Printer Functions
Item Description

Printing Speed A4/Letter 32 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
(Cassette paper A4-R/Letter-R 23 sheets/min 18 sheets/min

feed section)
A3/Ledger 17 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B4/Legal 17 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B5 32 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B5-R 20 sheets/min 16 sheets/min
A5-R 15 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
First Print Time 5.2 seconds or less 5.8 seconds or less

(A4, place on the platen, feed from
Cassette)
Resolution Fine 1200, 600 × 600 dpi
Operating System Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows
Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016, Mac OS X
v10.5 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 802.3az
supported)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL/PCL-5e), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open

XPS
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(4)Scanner Functions
Item Description
CCD CIS
Resolution 300dpi x 300dpi (Default), 200dpi x 200dpi, 200dpi x 100dpi, 600dpi x 600dpi,
400dpi x 400dpi, 200dpi x 400dpi
File Format TIFF, PDF, XPS, OpenXPS, PDF (high compression), JPEG
Scanning Speed Single sided 300 × 300 dpi: 50ipm 300 × 300 dpi: 50ipm
*1
monochrome 600 × 600 dpi: 36ipm 600 × 600 dpi: 36ipm
(A4, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Single sided 300 × 300 dpi: 50ipm 300 × 300 dpi: 50ipm
Text/Photo color 600 × 600 dpi: 36ipm 600 × 600 dpi: 30ipm
original)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, SMTPoverSSL, FTP, FTPoverSSL, TWAIN *2, WIA*2, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Win-
dows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2016
1-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(5)Document Processor
Item Description
Document Processor system Automatic feed system (pickup pulley system + torque limiter system)
Original type Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm)

Minimum: A5-R/Statement-R (140 × 182 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m²

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²
Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2)*1
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(6)Option
(6-1)500 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder (PF-470)
Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
Paper weight 60 to 163 g/m2
Media type Plain, Recycled, Color
Paper Size A3,A4R,A4,A5R,B4,B5R,B5,Folio,Ledger,Legal,LetterR,Letter,Statement,Execut

ive,Oficio II,8K,16KR,16K
Paper Capacity (No. Sheets: 550(64 g/m²)×1 cassette / 500(80g/m²)× 1 cassette)
Dimension (W × D × H) 590× 589× 352mm
Weight Approx. 21 kg / Approx. 46.3 lbs
Power source Supply from the main unit
(6-2)500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder (PF-471)

Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
Media type Plain, Recycled, Color
Paper Size A3,A4R,A4,A5R,B4,B5R,B5,Folio,Ledger,Legal,LetterR,Letter,Statement,Execut

ive,Oficio II,8K,16KR,16K
Paper Capacity No. Sheets: 550(64 g/m²)×2 cassettes / 500(80g/m²)× 2 cassettes
Dimension (W × D × H) 590× 589× 352mm
Weight Approx. 21 kg / Approx. 46.3 lbs
Power source Supply from the main unit
1-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(6-3)500 sheets Finisher (DF-470) (32ppm model only)

Item Description
Type Hunger type
Number of Trays 1 tray
Number of no stapling A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, OficioII, 216×340mm, 8K: 250 sheets
sheets and size A4, A4R, B5, B5R, Letter, LetterR, ExcutiveR, 16K: 500 sheets
storage limit
Stapling A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 22 sets
When stapling 2 A4R, LetterR: 40 sets
to 10 sheets A4, B5, Letter, 16K: 45 sets

When stapling 11 A4R, LetterR: 20 sets
to 20 sheets A4, B5, Letter, 16K: 22 sets

When stapling 21 A4, A4R, B5, Letter, LetterR, 16K: 15 sets
to 30 sheets
Stapling A4, A4R, B5, Letter, LetterR, 16K: 9 sets

When stapling 31
to 50 sheets
Number of sheets staple limit A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 216×340mm, 8K: 25 sheets
Paper Weight 90 g/m² or less
Dimension (W × D × H) 416 × 521 × 275.5 mm / 16.38 “ × 20.51 “ × 10.85 “
Weight Approx. 12 kg / Approx. 26.4lb or less
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification >
(6-4)FAX System (FAX System 13)

Item Description
Compatibility G3
Communication Line Subscriber telephone line
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/

7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original Size Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm/63"
Number of originals to auto feed Max. 50 sheets (When using the document processor)
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
Print: 600 × 600 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 100 keys
Multi-Station Transmission Max. 100 destinations
Substitute Memory Reception 700 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Image Memory Capacity Standard memory (12MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Option Handset
Note
Specification subject to change for improvement of performance without notice
1-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Part Names
1 - 2 Part Names
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)Exterior
9 10 11
12 13
13 14
15
8
16
2 6 4 5
2
1 Cassette 9 DP top cover.

2 Paper width guides 10 DP feed roller
3 Paper length guide 11 DP pickup roller
4 MP tray 12 DP separation pulley
5 MP sub tray 13 DP original width guide
6 MP paper width guides 14 DP original tray
7 Main tray 15 USB Memory Slot
8 Operation panel PWB 16 Operation panel PWB
(7-inch panel model) (4.3-inch panel model)
1-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
29 25
20
27
26
17 Front Cover 24 feed-shift guide

18 Power switch 25 Drum unit
19 Waste punch box 26 Developer unit
20 Right cover 1 27 Toner container lever
21 MP feed roller 28 Fuser unit
22 Registration roller right 29 Toner container
23 Transfer roller
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Connectors/Interior
8
9
4
10
3
11
6
7
5
1 DP angle regulating plate 8 USB Interface Connector

2 DP Connector cover 9 Network Interface Connector
3 Control box cover 10 Option interface (Slot 2)
4 DF Interface connector (32ppm model only) 11 Option interface (Slot 1)
5 Cassette heater switch
6 Outlet connector (32ppm model only)
7 Inlet connector
1-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)With Optional Equipments Attached
5 4
1 Finisher exit tray (32ppm model only)

2 Finisher (32ppm model only)
3 BR conveying section (32 ppm model only)
4 Cassette 2
5 Cassette 3
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)FAX System
1 LINE Connector (L1)

Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
2 TEL Connector (T1)
When using an optional handset or available telephone, connect it here.
Note
Press the power key at the front side of the main unit to turn the power off.
1-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Operation Panel Keys

7-inch panel model
18 5 8 12 13
14
1
9
7
10
2
3
11
4
17 16 15
21 20 19
4.3-inch panel model
18 5 8 12 13
14
1
9
7
10
2
3
11
4
17 16 15
21 20 19
*1: Except 100V model
1-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Product name Description

1 [Home] key Shift the function setting value to the default and move to the home screen
2 Function Key (1) These keys enable various functions and applications to be registered.
5 [Numeric Keypad] key Key to input the value in the panel
6 Job separator, LED Blinking when operating the job separator
7 [Status / Job Cancel] key / LED Transitions to the screens of copy and print job processing, each transmission
processing status check, stop, and job priority processing (interruption).
8 [System Menu / Counter] key / Displays on the LCD screen the transition to the system menu screen and total counter
LED values (scan, print, etc.) inside the system.
9 [Reset] key Transitions the function setting value to the default and displays the basic screen in
each of the functions.
10 [Stop] key Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
11 [Start] key / LED Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
12 [Interrupt] key / LED Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
13 [Logout] key / LED Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user
14 [Energy Saver] key / LED Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
15 Attention, LED Lights or blinks when an error occurs.
16 Memory, LED Blinks while the machine is accessing the SSD or USB memory (general purpose item).
17 Processing, LED Blinks during print processing, Fax transmission, i-Fax transmission, scan transmission,
Fax reception, i-Fax reception and print data reception.
18 Touch panel Full color 7 inch LCD, Full color 4.3 inch LCD
19 [Enter] key Confirm the numeric key input or on-going function setting. Links to [OK] on the touch
panel.
20 [Quick No. Search] key Direct the registration contents by number such as the address number, user ID, etc.
21 [Clear] key Erases number or character input.
1-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Specification > Optional Equipment
1 - 3 Optional Equipment
The following options are available for this machine.
(4)DF-470
(5)Expansion 32 ppm model only (3)AK-470

Memory
(6)SD/SDHC
Memory card (2)PF-471 (1)PF-470
(7)Card Authentication Kit(B)
(8)HD-6/HD-7 (9)IB-50 (10)IB-51
Optional Applications
(13)Data Security Kit(E)
(14)UG-33
(12)Fax
System 13 (11)IB-36
1-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)PF-470 <500 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder>

One additional cassette identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
1-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)PF-471 <500 sheets X 2 Paper Feeder>

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
1-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)AK-470 <Attachment Kit> (32ppm model only)

Paper conveying unit from main unit exit to the finisher entry guide
1-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)DF-470 <500 sheets Finisher> (32ppm model only)

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be
stapled.
1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Expansion memory
Expanding memory enables more complex printing and speeds up print job processing. The optional Expansion Memory
provides an additional 2048 MB of memory, allowing expansion up to 3072 MB.
1-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)SD/SDHC memory card

The SD/SDHC memory card is a micro chip card that can be written optional fonts, macros, forms, etc.
1-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list.
1-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)HD-6/HD-7 <SSD>
With SSD installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables high-speed
printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, the document box function can be used.
1-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9)IB-50 <Network Interface Kit>

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. IB-50 supports
traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.
Only supports minimum function of standard utilities.
1-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(10)IB-51 <Wireless Network Interface Kit>

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b. IB-51 supports traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.
Only supports minimum function of standard utilities.
The IB-51 setup utility is compatible with a Windows OS and Mac OSX.
1-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (220 to 240 V only (100/120V: standard))
This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and
11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is supported.
1-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(12)FAX System 12 <FAX Kit>

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer. Refer to the Fax operation guide for details.
1-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(13)Data Security Kit(E) <Data Security Kit>

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the SSD so that it cannot be retrieved. The
Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the SSD. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be
decoded by ordinary output or operations.
1-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(14)UG-33 <Thin Print Option>

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
1-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
2 Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or
less when the temperature is 90.5°F (32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80% (But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less

when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power requirements: AC100V 50/60Hz 15A or more
AC110V 60Hz 13A or more
AC120V 60Hz 12A or more
AC220 to 240V 50Hz 7.2A or more
4. Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows:
Humidity: 36 to 65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
• Avoid locations with vibrations
• Avoid locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations
If the floor is delicate, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged by the casters.
During operation, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400 mm or more
15 3/4” or more
300 mm or more 350 mm or more 1000 mm or more 100 mm or more

11 13/16” or more 13 3/4” or more 39 3/8” or more 3 15/16” or more
2-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
2 - 2 Installing the main unit

Installation procedures
START
Unpacking and checking bundled items
Install the job separator tray
Release the scanner lock (High-end model)
Loading Paper
Switch the cassette heater switch
Output a maintenance report

Connect the power cord (Maintenance mode U000)
Install the toner container Clearing the counts

(maintenance mode U927)
Default Setting
Setting the delivery date
(maintenance item U278)
Installing Software
Exit maintenance mode
COMPLETION OF
THE MACINE INSTALLATION
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(1)Unpacking and checking bundled items

Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.
(1-1)Main unit
13 12
21
20
15 11
16
19 17
18
25 5
24
7
14
10
4
23
22
8
22
9 1
3 6
22 2 22
1. Bottom case 10. Spacer B 19. Plastic bag
2. Bottom pad R 11. Outer case 20. Job Separator Tray
3. Bottom pad L 12. Upper pad R 21. Plastic bag (400x600)
4. Machine cover (740x700) 13. Upper pad L 22. Hinge
5. Main unit 14. Power cord 23. Inner case F
6. Inner case R 15. Toner container 24. Inner case B
7. Inner case L 16. Plastic bag (400x600) 26. Setup guide
8. Spacer A 17. DVD
9. Plastic bag (630x730) 18. Installation guide, etc.
Caution
Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.
2-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(2)Notes on main unit transportation

When transporting the main unit, lift the front and rear handle of the lower part of the main unit with two persons as
shown in the figure.
Do not hold the operation unit because it will cause damage.
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(3)Attaching the job separator tray
1 Attach the job separator tray (a) by inserting it while aligning to the right guide (b) and
the left guide (c).
a b
(4)Unlocking the scanner mirror frame (CCD model only)
1 Unlock the lock of the scanner mirror frame.

1 Push the front side of the scanner lock cover (a) and slide it in the direction of the arrow (1) and (2) to remove
the scanner lock cover (a).
2 Rotate the scanner lock cover (a) (3), then insert the hook (b) of the scanner lock cover (a) into the opening,
and attach it in the direction of the arrow (4).
• In case of omitting to unlock, C3100 occurs.
42
b
3
2-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(5)Loading Paper
(5-1)Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Such paper may cause a jam.
• If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
Important
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This
may cause poor image quality or malfunctions.
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(5-2)Set paper in the cassette

The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, etc.
The cassette can hold 550 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.
Note
Do not pull out multiple cassettes simultaneously.
2 Adjust the position of the paper length guide.

1 Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
1 2
3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

1 Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
2
1
2-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
4 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2 Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Important
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (See page P. 2-
6)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use,
the paper may skew or become jammed.
5 Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
6 Insert the paper size sheet.
7 Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
2-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(6)Switching the cassette heater switch
1 Switch the cassette heater switch.

1 Release the hook (a) and remove the cassette heater switch cover (b).
2 Switch the cassette heater switch (C).
3 Reattach the cassette heater switch cover (b) in the original position.
c
b
Note
Turn on, only when using the cassette heater.
(7)Connecting the Power Cord
1 Connect one end of the supplied power cord to the main unit and the other end to a
power outlet.
• Power is supplied when connecting the power cord.
• Only use the power cord that comes with the main unit.
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(8)Setting up the Toner Container
1 Open the front cover.
2 Take out the new toner container.
3 Slightly tap the toner container.
2-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
4 Shake the toner container.
5 Install the toner container.
6 Close the front cover.
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(9)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed. Available
of setting the necessary items. Also, it can beset from System Menu as below.
[System Menu/Counter] key
(9-1)Setting Date and Time
1 Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
2 Configure the settings.

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If
you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform
Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute
(00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western
notation.
Value:
2-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(9-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are as follows.
• TCP/IP: On
• DHCP: On
• Auto-IP: On
• IP Address: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter the Login User Name and the Login Password
> [Wired Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Setting].
Note
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login User Name/Login Password (25ppm model): 2500 / 2500
• Login User Name/Login Password (32ppm model): 3200 / 3200 (except 100V model)
2 Select [IPv4] for setting.
Important
Restart the network from System Menu, or turn the power off and then on waiting 5 seconds or more.
When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address
[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal (0 to 255) separated by four dots.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
[Auto-IP]: Set to [Off].
When setting Auto IP, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
(9-3)Paper size and media type setting
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP tray Settings].
2 Select [Cassette 1 (to 3) ] or [MP Tray Setting].
3 Select [Paper Size] and [Media Type] to set them.
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(10)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer
function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See
the Operation Guide supplied with the main unit)
(11)Output Maintenance Report (Execute maintenance mode U000)

1 Input "000" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
2 Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the maintenance report.
3 Press the [Stop] key.
(12)Clearing the counts (Maintenance mode U927)

2 Select [Execute].
3 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
(13)Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278)

2 Select [Today].
3 Press the [Start] key to set the delivery date.
(14)Exiting from the maintenance mode

• The maintenance mode is exited.
2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(15)Completion of installing the main unit

1 Make sure that each indicator is not flashing, and then push the power switch (a). (OFF)
2 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

• It takes a few minutes for power off.
3 Push the power switch (a). (ON)
Important
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more,
and then turn on the power switch.
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional devices
2 - 3 Installing the optional devices

(1)Unpacking and checking bundled items
Take out the optional unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the optional unit.
(1-1)Paper Feeder (PF-470) (Option)
14
15
13
4
13
16 5
12
6 9 3
10
1 11
2
1. Paper Feeder 7. Upper left rear cushioning 13. Plastic bag (70x110)
material
2. Outer case 8. Upper right front cushioning 14. Installation guide
material
3. Inner case 9. Upper right rear cushioning 15. Cursor pin
material
4. Bottom left cushioning 10. Top spacer 16. Paper size plate
material
2-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5. Bottom right cushioning 11. Poly sheet

material
6. Upper left front cushioning 12. Plastic bag (240x350)
material
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Paper Feeder (PF-471) (Option)
15 14
13
4
13
16 5
12
6 9 3
10
1 11
2
1. Paper Feeder 7. Upper left rear cushioning 13. Plastic bag (70x110)
material
2. Outer case 8. Upper right front cushioning 14. Installation guide

material
3. Inner case 9. Upper right rear cushioning 15. Cursor pins

material
4. Bottom left cushioning 10. Top spacer 16. Paper size plate
material
5. Bottom right cushioning 11. Poly sheet

material
6. Upper left front cushioning 12. Plastic bag (240x350)

material
2-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Attachment Kit (AK-470) (Option)
10 7
4
1
1. BR power supply unit 5. BR lower right guide 9. Upper pad
2. Outer case 6. Top spacer 10. Pins
3. Main pad 7. BR conveying unit
4. Bottom spacer 8. Tray bridge
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)500-sheet Finisher (DF-470) (Option)
12
11
8
9
4
10
3
7
5 6
1. Finisher main body 5. Bottom pad L 9. Upper pad R
2. Outer case 6. Bottom pad R 10. DF exit tray
3. Protect sheet 7. Spacer 11. Installation guide
4. Poly sheet 8. Upper pad L 12. Stop rings
2-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Optional unit installation

Install necessary optional units in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
Category Product name 32 ppm model 25 ppm model Page
Network IB-50 (Network Interface Kit) ○ ○ P. 9-22
IB-51 (Wireless Network Interface Kit) ○ ○ P. 9-24
IB-36 (Wireless Network Interface Kit) ○ ○ P. 9-26
PF PF-470 (500-sheet x1 Paper Feeder) ○ ○ P. 9-28
PF-471 (500-sheet x2 Paper Feeder) ○ ○
DF AK-470 (Attachment Kit) ○ × P. 9-31
DF-470 (500-sheet Hanger Finisher) ○ ×
FAX kit FAX System 13 ○ ○ P. 9-34
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Installing the optional parts
2 - 4 Installing the optional parts

(1)Expansion memory
The machine can perform more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memory. The memory can increase up to
maximum 3072MB by attaching the optional expansion memory (2048MB).
Precautions for Handling the Memory
Important
Static electricity that accumulates in your body through clothing or carpets may damage a memory. To protect a
memory, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object.
Wear the anti-static wrist band on the wrist.
1 Remove the control box cover.

1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
Note
The shutdown confirmation screen is displayed. It might take about three minutes to shut down.
2 Release the three hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow and remove the controller box cover (a).
b
a
2-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Remove the screw (a) (M3 x 8) and open the memory slot cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
3 Attach the expansion memory.

1 Align the terminal section of the expansion memory (a) to the socket (b) side and align the cut-out section with
the protruding section of the socket, and insert it diagonally and straight.
2 Carefully press the inserted memory module toward the main unit.
3 Reattach the covers.
Note
Detaching the expansion memory
To detach the expansion memory, remove the rear left cover from the main unit. Then, carefully push the two
stoppers so that the expansion memory pops up from the socket.
Checking the expansion memory
In order to verify if the expansion memory is installed properly, print out a status page and check its content.
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)SD/SDHC memory card

Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
• The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read into the main unit after turning the power on.

Note
b
a
2 Release the hook (a) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the SD card cover
(b).
3 Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
2-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC card, you must first format it with the main unit.
Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card.
If you have installed an application, do not format the SD card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD card.
Format it with a PC or Prescribe command in advance.
Format procedure in the system menu

1 Press [System Menu/Counter] key.
2 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] > Enter the Login User Name
and the Login Password > [Format SD Card].
Note
3 Select [Yes] to execute the initialization.
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)SSD (HD-6/HD-7)

Note
b
a
2 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
b
a
3 Attach the SSD to the main unit.

1 Insert the PWB unit (a) straight into the option slot (c).
2 Attach the PWB unit (a) to the upper slot (Slot 2) with two screws (b) (M3x8) removed.
a
b
c
b
2-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
• When installing a new SSD, the guidance to format will be displayed at the first startup.
• The memory LED blinks when forming a preview image in an SSD after restart if data exists in the FAX box.
Formatting the SSD

When an optional SSD is inserted into the main unit for the first time, it must be formatted before use.
Formatting will delete all existing data on the SSD.
Format procedure in the system menu

1 Press [System Menu/Counter] key.
2 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Settings] > Enter the Login User Name
and the Login Password > [Format SSD].
Note
3 Select [Yes] to execute the initialization.
4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Card reader
Card reader installation requires the following parts (bundled in the main unit).
• Sponge *1 2 pcs
• Hook-and-loop fastener 2 pairs
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
Note
2 Open the document processor (a).
3 Release two hooks (c) downwards and remove the card reader cover (b) in the direction
of the arrow.
2-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Affix the hook-and-loop fastener to the back side of the card reader.
1 Affix the sponge (b) * 1 and a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to each of the protrusions (a) of the ISU front
cover.
2 Affix the card reader (d) aligning to the position of the affixed hook-and-loop fasteners (c).
b a
d
c
5 Attach the card reader.

1 Connect the USB connector (b) to the main body connector.
2 Bundle the surplus length of the cable (c) and attach the card reader (a).
b a
6 Reattach the card reader cover (a) in the original position and close the document
processor.
*1: 100V specification only
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Handset (100V model only)
Handset installation requires the following parts:

Handset (1909AG9JP0) 1 pc
(Bundled parts)
• Handset 1 pc
• Handset holder 1 pc
• Handset mounting plate 1 pc
• Protection cover 1 pc
• Pins 2 pcs
• Telephone wire 1 pc
• Modular cord 1 pc
• Nuts 2 pcs
1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2 Attach the handset mounting plate (a) to the upper left portion of the main unit (c) with
two pins (b).
• Use the screw at the lower hole of the handset mounting plate.
a
b
2-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Connect the connector (c) of the telephone cable (b) to the handset holder (a) and insert
it into the cable guide (d) while extending the telephone cable (b).
a
d
4 Put the pins (b) into the two catches at the back side of the handset holder (a) and slide
it toward you to fix it.
5 Attach the protection cover (a) to the handset mounting plate (b).
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Connect the telephone cable (a) to the handset (b).

• Insert the telephone cable (a) into between the handset holder (c) and the main body (d).
b
a
B
c d B
7 Release the three hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow and remove the controller box
cover (a).
b
a
8 Connect the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the TEL terminal (c) of the FAX
PWB and reattach the removed controller box cover.
c
b
2-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Connect the other end of the modular cord (a) to the handset holder (b).
a
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
2 - 5 About Optional Applications

application
Data Security Kit ThinPrint Option*1
Card Authentication Kit*1
*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

*Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
*If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Use of an Application
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter the Login User Name and the Login Password
> [Optional Function].
Note
2 Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

• You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] or [Details].
Item
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
3 Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
Installing OCR dictionary

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [OCR dictionary installation]
• When installing the OCR dictionary firmware, it is necessary that the SSD or the SD card has to be installed.
• It is necessary to format the SSD / SD card at the system menu in the main unit.
Note
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of
activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
2-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > About Optional Applications
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation > Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system
2 - 6 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system

1 Connect the power plug of the main unit to the outlet and turn the power on.
2 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
4 Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
• Refer to the following country code list.
5 Select [Execute].
6 Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.

• Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
Country code list

Country Destination Country Destination
code code
000 Japan 181 North America *2
156 Asian nations *1 181 South America *3
254 Taiwan 253 European nations *4
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand *5
*1 Applied for Sales company competent Singapore, India, Thailand, Hong Kong.
*2 Applied for Sales company competent USA, Canada,Mexico.
*3 Applied for Sales company competent Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentina, Brazil.
*4 Applied for Sales company competent Italy,Germany,Spain,U.K.,Netherlands,Sweden,France,Austria,Switzerland,
Belgium,Denmark,Finland,Portugal,Ireland,Norway,Turkey,Russia,Saudi arabia.
*5 Change the country code when selling in New Zealand. The country code to input is 126.
7 After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
Important
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps
of FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at
V.34 communication in such a line.
Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off (See page P. 6-140)
U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed] (See page P. 6-135)
2-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design >
3 Machine Design
3 - 1 Mechanical Configuration
(1)Cross-section view (CCD model)
15
13
11
10
12
7
6
5
4
14 9 1 8 2
Light path Paper path Paper path (option)
1. Cassette 9. Toner container

2. Cassette paper feed section 10. Fuser section
3. MP paper feed section 11. feed-shift and exit section
4. registration roller 12. Duplex conveying section
5. Transfer and separation section 13. Image scanner unit
6. Main charger section 14. Laser scanner unit
7. Drum and cleaning section 15. Document Processor
8. Developer section
3-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design >
(2)Cross-section view (CIS model)
15
13
11
10
12
7
6
5
4
14 9 1 8 2
Light path Paper path Paper path (option)
1. Cassette 9. Toner container
2. Cassette paper feed section 10. Fuser section
3. MP paper feed section 11. feed-shift and exit section
4. registration roller 12. Duplex conveying section
5. Transfer and separation section 13. Image scanner unit
6. Main charger section 14. Laser scanner unit
7. Drum and cleaning section 15. Document Processor
8. Developer section
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option)
3 - 2 Extension device construction (option)

(1)500-sheet x1 Paper Feeder cross-section view (PF-470)
Paper path (option)
1. Cassette paper feed section (Cassette 2)
(2)500-sheet x2 Paper Feeder cross-section view (PF-471)
2
Paper path (option)
1. Upper paper feed section (Cassette 2) 2 Lower paper feed section (Cassette 3)
3-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option)
(3)Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-470)
Paper path (option)
1. BR paper conveying section
(4)5000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-470)
Paper path (option)
1. Finisher process section 3. Power supply unit section
2. Exit tray section
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts
3 - 3 Electric parts
(1)Wire connection
(1-1)(Machine rear side)
16
15
13 14
2
12
11
1
4
5
3
8
9
10 17
1. Main PWB 10. Lift motor
2. Enginee PWB 11. Fuser pressure release motor
3. eKUIO PWB 12. Exit fan motor
4. Fuser motor 13. DF PWB
5. Developer motor 14. DP feed-shift motor
6. Main motor 15. DP conveying motor
7. Registration clutch 16 DP feed motor
8. Duplex clutch 17 Temperature/humidity fan motor
9. Feed clutch
3-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Machine inside
2
3
4
1. Low voltage PWB 4. Zener PWB
2. High voltage PWB 5. Laser scanner unit
3. Thermopile 6. Power source fan motor
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Descriptions about the major PWBs

(2-1)Main PWB
High Model Low Model
Control the entire software for the interface to the PC and network and image data processing, etc.
(2-2)Enginee PWB
Control the entire hardware to generate the high-voltage and the bias and for the paper conveying system and the fuser
temperature, etc.
(2-3)High voltage PWB
Output the main high-voltage, the developer bias and the transfer bias.
3-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-4)Low voltage PWB
100-120V 220-240V
Rectify the AC power input to the full-wave, convert it to DC24V by switched mode and output it. Also, control the fuser
heater.
(2-5)Operation panel main PWB
High Model Low Model
Control the LCD, the LED indicators and the key switches.
(2-6)DP PWB
Control the driver circuit of the motors and clutches, and the electric parts.
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)PWBs
(3-1)Layout
Document processor
Fuser unit
Drum unit
2
20 Main unit 3
24
4
Developer unit 21 23 5
12 6
13
7
14
15 8
16
17
18 9
Laser scanner unit
19 10
22 25
11
Front side: / Inside: / Back side:
1. DP PWB Controlling the driver circuit of the motors and clutches, and the electric
parts.
2. CIS PWB *1 Front side original scanning
3. Wi-Fi PWB Sending and receiving the wireless data.
4. LED drive PWB *2 Controlling the LED
3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5. Main PWB Controlling the entire software for the interface to the PC and network and
image data processing, etc.
6. CCD PWB *2 Original image scanning
7. Enginee PWB Controlling of the entire hardware to generate the high-voltage and the bias,
and for the paper conveying system and the fuser temperature, etc.
8. High voltage PWB Generating the main charger high-voltage, the developer bias and the
transfer bias
9. Developer relay PWB Configuring the Enginee PWB and the developer unit wiring relay circuit.
10. Toner container relay PWB Configuring the Enginee PWB and the toner container wiring relay circuit.
11. Drum relay PWB Configuring the Enginee PWB and the drum unit wiring relay circuit.
12. Operation panel PWB *3 Controlling the LCD, the LED indicator and the key switches.
13. Operation panel PWB *4 Controlling the LCD, the LED indicator and the key switches.
14. Panel key PWB L *4 Configuring the LED indicator and the key switches.
15. Panel key PWB L *3 Configuring the LED indicator and the key switches.
16. NFC PWB *4 Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
17. NFC PWB *3 Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
18. Panel key PWB R Configuring the LED indicator and the key switches.
19. Low voltage PWB Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave, convert it to DC24V by
switched mode and output it. Controlling the fuser heater.
20. Drum PWB Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit Individual drum information
storage by EEPROM
21. Developer PWB Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit
22. APC PWB Emitting and controlling the laser beam
23. LED PWB F *2 Emitting the LED
24. LED PWB R *2 Emitting the LED
25. Zener PWB Voltage potential control of fixing heat roller (countermeasure for offset)
*1: CIS model only, *2: CCD model only, *3: 4.3-inch panel model only, *4: 7-inch panel model
(3-2)Part name table
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
1 DP PWB PARTS PWB DP MAIN ASSY SP 302P194180
(PARTS DP UNIT SP) (302P193100)
2 CIS PWB *1 - -
(PARTS CIS ASSY SP) (302P293010)
3 Wi-Fi PWB PARTS WIFI UNIT SP 302P194130
4 LED drive PWB *2 - -

(PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY) (302P193110)
5 Main PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302P294030 *5

PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP EU 302P294040 *5
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302P194140 *6
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP EU 302P194150 *6
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 CCD PWB *2 PARTS ISU SP 302P193120
7 Enginee PWB PARTS PWB EngineE ASSY SP 302P194170
8 High voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE SP 302P194260
9 Developer relay PWB PARTS PWB DEVE CONNECT ASSY SP 302P194210
10 Toner container relay PWB PARTS PWB CONTAINER CONNECT 302P194190

ASSY SP
11 Drum relay PWB PARTS PWB DRUM CONNECT ASSY SP 302K394080
12 Operation panel PWB *3 PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 302P294050

(PARTS OPERATION UNIT SP) (302P294010)
13 Operation panel PWB *4 PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 302P194160

(PARTS OPERATION UNIT SP) (302P194070) *6
(PARTS OPERATION UNIT J SP) (302P294020) *5
14 Panel key PWB L *4 - -

15 Panel key PWB L *3 - -

16 NFC PWB *4 - -
17 NFC PWB *3 - -
18 Panel key PWB R - -

(PARTS OPERATION UNIT SP) (302P194070) *4, *6
(PARTS OPERATION UNIT J SP) (302P294020) *4, *5
19 Low voltage PWB PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 100V SP 302P194250

PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 200V SP 302P194240
20 Drum PWB - -
(DK-6115) (302P193010)
21 Developer PWB - -
(DV-6115) (302P193020)
22 APC PWB - -
(LK-6115) (302P193080)
23 LED PWB F*2 - -

24 LED PWB R*2 - -

25 Zener PWB PARTS PWB ZENER ASSY SP 302P194220
*1: CIS model only, *2: CCD model only, *3: 4.3-inch panel model only, *4: 7-inch panel model only
*5: 25 ppm model only, *6: 32 ppm model only
3-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Sensors and Switches

(4-1)Layout
Document processor
1
Fuser unit 2
7 3
4
8 5
40 6
9
41
Drum unit
10
Main unit 11
42 12
13
Developer unit
14
15
23 16
17
18
19
20
21
24 22
35
Laser scanner unit 34 36
25
37 26
38 27
39 28
29
30
31
32
33
1. DP top cover switch Configuring the safety circuit when the top cover open/close, and resetting
the original jam.
2. DP feed sensor Original jam detection at the primary feed.
3. DP feed-shift sensor Reversing guide position detection
4. DP original sensor Original set detection
5. DP original width sensor Original width detection
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6. DP original length sensor Original length detection
7. DP registration sensor Secondary paper feed timing detection
8. DP timing sensor Original scan timing detection
9. DP open/close switch DP open/close detection
10. Home position sensor *1 ISU home position detection
11. Home position sensor *2 ISU home position detection
12. Original size timing sensor *1 Original size sensor operation
13. Original size timing sensor *2 Original size sensor operation
14. Original size sensor *1 Original size detection
15. Original size sensor *2 Original size detection
16. JS paper full sensor Job separator tray paper full detection
17. Paper full sensor Main tray paper full detection
18. BR switch Bridge detection
19. Right cover switch 24V power supply line shutoff when the right cover is open
20. JS paper sensor Paper detection in the job separator section
21. Toner container lock sensor Toner container lock detection
22. Toner container sensor Toner container detection
23. Cassette heater switch Cassette heater power supply on/off
24. Paper length switch Cassette paper size (length) detection
25. Upper paper sensor Cassette paper level detection
26. Lower paper sensor Cassette paper level detection
27. Paper width switch Cassette paper size (width) detection
28. DU sensor Duplex conveying timing control and paper jam detection
29. Registration sensor Secondary paper feed timing control
30. Conveying sensor Paper jam detection at the vertical conveying section
31. Lift sensor Cassette lift plate upper limit detection
32. MP paper sensor Paper detection in the MP tray
33. PF connection switch PF connection detection
34. Exit sensor Paper jam detection at the fuser section
35. Temperature/humidity sensor Machine inside temperature and absolute humidity detection
36. Thermopile Fuser roller surface temperature detection
37. Front cover switch 24V power supply line shutoff when the front cover is open
38. Power switch Power supply on/off to the main PWB, Enginee PWB, operation panel PWB,
etc.
39. Toner sensor Toner level detection in the toner container
40. Fuser thermistor Fuser heat roller temperature detection
41. Fuser pressure release sensor Fuser pressure mode detection
42. Waste toner sensor Waste toner detection in the waste toner box
*1: CIS model only, *2: CCD model only
3-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 DF top cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB27160
2 DP feed sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

3 DP feed-shift sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

4 DP original sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

5 DP original width sensor PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR ASSY SP 303R394050
(PARTS TABLE ASSY SP) (302P194020)
6 DP original length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

(PARTS TABLE ASSY SP) (302P194020)
7 DP registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

8 DP timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

9 DP open/close switch PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260

10 Home position sensor *1 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260
11 Home position sensor *2 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
12 Original size timing sensor *1 PARTS SENSOR OPT SP 303M894260
13 Original size timing sensor *2 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
14 Original size sensor *1 - -

(PARTS SENSOR OPT SP) (302ND94800)
15 Original size sensor *2 - -

(PARTS SENSOR OPT SP) (302ND94800
16 JS full sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01

(PARTS EXIT UNIT SP) (302P194030)
(PARTS EXIT UNIT B SP) (302P194290) *3
17 Paper full sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01

18 BR switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000001+H01
19 Right cover switch SW.MICRO 7SM010205+++H01
20 JS paper sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01

21 Toner container lock sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
22 Toner container sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000001+H01
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
23 Cassette heater switch SW.SEESAW 7SC010105+++H01
24 Paper length switch SW.PUSH 7SP03090001+H01
25 Upper paper sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
26 Lower paper sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
27 Paper width switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000001+H01
28 DU sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01

(PARTS CONVEYING UNIT) (302P194010)
29 Registration sensor - -
(SENSOR FEED B) (303H327500)
30 Conveying sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
31 Lift sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
32 MP paper sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01

(PARTS MPF ASSY SP) (302P194040)
33 PF connection switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB27160
34 Exit sensor SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
35 Temperature/humidity sensor PARTS PWB THERMISTOR ASSY SP 302R694190
36 Thermopile PARTS THERMOPILE ASSY SP 302RH94110
37 Front cover switch SWITCH INTERLOCK 303J945030
38 Power switch PARTS PWB SWITCH ASSY SP 302NG94300
39 Toner sensor PARTS CONT SENSOR ASSY SP 302KK94070
40 Fuser thermistor - -
(FK-6115) (302P193040) *5
(FK-6116) (302P193050) *4
(FK-6117) (302P193060) *3
41 Fuser pressure release sensor - -

(FK-6115) (302P193040) *5
(FK-6116) (302P193050) *4
(FK-6117) (302P193060) *3
42 Waste toner sensor - -

(DK-6115) (302P193010)
*1: CIS model only, *2: CCD model only, *3: 120V model only, *4: 100V model only, *5: 220 to 240V model only
3-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Motors
(5-1)Layout
Document processor 14
Fuser unit 15
16
Drum unit
Main unit
Developer unit
1
2
11
3
4
12 5
6
Laser scanner unit 7
8
9
13
10
17
1. Scanner motor *2 ISU wire drive
2. Scanner motor *1 ISU belt drive
3. Exit fan motor Fuser and exit section cooling
4. Fuser pressure release motor Fuser pressure release drive
5. Fuser motor Fuser and duplex system drive
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6. Main motor Paper feed and drum system drive
7. Developer motor Developer system drive
8. Exit motor Exit system drive
9. Lift motor Cassette lift plate operation
10. Conveying fan motor Stabilize the paper conveying after transferring.
11. Power source fan motor LLow voltage PWB cooling
12. LSU fan motor Laser scanner unit cooling
13. Polygon motor Polygon mirror drive
14. DP conveying motor DP registration roller and DP conveying roller drive
15. DP feed motor Original feed section drive
16. DP feed-shift motor Original reversing and exit section drive
17. Temperature/humidity fan motor Machine inside cooling
1 Scanner motor *2 PARTS MOTOR ISU SP 302NG94211
2 Scanner motor *1 MOTOR REVERSE 302HN44100
3 Exit fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302NG94220
4 Fuser pressure release motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY SP 302RV94180
5 Fuser motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP 302LC94292

(DR-6115) (302P193090)
6 Main motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11 SP 302LC94463

(DR-6115) (302P193090)
7 Developer motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP 302LC94292

(DR-6115) (302P193090)
8 Exit motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN44100

9 Lift motor PARTS MOTOR LIFT ASSY SP 302K394190
10 Conveying fan motor FAN MOTOR PS40 302HG44120

(PARTS CONVEYING UNIT SP) (302P194010)
11 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302NG94220
12 LSU fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302NG94220
13 Polygon motor - -
(LK-6115) (302P193080)
14 DP conveying motor PARTS MOTOR PAPER FEED SP 303R494040

15 DP feed motor PARTS MOTOR PAPER FEED SP 303R494040

3-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
16 DP feed-shift motor MOTOR ROTARY 302KY44090
17 Temperature/humidity fan motor FAN MOTOR PS40 302HG44120
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Other parts
(6-1)Layout
Document processor
Fuser unit 11
12
10
Drum unit
13
Main unit
Developer unit
7 1
8
Laser scanner unit 2

3
4
5
6
9
1. feed-shift solenoid Paper output destination switching by operation of the feed-shift guide.
2. Developer clutch Developer section drive control
3. Registration clutch Secondary paper feed drive control
4. Duplex clutch Duplex conveying control
5. MP solenoid MP lift plate control
3-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6. Feed clutch Primary paper feed control from the cassette
7. LCD *2 Operation panel display
8. LCD *1 Operation panel display
9. Cassette heater Cassette section dehumidification
10. Fuser heater Heating the fuser heat roller
11. DP registration clutch DP secondary paper feed control
12. Thermal cutout Fuser heater power supply shutoff when the fuser heat roller temperature is
abnormally high.
13. Eraser Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum.
*1: 4.3-inch panel model only, *2: 7-inch panel model only
1 feed-shift solenoid SOLENOID ASSY 302F944090
(PARTS EXIT UNIT B SP) (302P194290)
2 Developer clutch PARTS CLUTCH 50 Z35R SP 302NG94200

(DR-6115) (302P193090)
3 Registration clutch CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV44041

(DR-6115) (302P193090)
4 Duplex clutch - -
(DR-6115) (302P193090)
5 MP solenoid - -
(DR-6115) (302P193090)
6 Feed clutch - -
(DR-6115) (302P193090)
7 LCD *2 PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302NM94121

8 LCD *1 PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP 302R494310

9 Cassette heater HEATER DEHUMIDIFIER 100 302RH44030

HEATER DEHUMIDIFIER 120 302RH44040
HEATER DEHUMIDIFIER 240 302RH44050
10 Fuser heater - -
(FK-6115) (302P193040) *7
(FK-6116) (302P193050) *6
(FK-6117) (302P193060) *5
11 DP registration clutch CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV44041

3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12 Thermal cutout - -
(FK-6115) (302P193040) *7
(FK-6116) (302P193050) *6
(FK-6117) (302P193060) *5
13 Eraser - -
(DK-6115) (302P193010)
*1: 4.3-inch panel model only, *2: 7-inch panel model only, *3: 25 ppm model only, *4: 32 ppm model only, *5: 120V model on-
ly,
*6: 100V model only, *7: 220 to 240V model only
3-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Electric parts (Optional unit)
3 - 4 Electric parts (Optional unit)

(1)Paper feeder (PF-470)
(1-1)Layout
1 2 34 6 8 9
5 7
10
11
12
13
1. PF PWB Each electrical parts control in the paper feeder and serial communication
with the main body
2. PF paper length switch Paper length detection in the cassette 2
3. PF lift sensor 1 Upper limit detection when lifting the lift plate in the cassette 2
4. PF paper conveying sensor 1 Paper jam detection
5. PF paper width switch 1 Paper width detection in the cassette 2
6. PF upper paper sensor 1 Detecting the remaining paper level in the cassette2.
7. PF lower paper sensor 1 Detecting the remaining paper level in the cassette2.
8. PF lift motor 1 Cassette 2 lift plate operation
9. PF motor Paper feed system drive
10. PF feed clutch 1 Feed roller and pickup roller drive
11. PF right cover switch Configuring the safety circuit at the right cover open/close.
12. PF conveying clutch Conveying roller drive
13. PF cassette heater Paper dehumidification
1 PF PWB PARTS PWB PF MAIN ASSY SP 303NN94010
2 PF paper length switch 1 PUSH SWITCH 03 SN /SW-192 N 5ESP03090001+01
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 PF lift sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
4 PF conveying sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
5 PF paper width switch 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000001+H01
6 PF upper paper sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
7 PF lower paper sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
8 PF lift motor 1 PARTS MOTOR LIFT ASSY SP 302K394190
9 PF motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP 303NN94020

(PARTS DRIVE ASSY SP) (303NP94010)
10 PF feed clutch 1 - -
11 PF right cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000001+H01
12 PF conveying clutch - -
13 PF cassette heater HEATER DEHUMIDIFIER 100 302K302420

(2-1)Layout
1 234 6 8 9
5 7
10
11
12
13
14
18 20
15 16 17 19 21
1. PF paper length switch 1 Paper length detection in the cassette 2

2. PF PWB Each electrical parts control in the paper feeder and serial communication
with the main body
4. PF paper conveying sensor 1 Paper jam detection
3-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6. PF upper paper sensor 1 Detecting the remaining paper level in the cassette2.
7. PF lower paper sensor 1 Detecting the remaining paper level in the cassette2.
9. PF motor Paper feed system drive
10. PF feed clutch 1 Feed roller and pickup roller drive in the cassette 2
11. PF right cover switch Configuring the safety circuit at the right cover open/close.
12. PF conveying clutch Conveying roller drive
13. PF feed clutch 2 Feed roller and pickup roller drive in the cassette 3
15. PF paper length switch 2 Paper length detection in the cassette 3
16. PF cassette heater Paper dehumidification
18. PF conveying sensor 2 Paper jam detection
20. PF lower paper sensor 3 Detecting the remaining paper level in the cassette 3.
21. PF upper paper sensor 3 Detecting the remaining paper level in the cassette 3.
2 PF PWB PARTS PWB PF MAIN ASSY SP 303NN94010
3 PF lift sensor 1 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
9 PF motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W10 SP 303NN94020

11 PF right cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000001+H01
12 PF conveying clutch - -
16 PF cassette heater HEATER DEHUMIDIFIER 100 302K302420
17 PF lift sensor 2 PARTS MOTOR LIFT ASSY SP 302K394190
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Attachment Kit (AK-470)

(3-1)Layout
1 2 3 4 5
1. BR cover switch Configuring the safety circuit at the bridge cover

open/close.
2. BR conveying sensor 3 Conveying paper detection in the bridge. (left side)
3. BR PWB Paper conveying system control in the bridge.
4. BR conveying sensor 2 Conveying paper detection in the bridge. (center)
5. BR conveying sensor 1 Conveying paper detection in the bridge. (right side)
6. BR motor Paper conveying drive control in the bridge.
7. BR fan motor Cooling inside the bridge.
1 BR cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB27160
2 BR conveying sensor 3 SENSOR OPT. 7NXGP1S173LCH01
3 BR PWB PARTS PWB BRIDGE MAIN ASSY SP 303NS94010
3-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 BR motor MOTOR REVERSE 302HN44100
7 BR fan motor PARTS,FAN IMAGE SP 302FZ94660
(4)500-sheet Finisher (DF-470)

(4-1)Layout
9 17 21
22
8
7 5 4
26
18
12 6 19
10 14 23,24 28
15
13 11 25
20
16 27
1
1. DF PWB Each electrical parts operation control
2. DF relay PWB Configuring the Enginee PWB, DF PWB, BR PWB, and DF power source
PWB wiring relay circuit.
3. DF power source PWB Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave, convert it to DC24V by
switched mode and output it.
4. DF conveying sensor Paper jam detection at the process section
5. DF adjusting sensor 1 Adjusting plate F home position detection
6. DF adjusting sensor 2 Adjusting plate R home position detection
7. DF exit sensor Paper detection in the exit section
8. DF belt sensor Bundle exit belt position detection
9. DF roller sensor Bundle exit unit position detection
10. DF paper sensor 1 Paper holding lever position detection
11. DF paper sensor 2 Paper holding lever position detection
12. DF tray upper limit sensor Exit tray upper limit detection
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
13. DF tray lower limit sensor Exit tray lower limit detection
14. DF slide sensor Staple unit slide position detection
15. DF staple cover switch Staple cover open/close detection
16. DF staple position sensor Staple unit position detection at the process section
17. DF top cover sensor DF top cover open/close detection
18. DF belt solenoid Bundle exit belt operation
19. DF paddle solenoid Paddle rotation
20. DF paper solenoid Paper holding lever operation
21. DF conveying motor Conveying roller drive
22. DF bundle exit motor Bundle exit unit drive
23. DF adjusting motor 1 Adjusting plate F drive
24. DF adjusting motor 2 Adjusting plate R drive
25. DF tray motor Exit tray ascending and descending drive
26. DF roller motor Exit roller drive
27. DF slide motor Staple unit drive
28. DF staple motor Staple operation
1 DF PWB PWB:PBA-CONTROL 305JS70260
2 DF relay PWB PARTS PWB BRIDGE CONNECT ASSY SP 303NS94020

(PARTS LVU BOX ASSY SP) (303NS94130)
3 DF power source PWB - -

(PARTS LVU BOX ASSY SP) (303NS94130)
4 DF conveying sensor LVR-FE-SEN-ENT 305JA70880
5 DF adjusting sensor 1 GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
6 DF adjusting sensor 2 GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
7 DF exit sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
8 DF belt sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
9 DF roller sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
10 DF paper sensor 1 GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
11 DF paper sensor 2 GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
12 DF tray upper limit sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
13 DF tray lower limit sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
14 DF slide sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
15 DF staple cover switch DE2L-FJ15 305JA70060
16 DF staple position sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
17 DF top cover sensor GP1S73P2J00F 305JA70070
3-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
18 DF belt solenoid SOL-TDS-F12G-68 305JA71490
19 DF paddle solenoid SOLENOID:SOL-TDS-F12G-67A 305JS70270
20 DF paper solenoid - -
(SOLENOID:ASY-YO-SOL) (305JS70270)
21 DF conveying motor MOT-17PM-J343-P3VS 305JA70490
22 DF bundle exit motor MOT-17PM-J052-G1VS 305JA70500
23 DF adjusting motor1 MOT-PM42M-048-NSE3 305JA71510
24 DF adjusting motor 2 MOT-PM42M-048-NSF0 305JA71520
25 DF tray motor MOTOR:MOTOR,DC GEARED 305JS70240

(TRAY:ASY-S/P-TRY-S) (305JS70290)
26 DF roller motor MOT-17PM-J343-P3VS 305JA70490
27 DF slide motor MOT-PM42L-048-NSE4 305JA71500
28 DF staple motor - -
(STAPLER EH590) (303JY44010)
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Drive system
3 - 5 Drive system
(1)Drive configuration
Entire drive
12
13
9
10
E
11
14
D
8
7
C 17
15
5
B
6
16
1 21
2
3
4
20
A 19 18
3-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
A MP paper feed section E Fuser section 15 Fuser motor
1 MP feed roller 9 Fuser pressure roller 16 Main motor
10 Fuser heat roller 17 Developer motor
B Cassette paper feed section 11 Fuser exit roller 18 Feed clutch
2 Retard roller 19 Duplex clutch
3 Feed roller F Exit section 20 Registration clutch
4 Pickup roller 12 Exit roller 21 Developer clutch
13 JS exit roller
C Developer section 14 Exit motor
5 Developer roller
6 Agitation roller
D Drum section
7 Drum
8 Sweep roller
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Cassette drive
1
B C
2 3
A Main motor 1 Feed roller
B Feed clutch 2 Retard roller
C Lift motor 3 Pickup roller
MP drive
1
B
A Main motor 1 MP feed roller
B MP solenoid:
3-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Drum drive
A Main motor 1 Drum
Developer drive
2
3
B
A Developer motor 1 Developer sleeve roller
B Developer clutch 2 Developer spiral roller A
3 Developer spiral roller B
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Fuser drive
2
A Fuser motor 1 Fuser heat roller
B Fuser pressure release motor 2 Fuser exit roller
3 Fuser pressure release cam shaft
Exit/duplex drive
A Fuser motor 1 Lower exit roller
B Exit motor 2 Upper exit roller
3-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Drive location
(
1
2
5
6
1 Fuser motor 4 Registration clutch
2 Developer motor 5 Duplex clutch
3 Main motor 6 Feed clutch
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Drive unit
3-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction
3 - 6 Mechanical construction
(1)Paper feed section
The paper feed section consists of the cassette paper feed section and the MP tray paper feed section.
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80g/m2). The cassette forwards paper by
rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is
also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
1 3 2 4
6 10
7
8 5
6 11 7 13 1 2 15
11 12 14 3 4 9
1. Pickup roller 6. Paper length guide 11. Paper width guides
2. Feed roller 7. Lift plate 12. Width guide release tab
3. Feed holder 8. Lift operation plate 13. Friction pad
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4. Retard roller 9. Cassette base 14. Unit release lever
5. Retard holder 10. Actuator (Paper sensor) 15. Registration sensor
Block diagram
Engine PWB
MAIN_MOT_REM
3 YC24-3
MAIN_MOT_CLK
4 YC24-4
Main moter 5
MAIN_MOT_RDY
MAIN_MOT_DIR
YC24-5
6 YC24-6
P
PAPEMP1
Upper paper sensor YC20-3
P
PAPEMP2
Lower paper sensor YC20-6
FEED_CL_REM
Feed clutch YC18-1
LMPT_REM
Lift motor YC18-10
PAPWSIZE1
Paper width switch YC20-11
RESIST
Registration sensor YC19-5
LIFTFULL
Lift sensor YC19-3
PAPLSIZE3
PAPLSIZE2
YC20-7
Paper length switch YC20-9
PAPLSIZE1
YC20-10
3-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)MP paper feed section

The MP tray can load 100 sheets paper (80g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP feed roller while
lifting up the MP lift plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the MP retard roller.
2 4 3
8 7 2 4 1 3 7 5 6
1. MP feed roller 4. Actuator 7. MP paper width guides

(MP paper sensor )
2. MP separation pad 5. MP tray 8. MP base
3. MP lift plate 6. MP sub tray
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Engine PWB
MAIN_MOT_REM
3 YC24-3
MAIN_MOT_CLK
4 YC24-4
Main motor MAIN_MOT_RDY
5 YC24-5
MAIN_MOT_DIR
6 YC24-6
MPF_SOL_REM
MP solenoid YC18-8
MPF_REMAIN
MP paper sensor YC21-11
3-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Optical section
The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner section to write
the image.
(2-1)Image scanner section (CIS model)
The image on the original is exposed by the exposure lamp (LED) and the reflection light is scanned by the CIS to
change the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the image scanner unit (ISU) stops at the original scanning position (slit glass) and
scans the image from the original conveyed in the document processor.
6 5 1 4
3 2
6 5 8 1 11 10 9 12
7 3 2 4
1. CIS 5. Original size indicator 9. ISU drive belt
2. CIS carriage 6 Slit glass 10. Original size sensor
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3. ISU frame 7. ISU upper frame 11. Actuator (Original sensor)
4. Contact glass 8. Scanner shaft 12. Scanner motor
Block diagram
Engine PWB
HP_SENS
Home position sensor YC15-7
TABLE OPEN
Original size timing sensor YC15-10
ORG_SENS
Original size sensor YC15-12
SCAN_/B
4 SCAN_/A
YC15-1
Scanner motor 3 SCAN_B
YC15-2
2 SCAN_A
YC15-3
1 YC15-4
YC3
YC26
Main PWB
LED_COM2
LED2_B
YC3003-5
LED2_G
YC3003-6
LED2_R
YC3003-7
MODE
YC3003-8
YC3003-9
CIS PWB VREF
YC3003-11
LED_COM1
LED1_B
YC3003-33
LED1_G
YC3003-34
LED1_R
YC3003-35
YC3003-36
3-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Image scanner section (CCD model)

The image on the original is exposed by the exposure lamp and that reflection light is scanned by the CCD image sensor
on the CCD PWB via three mirrors and the ISU lens to change the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the mirror frame A stops at the original scanning position (slit glass) and scans the
image from the original conveyed in the document processor.
37 2 8 9 1 6 16 5
13 12 11 10
4 14 15
3 2 1
4 10,12,13 8 16 14 15 6
1. Contact glass 7. Mirror frame A 13. Mirror C
2. Original size indicator 8. Light guide 14. ISU lens
3. Slit glass 9. LED drive PWB 15. CCD PWB
4. ISU frame 10. Mirror A 16. Lens unit cover
5. Scanner motor 11. Mirror frame B
6. ISU wire 12. Mirror B
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
HP_SENS
Home position sensor YC15-7
TABLE_OPEN
Original size timing sensor YC15-10
ORG_SENS
Original size sensor YC15-12
SCAN_/B
4 SCAN_/A
YC15-1
Scanner 3 SCAN_B
YC15-2
motor 2 SCAN_A
YC15-3
1 YC15-4
Engine PWB
YC3
YC26
Main PWB
CCD_SH
YC1-13 CCDCLK2
YC3002-13
CCD PWB YC1-15
YC1-17
CCD_RS
YC3002-15
CCDCLK1
YC3002-17
YC1-19 YC3002-19
LED_PWM
LED Drive PWB YC1-3
YC1-4
LED_ENA
YC3003-3
YC3003-4
3-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Laser scanner unit

The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects to the polygon
mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The laser scanner unit has some
lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to the drum surface. Also, the LSU cleaning
motor operates to automatically clean the LSU glass.
1 2 3
1 5 2 9 8 7 10 6
13
12
3 4
11
1. Polygon motor 6. APC PWB 11. PD mirror
2. fθ lens (sub) 7. Collimator lens 12. LSU base
3. fθ lens (main) 8. LD slit glass plate 13. Drum
4. LSU dust-proof glass 9. LD mirror
5. LSU top cover 10. PD lens
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Main PWB
VDATA1N
YC105-3 YC24-5
VDATA1P
YC105-4 YC24-6
SAMPLE1
YC105-5 YC24-8
APC PWB YC105-6 OUTPEN
VCONT
YC24-9
YC105-7 YC24-10
PDN
YC105-8 YC24-11
YC26
YC3
Engine PWB
POL_REM
3 YC23-3
POL_READY
Plygon motor 2 YC23-4
POL_CLK
1 YC23-5
3-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Developer section
(3-1)Developer unit
The developer section consists of the magnet roller forming the magnetic brush, the sleeve roller forming the thin layer
by replacing the toner, the developer blade, and the developer screw mixing up the toner. The toner density is adjusted
by impressing the bias to the magnet roller and the sleeve roller. The toner amount inside the developer unit is detected
by the toner sensor.
8 7 4 5 1
3 2 6
7 9 3 11
10 1 4 5 2 6 10
1. Developer roller 5. Blade magnet 9. Supply shutter
2. Developer screw A 6. Developer case 10. DS pulley
3. Developer screw B 7. Upper developer cover 11. Toner container drive shaft
4. Developer blade 8. Toner container
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Engine PWB
DLP_SDA
YC8-13 DLP_SCL
YC2-4 Developer YC1-1 YC1-2 Developer
YC8-14 DLP_TH
YC2-3 relay PWB YC1-9 YC1-10 PWB
YC8-16 YC2-1 YC1-10 YC1-9
DLP_MOT_REM
YC25-3 DLP_MOT_CLK
3
YC25-4 DLP_MOT_RDY
4 Developer motor
YC25-5 DLP_MOT_DIR
5
YC25-6 6
TNR_EMP
YC9-2 Toner sensor
High voltage
PWB
DLP_CLK
YC10-11 DLP_CNT
CN1-11 Developer Bias
YC10-12 CN1-12
3-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Drum section
(4-1)Drum unit
In the main charger section, the main charger roller with the electric charge contacts the drum surface and rotates to
charge the drum evenly.
In the cleaning section, toner remaining on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and
collected to the waste toner box by the drum screw. The eraser consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the electric
charge remaining on the drum before the main charge.
10 9 5 8 7 6
4 3 2 1
13 6 8 4 5 7 10 3 2
12 11 1
1. Drum 6. Cleaning roller 11. Separation claw
2. MC roller 7. Scraper 12. Unit release lever
3. MC cleaning roller 8. Sweep roller 13. Unit lock hook
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4. Main charger case 9. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade 10. Eraser
Block diagram
Engine PWB
MAIN_MOT_REM
3
MAIN_MOT_CLK
YC24-3
Main motor 4
MAIN_MOT_RDY
YC24-4
5
MAIN_MOT_DIR
YC24-5
6 YC24-6
Drum PWB
ERASE1
E1 Drum relay
ERASE2
E2
YC3-2 PWB
Eraser ERASE3
E3
YC3-3 DRUM_SCL
YC3-4 YC2-6 Y
YC2-5 YC1-8 DRUM_SDA
YC8-4
ED
WT_LED
YC2-2 Y
YC2-1 YC1-7 WT_LED
YC8-5
Waste toner sensor NS
WT_SENS
YC1-2 YC2-3 Y
YC2-4 YC1-5 WT_SENS
YC8-7
YC1-3 YC2-1 Y
YC2-2 YC1-4 ERASE
YC8-8
YC2-7 Y
YC2-8 YC1-2 YC8-10
3-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Conveying/transfer section
In the paper conveying section, fed paper is conveyed to the transfer and separation section.
The transfer section consists of the transfer roller, separation brush, drum separation claws, etc. The high-voltage
output from the high-voltage PWB is impressed to the transfer roller, and transfer charge is applied. Paper after
transferring is separated from the drum by impressing the separator high-voltage output from the high-voltage PWB to
the separation brush.
8 1
2
7 3
6
5
10 11 12
6 4 7 3 2 9
1. drum separation claws 5. Paper dust collecting sponge 9. Separation needle holder
2. Separation needle 6. Registration roller L 10. Conveying guide
3. Transfer roller 7. Pre-transfer pulley 11. Conveying base
4. Registration roller R 8. Drum 12. Fuser front guide
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Engine PWB
MAIN_MOT_REM
3 YC24-3
MAIN_MOT_CLK
4 YC24-4
Main motor MAIN_MOT_RDY
5 YC24-5
MAIN_MOT_DIR
6 YC24-6
FEED_FAN_REM
Conveying fan notor YC21-1
High voltage PWB

Separation Bias TRA_CNT
Transfer Bias
CN1-8 SEP_REM
YC10-8
CN1-9 YC10-9
3-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Fuser section
Paper from the transfer and separation section is pinched between the fuser heat roller and the Fuser pressure roller.
The fuser heat roller is heated by the fuser heater, and is pressed by the Fuser pressure roller with the pressure added
by the fuser pressure spring. So, toner is fused on the paper by that heat and pressure.
The surface temperature of the fuser heat roller is detected by the fuser thermistor and controlled by the Enginee PWB.
If the temperature at the fuser section is extremely high, the power line is shut off by the thermostat operation and the
fuser heater is forced to turn off.
11 10 12
9
5
2 1
3 6
7 13 11 10
14 9 12 4 1 14
1. Fuser heat roller 6. Fuser paper guide 11. Fuser exit pulley
2. Fuser main heater 7. Fuser thermistor 12. Actuator (Exit sensor)
3. Fuser sub heater 8. Fuser thermostat 13. Discharger brush
4. Fuser pressure roller 9. Separator 14. Handles
5. Fuser upper frame 10. Fuser exit roller
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Low voltage
power source PWB Engine PWB
LIVE
Thermal cutout TB3-1
MH
YC8 YC14
Fuser main heater YC4-1
SH
Fuser sub heater YC4-2
Fuser pressure FSR_PRESS_MOT_REM

FS
release motor YC21-13
FSR_MOT_REM
F
3 YC24-9
FSR_MOT_CLK
4 YC24-10
Fuser motor 5
FSR_MOT_RDY
FSR_MOT_DIR
YC24-11
6 YC24-12
FSR_TOBJ
7 YC13-1
FSR_TAMB
4 YC13-4
Termo-pile THP_SDA
3 YC13-5
THP_SCL
2 YC13-6
FSR_EDGE
Fuser thermistor YC13-8
FUSER_SW
Fuser pressure release sensor YC16-11
3-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)Exit and feed-shift section

The exit and feed-shift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the Main tray, the job separator or the
duplex conveying section.
3
2
6 5
11 1 2 7 8 6 4 3 10 9
12
1. Exit pulley 5. feed-shift guide 9. Exit conveying base
2. Exit roller 6. Actuator 10. Upper JS paper guide

(Paper full sensor)
3. JS exit pulley 7. Actuator 11. JS exit tray

(JS paper full sensor)
4. JS exit roller 8. Actuator 12. Exit pressure guide

(JS paper sensor)
3-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Engine PWB
JOB TRAY
JS paper sensor YC16-16
EXIT_FULL_DOWN
Paper full sensor YC16-10
EXIT_FULL_UP
Exit sensor YC16-7
EXIT_/B
4 YC16-1
EXIT_/A
3 YC16-2
Exit motor EXIT_B
2 YC16-3
EXIT_A
1 YC16-4
EJE_SOL_PULL
Reverse solenoid EJE_SOL_RETURN
YC17-1
YC17-3
MAIN_MOT_REM
3 MAIN_MOT_CLK
YC24-3
Main motor 4 MAIN_MOT_RDY
YC24-4
5 MAIN_MOT_DIR
YC24-5
6 YC24-6
3-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Duplex conveying section

The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the exit and feed-shift
section to the paper conveying section in the duplex print.
1
2
3
4
2
3
5 2 4 3
1. Right cover 3 DU conveying roller 5. DU frame
2. DU conveying pulley 4. Actuator (DU sensor) 6. Right exit guide
3-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
Engine PWB
DU_SW
DU sensor YC21-5
MAIN_MOT_REM
3 YC24-3
MAIN_MOT_CLK
4 YC24-4
Main motor 5 MAIN_MOT_RDY
MAIN_MOT_DIR
YC24-5
6 YC24-6
3-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9-1)Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the DP original tray to the original
conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP pickup and the DP feed roller.
2 3 5 7 1 8
4 6
1. DP pickup roller 4. DP retard roller 7. DP stopper
2. DP feed roller 5. DP separation pad assy 8. DP original tray
3. DP feed holder 6. Actuator (DP original sensor)
3-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
DP PWB
LS_SW
DP original length sensor YC6-3
WID2
DP original width sensor YC6-5
SET_SW
DP original sensor YC4-3
FEED_MOT_A
1 YC7-1
FEED_MOT_B
4 YC7-2
DP feed motor FEED_MOT_/A
3 YC7-3
FEED_MOT_/B
6 YC7-4
DP_ORG_SET
YC4-16 YC2-4
DP_OPEN
YC4-15 YC2-5
DP_TMG
YC4-14 YC2-6
DP_RDY
YC4-13 YC2-7
Engin PWB DP_SI
YC4-12 YC2-8
DP_SEL
YC4-11 YC2-9
DP_SO
YC4-10 YC2-10
DP_CLK
YC4-9 YC2-11
3-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9-2)Original conveying section, original reversing and exit section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The conveyed original is scanned at the optical section
(CCD) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass.
3 2 9 1 8 18
16
17
13
5 4 10 11 6 7 12 15 14
1. DP top cover 7. DP conveying pulley B 13. DP exit roller
2. DP registration roller 8. Actuator 14. DP exit pulley

(DP feed sensor)
3. DP registration pulley 9. Actuator 15. DP reversing roller

(DP registration sensor )
4. DP conveying roller A 10. Actuator 16. DP reversing pulley

(DP timing sensor)
5. DP conveying pulley A 11. DP scanner guide 17. DP original eject table
6. DP conveying roller B 12. DP feed-shift guide 18. DP switchback tray
3-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
DP PWB
FEED_SW
DP feed sensor YC4-6
REGIST_SW
DP registration sensor YC4-9
DP CL_REM
registration YC7-13
clutch CONV_MOT_A
1 YC7-5
CONV_MOT_/A
DP conveying 3 YC7-6
CONV_MOT_B
motor 4 YC7-7
CONV_MOT_/B
6 YC7-8
TIMING_SW
DP timing sensor YC4-18
Engin
PWB
HP_SW
DP feedshift sensor YC4-15 YC2-4 DP_ORG_SET
YC18-10
DP_OPEN
YC2-5 YC18-10
DP_TMG
JNC_A YC2-6 YC18-9
1 YC7-9 YC2-7 DP_RDY
YC18-7
JNC_B DP_SI
2 YC7-10 YC2-8 YC18-5
DP feedshift motor JNC_/A DP_SEL
3 YC7-11 YC2-9 YC18-8
JNC_/B DP_SO
4 YC7-12 YC2-10 YC18-6
DP_CLK
YC2-11 YC18-11
3-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(9-3) Reversing duplex scanning

The first side of original is scanned at the slit glass (main unit).
2
3
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
Conveyed to the DP reversing section by the DP reversing feed-shift guide / DP reversing roller.
2
3
1
DP switchback tray
DP switchback roller
DP switchback feedshift guide
The original is reversed by the reverse rotation of the DP reversing roller.
2
3
The second side of original is scanned at the slit glass (main unit) and the original is conveyed to the DP reversing
section.
2
3
1
DP switchback tray
Slit glass: second side scanning
Ejected to the DP exit tray by the DP reversing, DP feed-shift and DP exit rollers.
3-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DP registration roller
2
3 1
Original exit table
DP exit roller
DP conveying roller
3-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Machine Design > Mechanical construction (option)
3 - 7 Mechanical construction (option)

The paper feeder can load 550 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80g/m2) and consists of one cassette. The
cassette picks up paper by rotating the PF pickup roller and conveys it by rotating the PF feed roller. Multi-feed of paper
is also prevented by the effect of the PF retard roller.
Fed paper is conveyed to the main unit by the PF conveying roller.
4
14
2
5 1
10 13
11 12
7
3
8
9
6
1. PF pickup roller 6. PF cassette base 11. PF lower paper sensor 1
2. PF feed roller 7. PF lift plate 12. Actuator

(PF lift sensor)
3. PF retard roller 8. PF friction pad 13. PF conveying sensor 1
4. PF conveying roller 1 9. PF lift operating plate 14. Actuator

(PF conveying sensor 1)
5. PF lift sensor 1 10. PF upper paper sensor 1
3-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The paper feeder can load 550 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80g/m2) and consists of two cassette. The
cassette picks up paper by rotating the PF pickup roller and conveys it by rotating the PF feed roller. Multi-feed of paper
is also prevented by the effect of the PF retard roller.
Fed paper is conveyed to the main unit by the PF conveying roller.
4
21
2
7 1
13 19
14 17
10
3 6
11 5
12
9 22
8 1 2
15 20
16 18
10
3
11
12
9
1. PF pickup roller 9. PF cassette base 17. Actuator

(PF lift sensor 1)
2. PF feed roller 10. PF lift plate 18. Actuator

(PF lift sensor 2)
3. PF retard roller 11. PF friction pad 19. PF conveying sensor 1
4. PF conveying roller 1 12. PF lift operating plate 20. PF conveying sensor 2
5. PF conveying roller 2 13. PF upper paper sensor 1 21. Actuator

6. PF feed pulley 14. PF lower paper sensor 1 22. Actuator

7. PF lift sensor 1 15. (PF upper paper sensor 2)
8. PF lift sensor 2 16. PF lower paper sensor 2
3-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
PFFS1
YC3-12
REG_CL_REM
YC4-6
REG_CL_REM1
YC4-3
PFLS1 5 conveying sensor 1
PF
YC3-3 PF lift sensor 1
PFPS1(U)
YC3-6 PF upper paper sensor 1 PF feed
PFPS1(L)
clutch 1
YC3-9 PF lower paper sensor 2
LIFT_REM1 PF lift PF conveying
YC4-1 motor 1 clutch
PAPLSIZE1(1),(2),(3) PF
YC5-1,2,4 PF paper length switch 1 motor
PAPWSIZE1
YC5-5 PF paper width switch 1
PF conveying sensor 2
PFPWB PFLS2
YC6-3* PF lift sensor 2
YC6-6* PFPS2(U) PF feed
PF upper paper sensor 2
clutch 2
PFPS2(L)
YC6-9* PF lower paper sensor 2
LIFT_REM2 PF lift
YC7-1*
motor 2
PAPLSIZE2(1),(2),(3)
YC8-1,2,4* PF paper length switch 2
PAPWSIZE2
YC8-5* PF paper width switch 2
MAIN_REM
YC2-4
REG_CL_REM2
YC7-3*
PFFS2
YC6-12*
*: Paper feeder (double cassette) only.
3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Attachment Kit (AK-470)

The bridge unit section consists of the parts shown in the figure below. Paper exiting from the main unit is conveyed to
the finishing section by the BR conveying roller.
2 5 2 4 2 3
1 1 1
1. BR conveying roller 3. Actuator 5. Actuator

(BR conveying sensor 1) (BR conveying sensor 3)
2. BR conveying pulley 4. Actuator

(BR conveying sensor 2)
Block diagram
BR PWB
JAM_SENS3
YN2-3
JAM_SENS2
YN2-6
JAM_SENS1 YN2-9
SMO T A,A_B,B_
YC3-1,2,3,4
BR conveying
BR conveying BR conveying sensor 1
sensor 3 sensor 2
BR
motor
3-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)500-sheet Finisher (DF-470)

(4-1)Finishing section
The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the bridge unit is output to the DF tray.
Also this section performs processing in the bundle exit mode and the staple mode.
7 6 59 1 2
8
13 4
10 3
11
18
19
12
14 17
15
16
1. DF conveying roller 8. DF exit roller 15. DF adjusting sensor 2
2. DF conveying pulley 9. DF adjusting tray 16. DF slide sensor
3. DF conveying sensor 10. DF exit pulley 17. DF staple unit
4. DF actuator 11. DF paddle 18. DF belt solenoid
5. DF bundle exit belt 12. DF exit sensor 19. DF paddle solenoid
6. DF conveying pulley 13. Actuator (DF exit sensor)
7. DF bundle exit unit 14. DF adjusting sensor 1
3-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
CN9-3 PINS
BRS
CN10-3
FMOT_*B,B,A,*A
CN19-1,3,4,6 DF conveying motor
CN11-3 RUDS
DF roller sensor
TMOT_*B,B,A,*A
CN19-7,9,10,12 DF bundle discharge motor DF belt sensor
CN20-1,3,4,6 ROMOT_*B,B,A,*A DF conveying sensor

DF roller motor
EMPS
CN7-3 DF exit sensor
DF PWB CN16-2 P_SOL

DF paddle solenoid DF adjustment sensor1,2 DF belt solenoid
CN7-6,9 FJ_HPS,RJ_HPS
DF adjustment sensor 1,2
FJMOT_*A,A,B,*B
CN18-1 - 8 RJMOT_*A,A,B,*B
STPM+,STPM-
CN12-1,2,3,4 DF staple motor
JIS
CN8-3 DF staple position sensor
SLD_HP
CN22-3 DF slide sensor
CN14-1,2,3,4 SLD_*A,A,B,*B
DF slide motor
BR_SOL
CN21-2
3-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-2)Exit tray section

The DF tray section consists of the parts shown in figure below and stocks the paper exit from the processing section.
The upper limit position and the lower limit position of the DF tray are detected with the DF tray upper limit sensor and
the DF tray lower limit sensor.
Also, the paper stock quantity is detected with the DF paper sensor 1, 2.
6 5
3
9
1
7
2
8
4
1. DF paper sensor 1 4. DF paper solenoid 7. DF tray upper limit sensor
2. DF paper sensor 2 5. DF tray 8. DF tray lower limit sensor
3. DF paper holding lever 6. DF sub tray 9. DF tray motor
3-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Block diagram
DF PWB
RHDS1
CN6-3
RHDS2
CN6-6
DF paper sensor 1
T_UL_SEN
CN5-4 DF tray upper limit sensor DF paper sensor 2
TM_+,TM_-
CN15-1,2 DF tray elevation motor
T_LL_SEN
CN5-1 DF tray lower limit sensor
DF paper solenoid
S_SO L
CN17-2
3-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-3)Bundle exit operation

Paper is fed to the processing section by rotation of the DF conveying roller and the DF bundle exit belt.
When the paper is conveyed into the processing section, the DF roller motor is driven to lift up the DF bundle exit unit.
DF bundle discharge unit
DF conveying
roller
DF bundle
discharge belt
DF roller motor
When the trailing edge of paper passes through the DF bundle exit belt, the DF bundle exit unit is lifted down and the
paper is fed to the DF adjusting tray by the DF eject roller and the DF bundle exit belt.
The DF adjusting motor 1,2 drive the DF adjusting guides to adjust paper.
DF exit roller
DF bundle
discharge belt
DF adjustment
DF adjustment motor 1,2
tray
3-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
When adjustment of the last sheet of the bundle is completed, the DF exit roller and the DF paddle rotates to exit the
bundle of paper to the DF tray.
DF exit roller DF paddle
3-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance >
4 Maintenance
4 - 1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1)Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the power lamp
on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to damage the
PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
(2)Storage and handling of the drum

Note the following when handling and storing the drum.
When detaching the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Store in the range of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C(–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of 85% RH or
less. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in the place where the
temperature and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the tolerable range.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object.
Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3)Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or in a damp environment.
4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance >
(4)Screening of the toner container

Look at the screening film on the brand protection seal affixed to the toner container through the windows of the
validation viewer.
Look at the screening film through two windows to check the genuineness.
• A black-colored band when seen through the the anti-counterfeit film portion left side window (mark ).
• A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the anti-counterfeit film portion right side window (mark ).
When seen as the above, it is genuine. Otherwise (e.g. both seen in gold), it is a counterfeit.
See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)
Validation viewer Validation viewer
Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal
A black-colored band when A shiny or gold-colored band when

seen through the left side window seen through the right side window
The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.
Three cut parts at the red circle section
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
4 - 2 Maintenance parts
(1)Maintenance kits
For main unit
Service manual Name used in parts list Qua Part No.
ntity
MK-6115 *1 MK-6115/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702P18NL0
MK-6116 *2 MK-6116/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702P19JP0
MK-6117 *3 MK-6117/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702P17US0
MK-6119 *4 MK-6119/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702P18AS0
(300,000 images) • DRUM UNIT 1
• DLP UNIT 1
• FUSER UNIT 1
• TRANSFER UNIT 1
• FEED UNIT 1
• MP PULLEY FEED 1
• M120V modelP PAD SEPERATION 1
• REGISTRATION ROLLER CLEANER 1
*1: 220-240V model, *2: 100V model, *3: 120V model, *4: 240V model120V model
For document processor

Service manual Name used in parts list Qua Part No.
ntity
MK-6110 MK-6110/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702P10UN0
(300,000 images) • PULLEY FEED 1
• GUIDE RETARD 1
• ROLLER RETARD 1
4-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts
(2)Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit

(2-1)Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the maintenance kit.
Section Mode Maintenance item

No.
Replacing U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear)
settings
Image U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

adjustment
(2-2)Maintenance mode to execute after replacing the unit

Drum unit
No.
adjustment
Developer unit
No.
adjustment
Transfer unit
No.
Replacing U127 Clearing the transfer count (Clear)
settings

adjustment
MC roller
No.
Replacing U930 Clear the main charger roller counts (Clear)
settings

adjustment
Feed roller / MP feed roller

No.
Replacing U901 Clearing the counters by paper source (Clear)
settings
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures
4 - 3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures
Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after about 300,000 images. The message [Replace MK.] appears at the
replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following procedures.
(1)Cassette feed section

(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed unit
1 Pull out the cassette (a) from the main unit (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.
b
2 Detach the feed unit (a).

1 Release the feed unit lock lever (a) and detach the feed unit (b).
2 Check or replace the feed unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a
p
Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.

• Clearing the maintenance counts (Maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner
1 Open the front cover (a).
2 Release the lock lever (a) and detach the waste toner box (b).
3 Release the lock lever (a) and open the developer cover (b).
a b
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Open the right cover 1 (a).
5 Detach the regist cleaner.

1 Pull out the regist cleaner (a) by holding the lever (b) of it.
2 Check the sponge of the regist cleaner (a) and clean or replace it.
3 Reattach the parts in the original position.
4-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)MP feed section

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the MP feed roller
2 Detach the new MP feed roller.

1 Push the holder (a) inside and remove the MP feed roller (b).
2 Check or replace the MP feed roller and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching MP separation pad
1 Detach the MP separation pad.

1 Tilt the MP separation pad (a) toward you and detach it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Check or replace the MP separation pad, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Caution
When replacing the new MP separation pad or MP feed roller, take care not to touch the roller surface.
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP feed roller.

• Clearing the maintenance counts (Maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Transfer section
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the transfer unit
2 Detach the transfer unit.

1 Release two lock lever (a), Detach the transfer unit (b).
2 Check or replace the tranfer unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a a
Important
When reattaching the transfer unit, insert it until it clicks.
Execute the following setting after replacing the transfer unit.

• Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Maintenance mode U127): Clear
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Drum section
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit
2 Release the lock lever (a) and remove the waste toner box (b).
a b
4-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach the drum unit.

1 Release the lock lever (a), Detach the drum unit (b).
2 Check or replace the drum unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Execute the following setting after replacing the drum unit.

• Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit
1 Detach the drum unit.

1 Release the lock lever (a), Detach the drum unit (b).
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Detach the MC roller unit.

1 Release the lock lever (b), detach the MC roller unit (b) from the drum unit (c).
2 Check or replace the MC roller unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b
Execute the following setting after replacing the MC roller.

• Clearing the main charger roller counts (Maintenance mode U930): Clear
4-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Developer section
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit
2 Release the lock lever (a) and detach the waste toner box (b).
3 Release the lever (a) and detach the toner container (b).
a
b
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Release the lock lever (a).
a b
6 Detach the developer unit.

1 Release the lock lever (a) and detach the developer unit (b).
2 Check or replace the developer unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Execute the following setting after replacing the developer unit.

4-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)Fuser section
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit
2 Detach the fuser unit.

1 Pull up two handles (a).
2 Release the lock lever (b) and detach the fuser unit (c).
3 Check or replace the fuser unit (c), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
1 a
c 2 b b
Important
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
• Rear side lock failure (This will cause the fuser roller rotation failure without drive at the rear side.)
• Front side lock failure (This will cause the image squareness failure due to skew feed.)
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP feed roller
1 Open the DP top cover (a).
2 Detach the DP feed roller.

1 Push up and open the DP feed lever (a).
2 Pull down the DP feed roller (b) toward you and detach it in the direction of the arrow.
3 Check or replace the DP feed roller (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a b
4-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP retard roller
1 Detach the cover of DP retard roller cover.

1 Release the hook (a) and raise the DP retard roller cover (b) in the direction of the arrow .
2 Detach the DP retard roller cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Detach the DP retard roller.

1 Tilt up the tab of the DP retard roller holder.
2 Detach the DP retard roller (b) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Check or replace the DP retard roller (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Notes when attaching

1 When attaching the DP retard roller holder (a) and pulling it down, make sure to check the protrusion (b) in
inserted into the spring (c).
b
c
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option)
4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option)

(1)Paper feeder (PF-470/PF-471)
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed unit
1 Pull out the cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and pull it out on an angle.
2 Detach the feed unit (a).

1 Release the lock lever (a) of feed unit, Detach the feed unit (b).
2 Check or replace the feed unit (b), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Caution
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.
4-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly procedures
4 - 5 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures

(1)OUTER COVERS
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the front cover
arrow.
b
3 Detach two hooks (b) of the straps (a).
a
b
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Release the left and right fulcrums and detach the front cover (a).
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the controller box cover
cover (a).
b
a
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the rear cover
1 Detach the rear cover.

1 Remove five screws (b)(M3×8TP).
2 To detach the rear cover, align it upward and release three hooks (c).
b b
a
b
4-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)Detaching and reattaching the main tray
1 Release the lock lever (b) and JS tray (a) in the direction of the arrow.
arrow.
b
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
c
6 Remove the left lower cover.
2 To detach the left lower cover (b), align it upward and release four hooks (c).
4-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Detach the front top cover.

1 Release two hooks (b) of front top cover (a) and detach it.
2 Tilt the upper front cover (a) toward you.
8 Detach the main tray.
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-5)Detaching and reattaching the tray rear cover
arrow.
b
4-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
c
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Detach the left top cover.

1 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP).
2 Release the two hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow and detach the left top cover (a).
a b
9 Detach the tray left cover.

1 Release the hook (b) from the frame in the direction of the arrow.
2 Detach the tray left cover (a) while avoiding the tray rear cover (c).
b b
c
a
4-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]

a
11 Detach the upper exit cover (a) while holding the tray rear cover (b).
12 Detach the tray rear cover (b).
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-6)Detaching and reattaching the MP tray
1 Detach the MP tray

1 Open the MP tary (a).
2 Release two fulcrums (b) of front and rear with a flat-blade screwdriver(c).
3 Detach two straps (d) while aligning them upward.
4 Detach the MP tray (a).
b b
c c
4-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-7)Detaching and reattaching the right cover 1
2 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and detach two strap (b) from main unit.
3 Detach the link of the conveying unit.

1 Detach the stop ring (b) from the back side of the conveying unit (a) and detach the link F (c).
2 Also, detach the stop ring (d) and then detach the link R (e).
c e
d
b
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Detach the right cover 1.

1 Rotate the wire cover (b).
2 Disconnect the connector (c).
3 Rotate the shaft (d), and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
4 Detach right cover 1 (a) while aligning it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
c
4-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-8)Detaching and reattaching the DP front cover
1 Remove the screw of the front cover.

1 Open the document processor (c).
2 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) of the DP front cover (a).
a c
2 Detach the DP front cover.

1 Open the DP top cover (b).
2 Detach the DP front cover (a) from the document processor (c).
b
c
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-9)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover
1 Remove four screws (b) from the document processor (a).
a b
2 Detach the DP rear cover.

2 Detach the DP original tray (a) while twisting it.
4-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-10)Detaching and reattaching the DP original tray
1 Remove the screw of the front cover.

1 Open the document processor (c).
2 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) of the DP front cover (a).
a c
2 Detach the DP front cover.

2 Detach the DP front cover (a) from the document processor (c).
b
c
3 Remove four screws (b) (M3×8TP) from the document processor (a).
a b
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach the DP original tray.
1 Remove the connector (b) from the DP PWB (c) and remove the cables (a) from five wire guides (d) .
2 Raise the DP original tray (e) and detach it in the direction of the arrow.
d e
b c
4-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Optical section
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the LSU
arrow.
b
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
c
4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Detach the power source fan motor.

1 Disconnect the connector of the fan motor (b).
2 Remove one screw (c)(M3×8TP).
3 Release two hooks (c) and detach the power source fan motor assy.
c
a
c
a
b
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10 Detach the laser scanner unit.

1 Disconnect two LSU connectors (b).
2 Remove four screws (c) and detach the laser scanner unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Check or replace the laser scanner unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
Notes when replacing the laser scanner unit

Execute the following adjustment after replacing the laser scanner unit.
Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
1 Input "410" using the numeric keys.
2 Press the [Start] key.

• Displays the execution information screen.
• Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4 paper.
3 Set the output test pattern 1 as original, in the back side which the direction of the arrow is, looking down the
side which is printing to the original glass.
• Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.

• The first auto adjustment is executed.
5 Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.

• Set test pattern 2 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
4-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• The second auto adjustment is executed.
7 [Finish] appears after normal completion.
Exiting from the maintenance mode
• The maintenance mode is exited.
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the document processor
1 Detach the DP connector of the document processor from the main unit.
1 Release the hook with a flat-blade screwdriver from the document processor (a) and detach the angle
regulating plate (b).
2 Release two hooks (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the DP Connector cover (d).
3 Remove the wire saddles (e) and the DP connector cover (f).
a
f
e
c
d
2 Open the document processor (a) to upright and detach the hinge (b) in the direction of
the arrow.
b
(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (CCD model)
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detaching and reattaching the lens unit
a
f
e
c
d
the arrow.
3 Remove two screws (b) and then remove the ISU right cover (a).
• Reattach it while aligning it to the contact glass side.
a b
4-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Detach the contact glass (a).

a
5 Remove four screws (b) and then detach the lens unit cover (a).
b
b
b
b
6 Detach the lens unit.

1 Remove the FFC (b) from the connector (c).
2 Remove four screws (d) and then detach the lens unit (a).
d
d d
d a
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Note on disconnecting and connecting the FFC
a b
c
Caution
To avoid the damage to the CCD PWB, do not touch the CCD PWB (c) but hold it at the directed part (d).when
disconnecting and connecting the FFC (a) from/to the connector (b).
4-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Notes when attaching the lens unit

1 When reattaching it, fix it to the original position by aligning it to the scale.
2 When replacing it, decide the fixing position of the ISU as follows.
• The right and left of machine: Confirm the number (a) marked and align the ISU line (c) to the positioning line
(b) at the frame with the same number. (Line (c) is at the applicable number marking side from two lines)
• The rear and front of machine: Align the edge (e) of the ISU to the positioning line (d) of the frame.
3 Fix the ISU as originally with four screws.
4 Check or replace the lens unit, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
e
d
b
ISU
a c
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit
a
f
e
c
d
the arrow.
3 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the ISU right cover (a).
a b
4-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]

a
5 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the ISU front top cover (a).
b
b
a
6 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the ISU rear cover (a).
b
a
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7 Detach the two transparent sheets (a) from the ISU frame (b).
a
b
8 Move the scanner carriage (a) to the cut-out.
9 Detach the lamp unit.

1 Remove the FFC (b) from the connector of the lamp unit (a).
2 Remove three screws (b) and detach the lamp unit (a).
3 Check or replace the lamp unit (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
c c
c a
a
b
Important
Use an air blower brush when cleaning the light guide of the lamp unit. Clean not to leave a hair dust.
4-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detach the scanner wire

Execute it when the scanner wire is broken or is replaced.
arrow.
b
cover (a).
b
a
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b b
a
b

4-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
f
e
c
d
the arrow.

2 Release the two hooks (c) upward and detach the upper left cover (a).
a b
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Remove two screws (b) and then remove the ISU right cover (a).
a b

a
11 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the ISU front top cover (a).
b
b
a
4-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
12 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the ISU rear cover (a).
b
b
a
13 Detach the IC card reader cover.

1 Release two hooks (b) downwards.
2 Detach the IC card reader cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.
14 Detach the language sheet.

1 Lift up two points of the leading edge of the operation panel cover (b), slide them in the direction of the arrow
and then detach the operation panel cover from the operation panel (a).
2 Detach two clear panels (b) from the operation panel (a) and detach the language sheet (c).
c b
d
b
c
d
a
a
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15 Detach the operation top unit.

1 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8B).
2 Disconnect two connectors (d) of the operation panel PWB (c).
3 Detach the operation top unit (a).
b c
a
16 Remove the wire of the power switch.

1 Release two hooks (b) of front top cover (a) and tilt it toward you.
2 Remove the connector (c) and remove the wire from two wire saddles (e).
b e
c
a
17 Remove five screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the operation lower cover (a).
b
4-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
19 Detach the right top cover.
20 Detach the ISU front cover.

2 Release the hook(c) and three protrusions (d).
3 Detach the ISU front cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.
a
c
d
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
21 Remove the controller shield plate.

1 Remove four screws(b)(M3×8B) of the controller shield plate.
2 Slide the triangle mark (c) on the controller shield plate (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.
a
c
22 Disconnect the connector.

1 Disconnect two FFCs (b) from the main PWB (a).
2 Disconnect the connector (d) from the Enginee PWB (b).
YC3003 YC3002
YC15
d b
c
a
23 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8TP) and two header pins (c), and detach the scanner unit
(a) upward.
a
b
b
c
4-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
24 Remove two screws (b) and then remove the ISU left cover (a).
b
25 Detach the two transparent sheets (a) from the ISU frame (b).
a
b
26 Move the scanner carriage (a) to the cut-out.
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
27 Detach the lamp unit.

1 Remove the FFC (b) from the connector of the lamp unit (a).
2 Remove two screws (b) and detach the lamp unit (a).
c c
c a
a
b
28 Detach the mirror unit A.

1 Remove one each screw (d) that secures the front wire keep plate (b) and rear wire keep plate (c).
2 Detach the mirror unit A(a) from scanner unit(e).

d
a c
29 Detach the scanner wire.

1 Detach the scanner wire spring from hook(c).
2 Detach the scanner wire (a) and detach the scanner wire springs (b) from the round terminals (black marking)
(d).
a(Black)
c a(Glay)
4-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Reattach the scanner wire.
Important
<Precautions>
When fitting the scanner wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front side (P/N: 302K317150(gray))
Machine rear side(P/N: 302K317140(black))
<Fitting requires the following tools>

Two frame securing tools (P/N: 302FZ1710_)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N: 302RH9401_)
1 Detach the scanner wire drum assy.

1 Remove the screw (b) and detach the scanner wire drum gear (c).
2 Detach two screws (d) of scanner wire drum (a).
3 Detach the stop ring (f) and bushing (g) from the front side of the scanner wire drum shaft (e).
4 Detach the scanner wire drum (a) and the bushing (e) from scanner unit (h).
d
e
d
b
c
h
f g a
2 Fix the scanner wire.

1 Pass the ball (a) of the scanner wire through the hole of the scanner wire drum and wind the wire three times
inside, and four times outside.
• Shorter from small ball of the scanner wire is wound to come outside.
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2 Secure the scanner wires (c) using the scanner wire stoppers (d).
c
Inner 3 turn
a b a
Outer 4 turn
3 Fix the position of the mirror frame B.

1 Reattach the scanner wire drum and the shaft to the scanner unit as originally.
2 Pass the mirror frame fixing parts (b) through the front and rear positioning holes for the scanner unit and fix
the mirror frame B (a).
b
b
4-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Reattach the scanner wire.

1 Hook the scanner wire at the out side of the main unit on the out side groove of the pulley of the mirror frame
B. ..........(1)
2 Hook the round terminals to the catches inside the scanner unit. ..........(2)
3 Wind the inner scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the left of the scanner unit from below to
above...........(3)
4 Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys of the mirror frame B from below to above.
..........(4)
5 Wind the inner scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit ..........(5)
6 Hook the round terminal on the scanner wire spring. ..........(6)
(Front) 5 6 6 5 (Back)
3 Black-marking 3
1 1
4 4
2 Gray Black 2
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Adjust the mirror frame position.

1 Detach the scanner wire stoppers and the frame securing tools.
2 Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum, align the scanner wires to the inside.
3 Move the mirror frame B from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position.
4 Refit the mirror frame A in the main unit.
5 Move the mirror frames A (a) and the mirror frames B (b) to the machine left, and insert two frame securing
tools (c) into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the mirror frame A (a) and
the mirror frame B (b) in position.
6 Attach the front wire holder plate and rear wire holder plate to the mirror frame A with each screw while holding
the wire with the plates.
7 Detach the frame securing tools (c).
(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (CIS model)
4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detaching and reattaching the CIS unit
a
f
e
c
d
the arrow.
3 Remove nine screws (b)(M3x8) and detach the contact glass (a).
b b
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Detach the scanner carriage.

1 Remove the FFC (b) from the connector (c) of scanner carriage (a).
2 Detach the drive belt (d) from the fixing part (e) of the scanner carriage.
3 Detach the scanner carriage (a) from ISU lower frame (f).
4 Check the scanner carriage (a) and clean or replace it.

c
a
e
f
b
d
4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit
arrow.
b
cover (a).
b
a
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b b
a
b

4-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
a
f
e
c
d
the arrow.

a b
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
9 Detach the IC card reader cover.

1 Release two hooks (b) downwards.
2 Detach the IC card reader cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.

1 Lift up two points of the leading edge of the operation panel cover (b), slide them in the direction of the arrow
and then detach the operation panel cover from the operation panel (a).
2 Detach two clear panels (b) from the operation panel (a) and detach the language sheet (c).
c b
d
b
c
d
a
a
4-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b c
a
12 Remove the wire of the power switch.

1 Release two hooks (b) of front top cover (a) and tilt it toward you.
2 Remove the connector (c) and remove the wire from two wire saddles (e).
b e
c
a
13 Remove five screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the operation lower cover (a).
b
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
15 (a).
Release the three hooks (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach the right top cover
16 Release three protrusions (b) upward and detach the ISU front cover.
1 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8TP).
2 Release the four hooks (c) in the direction of the arrow.
3 Detach the ISU front cover (a).
4-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]

a
c
18 Disconnect the connector.

1 Disconnect the FFC (b) from the main PWB (a).
2 Disconnect the connector (d) from the Enginee PWB (b).
YC3001
YC15 b
d
c
a
19 Remove two screws (b) (M3x8TP) and two header pins (c), and detach the scanner unit
(a) upward.
b
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Drive section
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the drive unit
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
4-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Detach the drive unit.

1 Remove four connectors (b) from Enginee PWB (c) and lift motor (d).
2 Remove five screws (e)(M3×12B) and detach the drive unit (a).
3 Check or replace the drive unit (a), and then reattach in the original position the parts which are removed.
b c
d
e
Notes when attaching the drive unit.

Check the position of the elevation cam (b) of the MP bottom plate at the backside of the drive unit (a).
If it is at the B side than the reference line (c), rotate the main motor (d) manually to move the position of the elevation
cam (b).
a
b A B
d
OK NG
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the main motor
1 Remove the motor assy.

1 Disconnect each connector (d) from three motors.
2 Remove five screws (b)(M3×8B) and detach the drive assy (a).
c
b a
2 Remove six screws (b)(M3x8) and detach three motors from the motor assy (e).
a
b
c
e
Important
When attaching the motor assembly, rotate the motor manually and align the phase of the motor shaft and drive
unit gear.
4-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Detaching and attaching the other parts.

(4-1)Detaching and attaching the language sheet.
1 Lift up two points of the leading edge of the operation panel cover (b), slide them in the
direction of the arrow and then detach the operation panel cover from the operation
panel (a).

1 Detach two clear panels (b) from the operation panel (a).
2 Detach two language sheets.
3 Check or replace the language sheet, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b
c
b
c
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the exit fan motor
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
c
3 Detach the exit fan motor assy.
1 Remove the connector (c) and remove the wire (d) from hook (e).
2 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8TP) and then detach the exit fan motor assy(a).
c
d
a
e
4-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the controller fan motor
arrow.
b
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
c
4-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Detach the controller fan motor.

1 Remove the connector (c).
2 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8B) and then detach the controller fan motor (a).
c a
a
b b
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-4)Detaching and reattaching the conveying fan motor.
2 Release the front and rear lock levers (b) and close the conveying assembly (a).
b
b
3 Release five hooks (b) and detach the duplex conveying guide (a).
b
b
4-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
4 Detach the conveying fan motor assy.

1 Disconnect the connector (b) of the conveying fan motor.
2 Remove two screws (b)(M3×8B) and then detach the conveying fan motor assy (a).
c
a
(4-5)Detaching and reattaching the temperature/humidity fan motor.
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Detach the temperature/humidity fan motor.

1 Remove two screws (c)(M3×8TP) and release the hook (d) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Remove the two connectors (b) and detach the temperature/humidity fan motor assy.
b c
a
(4-6)Fan motor attachment direction
When reattaching the fan motor, be aware of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).
• LSU fan motor (a) : intake(rating label side: the inside)
• Power source fan motor (b) : ntake(rating label side: the inside)
• Exit fan motor (c) : exhaust(rating label side: the outside)
• Conveying fan motor (d) : exhaust(rating label side: the outside)
• Temperature/humidity fan motor (e) : intake(rating label side: the inside)
e a
d b
4-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)PWBs
Caution
Before replacing the PWB, be sure to take the following procedures.

Otherwise, The PWB may be damaged.
- Disconnect the power cord.
- Press the power switch one second or more to discharge the electric charge inside the main unit.
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB
cover (a).
b
a
2 Remove the SD/SDHC memory card if installed.
1 Remove one screw (a) (M3x8) and release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the SD
card cover (c).
2 Detach an SD/SDHC memory card (e) in the memory card slot (d).
d
a
c
e b
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b b
a
b

a
c
4-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 Detach the main PWB.

1 Disconnect all the connectors and the FFCs from the main PWB (a).
2 Remove six screws (b)(M3x8B) and detach the main PWB (a).
Important
When replacing the main PWB, make sure to remove the USB ground plate (d) from the USB connector (c)
from the old board and install it in the new board.
a
b c
3 Check or replace the main PWB, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Resetting the maintenance mode when replacing the main PWB.

1 To clear C0180 [Machine number mismatch], execute maintenance mode U004 to set the machine number.
2 Execute the scan image adjustment.

• Input the scanner automatic adjustment original data in maintenance mode U425.
• Execute maintenance mode U411 by using the scanner automatic adjustment original.
• Execute [Grayscale adjustment] from [System Menu].
3 If the optional item license was activated, reactivate it.

• If the card authentication kit (B) was activated, reactivate it.
• If the card type was set up, use maintenance mode U222 to set it up.
4 Import the data if it was exported in maintenance mode U917 from the main unit to replace the main PWB.
(Also, available at KM-Net Viewer)
5 Reset the user default setting and FAX default setting from the System Menu or Command Center.
6 Reset the following maintenance mode if necessary.
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main No. Maintenance mode relating to the FAX
unit unit
U250 Maintenance counter preset U603 User data 1
U251 Maintenance counter clear U604 User data 2
U253 Switching the double/single counts U610 System 1
U260 Switching the timing for copy counting U611 System 2
U326 Black line cleaning indication U612 System 3
U341 Printer cassette setting U615 System 6
U343 Duplex priority mode U625 Communication Setting
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting U695 FAX function customization
U402 Print margin adjustment
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table)
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP)
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/Reversal)
U425 Set Target
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the Enginee PWB
cover (a).
b
a
4-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b b
a
b
3 Detach the Enginee PWB.

1 Disconnect all the connectors and the FFCs from the Enginee PWB (a).
2 Remove four screws (b)(M3x8B) and detach the Enginee PWB (a).
3 Check or replace the Enginee PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b c
Important
When replacing the Enginee PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (U15) (c) from the old board and
install it in the new board.
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the low voltage PWB
arrow.
b
4-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
cover (a).
b
a

b b
a
b
c
1 Remove five screws (b).
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Detach the power source fan motor.

1 Disconnect the connector of the fan motor (b).
2 Remove one screw (c).
3 Release two hooks (c) and detach the power source fan motor assy.
c
a
c
a
b
4-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10 Detach the low voltage PWB.

1 Disconnect all the connectors from the low voltage PWB (a).
2 Remove five screws (b)(M3x8B) and remove the low voltage PWB (a).
3 Check or replace the low voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b
b b
b
b
Caution
Electric charge may reside on the low-voltage PWB after turning the power off and disconnecting the power
cord, and do not touch mounted parts.
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB
4-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
arrow.
b
cover (a).
b
a

4-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
b b
a
b
c
1 Remove five screws (b).

4-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]

a b
9 Detach the tray left cover.

1 Release the hook (b) from the frame in the direction of the arrow.
2 Detach the tray left cover (a) while avoiding the tray rear cover (c).
b b
c
a

a
4-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
11 Detach the upper exit cover (a) while holding the tray rear cover (b).
12 Detach the tray rear cover (b).
13 Detach the high voltage PWB.

1 Disconnect the FFC (c) from the connector (b) at the back side of the high-voltage PWB (a).
2 Remove two screws (d)(M3×8TP) and two screws (e)(M3×8B) and detach the high voltage PWB (a).
3 Check or replace the high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
d e
4-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB
1 Lift up two points of the leading edge of the operation panel cover (b), slide them in the
direction of the arrow and then detach the operation panel cover from the operation
panel (a).

1 Detach two clear panels (b) from the operation panel (a).
2 Detach two language sheets.
3 Check or replace the language sheet, and then reattach the parts in the original position.
b
c
b
c
4-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b c
a
4 Disconnect the wire from the operation panel PWB.

1 Disconnect five FFCs (b) from the operation panel PWB (a).
• The connector (d) has a lock.
2 Disconnect two connectors (c) from the operation panel PWB (a).
7-inch panel model
b
c
b b
a
d
c
4-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]

b
b
c
b
a
d
c
5 Distach the operation panel PWB.

1 Remove four screws (a) and detach the operation panel PWB (c) from the operation top unit (b).
2 Check or replace the operation panel PWB (c), and then reattach the parts in the original position.
a c a
a
b
(5-6)Detaching and reattaching the DP PWB
1 Remove four screws (b) from the document processor (a).
a b
2 Detach the DP rear cover.

4-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Detach the DP PWB.

1 Disconnect all the connectors from the DP PWB (a).
2 Remove four screws (b).
3 Release the hook A (c), release three hooks (d) in the direction of the arrow and detach the DP PWB (a).
a
b c
d b a
a
Important
When replacing the DP PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (YS1) (e) from the old board and install it
in the new board.
4-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option)
4 - 6 Disassembly & Reassembly (option)

(1)Paper feeder (PF-470/PF-471)
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit
1 Detach the PF rear cover.

1 Remove two screws (b).
2 Release three hooks (b) and detach PF rear cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Detach the PF drive unit.

1 Disconnect the connector (d) of the PF motor (c).
2 Release the wire (e) from the hook (f).
3 Remove three screws (b) and detach the drive unit (a).
e f
b
c
f
f
b
d
a
4-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB
1 Detach the PF rear cover.

2 Release three hooks (b) and detach PF rear cover (a) in the direction of the arrow.
2 Detach the PF PWB.

1 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).
3 Release two hooks (c) and remove the PF PWB (a).
b c
a a
4-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Finisher (DF-470)
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the DF front cover
1 Remove two screws (b) and detach the DF front cover (a).
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the DF rear cover
1 Remove two screws (b) and detach the DF rear cover (a).
(2-3)Aligning the phase of the upper and lower drive gears of the DF bundle eject belt
• When attaching the upper and lower drive gear of the DF bundle exit belt, align the phase of the ribs (a) so that they
lie on the same line.
4-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance > Periodical maintenance procedure (CH:Check CL:Clean AD:Adjust LU:Lubrication RE:Replace)
4 - 7 Periodical maintenance procedure (CH:Check CL:Clean AD:Adjust

LU:Lubrication RE:Replace)
(1)Main unit
Set Up
Maintenance Set Call PM maintenance Point, Note
Parts, Location UP (x1000 counts)
300 600
Test copy CH CH CH CH -
Test Print AD AD AD AD
(Max. copy size)
Entire inside the main CL CL CL VACUUM : Remove toner and paper dust especially
unit from imaging section and paper conveying path.
MK-6115 RE RE Drum unit, Developer unit, Fuser unit
MK-6116 Transfer unit, Feed unit, Regist cleaner,
MK-6117 MP feed rolle, MP separation pad
MK-6119
Exterior and Cover

300 600
OUTER COVERS CH CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
Feed and Conveying section

300 600
Regist cleaner CL CL CL VACUUM : Paper dust removal
(302K394450)
Feed unit CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(302K394480)
MP feed roller CL CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
(302K394460) RE RE Check feed count by U901: Replace at 100K
MP separation pad CL CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
(302P194090) RE RE Check feed count by U901: Replace at 100K
Rollers/pulleys CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
Conveying guides CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
Exit and Duplex section

300 600
Conveying guides CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Image scanner section

300 600
Contact glass CL CL CL CL Use dry cloth after cleaning by the alcohol (Normally
(302P194050) surface only)
(302P194060) Clean the back side (dry wipe after alcohol wipe) only
when the abnormal image (streaks and dirt) appears.
Clean by the dry cloth when installing DP
Slit glass CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth or water wipe
(302P194050)
(302P194060)
Drive and Other section

300 600
CLUTCHS CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition
RE on registration and paper feed section.
SENSORS CH CH CH Use dry cloth or air blower to the light reception

surface of the photo sensor.
Caution
Please do not use flammable spray for air blower in the list.
4-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Set Up
300 600
Test copy, Test print CH CH CH CH -
(Max. copy size) AD AD AD AD
MK-6110 RE RE DP feed roller assy, DP retard roller cover,
DP retard roller
Exterior and Cover

300 600
Entire inside the main CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
unit
DP feed motor section

300 600
DP feed roller CL Alcohol
(302P194100) (Replace MK-6110 if necessary)
DP retard roller cover CL Alcohol
DP retard roller CL Alcohol
DP conveying and reversing section

300 600
DP registration roller CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(302P194270)
DP registration pulley CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(303P724170)
DP conveying pulley A CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(303M824210)
DP conveying pulley B CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(303LL24190)
DP scanner guide CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(302P118260)
DP other section
300 600
Original Cover CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
(303JC04201)
Slit glass CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth (CCD section)
(302RH17210)
4-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DP slit glass CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth (CIS section)

(302P217110)
Caution
4-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Paper Feeder (PF-470/471) (Option)

Set Up
300 600
Test copy, Test print CH CH CH CH Check the center alignment gap.
(Max. copy size) AD AD AD AD (check after center adjustment of the main unit)
Exterior and Cover

300 600
unit
PF feed section
300 600
Feed unit CL CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth
(302K394480) RE RE
PF conveying section
300 600
PF upper conveying CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
roller
(302MV94310)
PF lower conveying CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
roller
(302MV94320)
Caution
4-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Attachment Kit (AK-470) (Option)

Exterior and Cover
300 600
unit
BR paper conveying section

300 600
Conveying guides CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
Caution
(5)Finisher (DF-470) (Option)

Exterior and Cover
300 600
unit
DF conveying section
300 600
Caution
Please do not use flammable spray for air blower / blower brush in the list.
4-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Firmware > Firmware update
5 Firmware
5 - 1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
* The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller DL_PKG_CTRL.2P1 (32 ppm model) CPKG
DL_PKG_CTRL.2P2 (25 ppm model)
Product Line Platform DL_CTRL_PLP.2P1 PLP
Common Basic App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN.2P1 CMN
System Setting App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SST.2P1 SST
Maintenance App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT.2P1 MNT
Copy App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_CPY.2P1 CPY
Print App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT.2P1 PRT
Send App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SND.2P1 SND
BOX App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX.2P1 BOX
Fax App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX.2P1 SFAX
Web Page App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG.2P1 WPG
Auth App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH.2P1 AUTH
Panel Control System App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS.2P1 (32 ppm model) PCS:

DL_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS.2P2 (25 ppm model)
Service Cooperation App DL_CTRL_STDAPP_SCO.2P1 SCO
Extension Service Platform DL_CTRL_EXSP.2P1 EXSP
Package Version Info DL_CTRL_VINF.2P1 (32 ppm model) VINF

DL_CTRL_VINF.2P2 (25 ppm model)
Panel DL_PANL.2P1 (32 ppm model) PANL

DL_PANL.2P2 (25 ppm model)
Browser DL_BRWS.2P1 BRWS
2 Option Language Data(1) DL_OPT_xx.2P1 (*1) OPT1
3 Option Language Data(2) OPT2
7 Option Language Data (Erase) DL_OPT_ER.2P1 -
8 OCR Dictionary Data DL_OCR.2P1 OCR
Important
When installing the OCR dictionary firmware, it is necessary the SSD or the SD card has to be installed.
Also, it is necessary to format the SSD / SD card at the system menu in the main unit.
5-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
step
1 FAX Board DL_FAX.3R2 FAX
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
step
1 Document Processor DL_DPRC.2P1 DP
2 Paper Feeder DL_03NN.2P1 PF
3 Attachment Kit DL_03NS.2P1 AK
4 Document Finisher DL_05JS.2P1 DF
5 Enginee Firmware DL_ENGN.2P1 ENGN
[GROUP4 UPDATE]
step
1 Sub Panel Board DL_SPNL.2P1 SPNL
Verify the signature at firmware update

Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data.
File names of the signature and firmware certificate
Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file name
Common Basic App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_cert.pem
System Setting App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_SST_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_SST_cert.pem
Maintenance App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_MNT_cert.pem
Copy App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_CPY_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_CPY_cert.pem
Print App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_PRT_cert.pem
Send App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_SND_cert.pem
BOX App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_BOX_cert.pem
Fax App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_FAX_cert.pem
Web Page App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_WPG_cert.pem
Auth App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_AUTH_cert.pem
Panel Control System App 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_sign.bin (32 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_cert.pem (32
ppm model) ppm model)
2P2_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_sign.bin (25 2P2_CTRL_STDAPP_PCS_cert.pem (25
ppm model) ppm model)
Service Cooperation Ap 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_STDAPP_CMN_cert.pem
Product Line Platform 2P1_CTRL_PLP_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_PLP_cert.pem
Extension Service Platform 2P1_CTRL_EXSP_sign.bin 2P1_CTRL_EXSP_cert.pem
Package Version Info 2P1_CTRL_VINF_sign.bin (32 ppm model) 2P1_CTRL_VINF_cert.pem (32 ppm
2P2_CTRL_VINF_sign.bin (25 ppm model) model)
2P2_CTRL_VINF_cert.pem (25 ppm
model)
Panel 2P1_PANL_sign.bin (32 ppm model) 2P1_PANL_cert.pem (32 ppm model)
2P2_PANL_sign.bin (25 ppm model) 2P2_PANL_cert.pem (25 ppm model)
Browser 2P1_BRWS_sign.bin 2P1_BRWS_cert.pem
Option Language Data(1) 2P1_OPT_xx_sign.bin 2P1_OPT_xx_cert.pem
5-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file name

Option Language Data(2)
Option Language Data (Erase) 2P1_OPT_ER_sign.bin 2P1_OPT_ER_cert.pem
Sub Panel Board 2P1_SPNL_sign.bin 2P1_SPNL_cert.pem
FAX Board 3R2_FAX_sign.bin 3R2_FAX_cert.pem
Enginee Firmware 2P1_ENGN_sign.bin 2P1_ENGN_cert.pem
Document Processor 2P1_DPRC_sign.bin 2P1_DPRC_cert.pem
Document Finisher 2P1_05JS_sign.bin 2P1_05JS_cert.pem
Attachment Kit 2P1_03NS_sign.bin 2P1_03NS_cert.pem
Paper Feeder 2P1_03NN_sign.bin 2P1_03NN_cert.pem
5-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Note when upgrading the firmware

When using a USB memory requiring a long time to start up, the main unit starts up before executing the firmware
upgrade and entering into the firmware upgrade fails.
Maintenance mode U025 firmware update (S): Execute the firmware upgrade at Firmware Update (Security)
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file (skip files:
ES_SKIP.ON) in [FWUP_02P1] folder *1 or [FWUP_02P2] folder *2 of the root folder of the USB memory.
*1: for 7 inch LCD model, *2: for 4.3 inch LCD model
* If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.
1 After turning the power switch (a) on and the screen is properly displayed, turn the
power switch (a) off.
2 Insert the USB memory (b) with the firmware into the USB memory slot and turn the
power switch (a) on.
c
b
• [FW-UPDATE] is parallelly processed and the progress is displayed.

[ 7 Inch display ]
[ 4.3 Inch display ]
• "Completed" is displayed when the firmware update is completed.

• Check if the new firmware versions are displayed.
5-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[ 7 Inch display ]
• When there is no corresponding master file, "No Change" is displayed.

* is displayed after the firmware version update that has been skipped.
• [----------] is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.
5-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
For the case of an error

[ 7 Inch display ]
• When an error occurs during the firmware upgrade, the process is immediately interrupted and the error code
and error message are indicated.
Codes Description Codes Description

0000 Others S000 Other signature verification error *1
0100 No Master file S001 Signature verification file is inadequate
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no upgrade target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
04xx File (No.xx) Checksum mismatch N002 Network connection failed. *3

(There is an upgrade target interrupted)
05xx File (No.xx) Preparation failure
06xx File (No.xx) Oversize
08xx File (No.xx) Writing failure
*1: Including the expired FW certificate

*2: Automatically restarted for the normal start-up since the normal start-up is available next time.
*3: Transferred to the USB upgrade mode instead of the automatic restart since the normal start-up may not be available next
time.
Indication of the signature verification result

Official signature verification file Indicate the result
Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is successful. Version number
Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful. S000
Neither certificate nor signature files exist. S001

Or either of them does not exist.
3 Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory.
4 Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on.
5 Check that the "Home" screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off.
Caution
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update.
5-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware
update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
* The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.
5-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode
6 Maintenance mode
6 - 1 Maintenance mode
This model is equipped with the service mode for the main unit maintenance and correction.
(1)Executing the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the >ȁ@>9@ keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the >ȁ@>9@ keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Maintenance modes list

Section Maintenance item Outline
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Printing the reports and exporting them to a USB memory
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exiting from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initializing to the factory-default setting
U004 Machine Number Display of the machine serial number and setting
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Setting the maintenance mode ID
U019 Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the PWB
Initializatio U021 Initializes Memory Initializing the backup RAM

n
U025 Firmware update (S) Updates the firmware
Drive U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor

Paper feed
U031 Check the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
Conveying
Cooling U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply solenoids
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjusting the leading edge timing and the center line
U035 Folio size setting Sets the Folio paper length and width.
U037 Fan motor operation check Drive each fan motor.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjusts the paper loop amount between the rollers
adjustment
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Sets each motor's speed correction
Optical U063 Shading position adjustment Changes the scanner shading position
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjusting the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjusting the leading edge timing for table scanning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line Adjusting the center line for table scanning
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjusting the starting position for DP scanning
U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing Adjusting the DP scanning timing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjusting the center line for DP scanning
U089 MIP-PG pattern output Output MIP-PG pattern
U099 Original size detection setting Sets the original size detection check and detection
threshold
High U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
voltage
system U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Sets high voltage except the main high voltage and outputs
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Sets the transfer belt unit cleaning control voltage.
U110 Drum counter Displays/sets the drum counter
U111 Drum drive time Display the drum drive time that is used for the high-voltage
time correction.
U117 Drum unit number Displays the drum number
6-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

High U118 Drum unit history Displays the drum history
voltage
system U120 Drum drive distance counter Displays the drive distance counter
U127 Clearing the transfer count Displaying the counts
Developer U136 Toner level detection setting Sets the number of pages printable at toner near end
system
U139 Temperature, humidity Displays the machine inside and outside humidity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Sets the overcharge toner removal mode
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Setting auto drum refresh
U150 Toner sensor operation check Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor for
toner
U157 Developer drive time Displays/sets the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Displays/sets the developer counter
Fuser U161 Fuser temperature adjustment Sets the fuser control temperature
U167 Clearing the fuser count Display/set/clear the count.
U198 Fuser phase control setting Switch the stationary phase control
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Operation U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch panel
section /
U203 Check DP operation Checking the DP paper conveying operation with the DP
Support
alone
equipment
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key operation
U222 Setting the IC card type Sets the ID card type
U230 Optional device serial number Displays the optional device serial number
U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the PF motor and solenoid
U244 DP switch check Drive the DP sensor
Mode U250 Maintenance counter preset Changes the preset value

Setting
U251 Maintenance counter clear Displaying/clearing/changing the counter value
U252 Destination Sets the machine operation and indication depending on

the specification of the destination
U253 Double/single count switch Sets the counter by color mode
U260 Feed/eject counter switch Setting the count-up timing
U265 Setting by destination Sets the OEM code
U278 Delivery date setting Register Delivery Date
U285 Set Service Status Page Setting the print coverage report output
U287 Automatic recovery function Sets whether to automatically recover afer error
U290 Application storage drive setting Set the HyPAS application storage rive.
U326 Black line cleaning display setting Switch the black line cleaning guidance indication
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient Setting the coefficient of the custom size
U341 Printer cassette setting Sets the cassette to printer output only
6-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Mode U343 Duplex priority mode setting Switches the duplex printing priority mode
Setting
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting Setting the maintenance timing display
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Setting the BAM related sleep mode
Image U402 Print margin adjustment Adjusts the scan image margins
processing
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table) Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP) Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Reversal) Adjusting the writing timing in rotated 180 degrees
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Acquiring the data for the automatic halftone adjustment
and the ID correction
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjusting the scanner and DP automatically
U425 Target adjustment Inputs the Lab value printed on an adjustment original
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Sets the JPEG compression rate
U520 TDRS setting Checking/setting the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initializes all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initializing the software switches of other than the machine
data
U603 User data 1 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U604 User Data 2 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U605 Data clear Initializing the FAX communication data
U610 System setting 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a FAX
at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
U611 System setting 2 Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
U612 System setting 3 Setting regarding the FAX communication operation
U615 System Setting 6 Sets the size to print at FAX reception and received image
size
U620 FAX system Sets the signal detection method for remote switching
U625 Communication Setting Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of
auto redialing
U630 Communication control procedures 1 Setting the FAX communication
U631 Communication control procedures 2 Sets the FAX communication
U634 Communication control procedures 5 Set the acceptable error when judging the received TCF
signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Setting the detection time by remote switching mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Sets the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Sets the modem output level
U660 Ring setting Setting the NCU (network control unit)
6-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Others U670 List output Outputting the list of the fax communication data
U695 FAX function customization FAX batch transmission is set up.
U699 Software switch: Set Sets the software switches individually
U901 Clearing the counters by paper source Displays/clears the counters by paper source
U903 Clearing the jam counter Displays/clears number of occurrence by jam trigger code
U904 Clearing the service call error counter Displays/clears the service call error and system error
counts
U905 Optional counter Displaying the optional count
U908 Total counter Displays the total count
U910 Black rate data Clearing the print coverage data and its period
U911 Counter by media type Displays/clears the counts by media type
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Reading/writing the backup data to a USB memory
U920 Billing counter Displays the billing count
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clearing the billing count and machine life count
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Displaying/setting the counts
U928 Machine life counter Displays the machine life count
U935 Relay PWB Maintenance Sets the mode when an error occurs
U942 DP loop amount setting Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document
processor
U964 Transfer the log files save in the nonvolatile memory to a

USB memory.
U977 Setting the data capture mode Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory
U984 Developer unit number Displays the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Displays the developer unit number history
U991 Scanner counter Displays the scanner count
6-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U000 Printing Maintenance Report

(Message: Mainte Report)
Contents
Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences. Output the
event log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter
the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
2 Select the item to output.

Items Output list
Maintenance Maintenance mode setting list
User Status Output User Status Page
Svc Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
NW Status Output Network Status Page
LLU Report Output LLU report
Fax Sys Conf *1 Prints the list of local telephone number, confidential boxes and firmware
versions.
Fax Act List *1 Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Fax Self Sts *1 Maintenance mode setting, Fax communication setting output
Fax Pcl List *1 Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Fax Err List *1 Output the error list.
All All reports output
*1: FAX installation only
3 Press the [Start] key to output the list.

If A4 paper is available, it is output with this size. If A4 paper is unavailable, sekect the paper source. Output status is
displayed.
Method: when sending output data to a USB memory
2 Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3 Select the item to send.
4 Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].

Items Output list
Print A report is printed.
6-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Output list

USB(Text) Destination: send to USB memory (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)
• Reinstall the USB memory for continuous USB out whenever completing output. (For unmounting the USB
memory after output)

The output data is sent to the USB memory.
Completion
6-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Detail of event log
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ECOSYS M4132idn (2) 2017/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2P1_2000.001.133 2017.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (7) Life Count:100000
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time (10) Maintenance Log
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Item. Data and Time
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2 444444 02.01 2014/02/12 17:30
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 1 222222 02.02 2014/02/12 17:30
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5
4 0501.01.08.01.00
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01
0501.01.08.01
2014/02/12 17:30
2014/02/12 17:30
3 (a)
555555 (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01 (e)
2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
(9) Service Call Log

# Count. Service Code Data and Time (11) Unknown toner Log
8 1111111 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Serial Number Item. Data and Time
7 999999 01.01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 5 1111111 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 01.01.0000 2014/02/12 17:30 4 999999 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5 777777 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 3 888888 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
4 666666 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 2 777777 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
3 555555 01.01.4000 2014/02/12 17:30 1 666666 0123456789ABCDEF 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30
6-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ECOSYS M4132idn 2017/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2P1_2000.001.133 2017.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 Life Count:100000
(12) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4302: 0
J0100: 1 J4303: 1
J0101: 11 J4304: 11
J0104: 222 J4309: 2
J0105: 1 J9000: 1
J0106: 1 J9004 0
J0107: 1 J9010: 1
J0110: 1 J9060: 1
J0111: 1 J9061: 2
J0211: 1 J9062: 1
J0212: 1 J9110: 1
J0213: 999 J9120: 0
J0501: 1 J9200: 1
J0502: 1 J9210: 1
J0503: 1 J9220: 2
J0504: 1
J0508: 1 (g) C0000: 0
J0509: 1 C0001: 1
J0511: 1 C0002: 2
J0512: 1 C0003: 3
J0513: 1 C0004: 4
J0514: 1 C0005: 5
J0518: 1 C0006: 6
J0519: 1 C0007: 7
J1403: 1 C0008: 8
J1404: 1 C0009: 9
J1413: 1 C0010: 10
J1414: 1 CF245: 11( 0)
J1604: 1 CF248: 12( 0)
J1614: 1 CF345: 13( 0)
J4002: 1 (h) T00: 10
J4003: 1 M00: 20
J4004: 1 M01: 30
J4009: 1
J4012: 1
J4013: 1
J4014: 1
J4019: 1
J4201: 1
J4202: 0
J4203: 1
J4204: 1
J4208: 0
J4209: 1
J4211: 11
J4212: 222
J4213: 1
J4214: 2
J4218: 1
6-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Description of event log

No. Contents
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Enginee firmware version
(4) Enginee boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Life counter
(8) Paper Jam Log
# Count. Event Descriptions Date and

Time
Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count at the time Log code ( 5 types in Date and
occurrence. of a paper jam. hexadecimal) time of
If the past paper jam occurrence (a) Cause of paper jam occurren
is less than 16, all of them are ce
(b) Paper source
indicated. The oldest log is
(c) Paper size
deleted when exceeding 16
events. (d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
• Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection",for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (See page P. 7-42)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder)
04 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1

01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 24: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper(12 x 8)
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 27: 8K
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 28: 16K-R
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 A8: 16K-E
07: Legal 13: Custom size 32: Statement-R
08: A4R 1E: C4 B2: Statement-E
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki 33: Folio
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 34: Youkei type 2
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 35: Youkei type 4
0A: A3
6-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
.
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 14: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
01: Main unit face down (FD)

02: Main unit face up (FU)/500 sheets finisher(FU)
03: 5000-sheets finisher(FD)
05: Job Separator Tray(FD)
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and

Time
Remembers 1 to 8 th of The total page count at the time The first two digits (identification) Date and
occurrence of self diagnostics of the self diagnostic error. 01: Service call / System error time of
error. occurren
02: Unit replacement
If the occurrence of the previous ce
self-diagnostic error is 8 or less,
all of the diagnostics errors are Next two digits (Auto reboot
logged. information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
Last four digits

Self diagnostic error code
(See page P. 7-66)
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnostic error,
00 without auto beboot and 6000
Self diagnostic error code.
U287 sets the auto reboot
function
6-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Contents
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and

Time
Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence Total page count at the time of Maintenance item code (1-byte Date and
of unknown toner detection. If the replacement of the value to indicate 2 items) time of
the occurrence of the previous maintenance item. First byte (Replacing item) occurren
unknown toner detection is less The toner replacement log is ce
02: Maintenance kit
than 8, all of the unknown toner triggered by toner empty. This
detection are logged. Second 1 byte (replacement item
record may contain such a
type)
reference as the toner container
is inserted twice or a used toner 01: MK-6115/6116/6117/6119
container is inserted. 02: MK-6110
(11) Toner Log
# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and

Time
Remembers 1 to 32 of The total page count at the time log code Date and
occurrence of unknown toner of the request of toner container First 1byte(Replacing item) time of
detection. If the occurrence of replacement. occurren
01: Genuine product
the previous unknown toner ce
detection is less than 32, all of 02: Non-genuine product
the unknown toner detection are Next 1byte (type of replacement
logged. item)
00: Black
Last 16 digits
Displays the serial number of the
toner container.
(12) Counter Log
(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Maintenance replacement
item
Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter of self Indicates the log counter Consist
paper jams depending on diagnostics errors depending on depending on the maintenance of three
location. cause. replacing item. log
Refer to Paper Jam Log. counters
of paper
The number of auto reboot is T: Toner container
jams,
• All instances including those also displayed at the service call/ 00: Black self
not having occurred are system error.
M: Maintenance kit diagnosti
displayed. cs errors,
(Example) CF245: 4(2) and
01: MK-6115/6116/6117/6119 maintena
System Error 245 occurred last
02: MK-6110 nce
four times and then executed the
auto reboot twice. replacem
ent
Example: T00: 1
items.
The toner container (Black) has
been replaced once.
The toner replacement log is

triggered by toner empty. This
record may contain such a
reference as the toner container
is inserted twice or a used toner
container is inserted.
6-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Detail of service status page
Service Status Page (2) ZKG6400006

MFP
(3) 01/08/2016 14:30
ECOSYS M4132idn (4)(5) [2.1.6] [2P1_F000.001.008]
(1) Firmware Version 2P1_Q000.001.146 2016.08.01 (6)(7)(8) [2P1_1000.001.020] [2P1_1100.001.001] [2P1_7000.001.216]
Controller Information
Memory Status
Standard Size 1.0 GB Default Emulation P1 06
Option Slot 0 MB CR/LF Action P2/P3 1/1
(9) Total Size 1.0 GB AES Mode P4 00
AES Option 1/2 P7 10
Time Command Recognition P9 82
(10) Local Time Zone Default Paper Output R0 01
GMT Greenwich Mean Time: Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London Default Paper Size R2 00
(11) Date and Time 04/08/2016 01:46 Reserved R3 00
(12) Time Server Default Paper Source R4 01
Override A4/LT S4 01
Installed Options Host Buffer Size Rate S5 01
(13) Paper Feeder Cassette (500 x 2) RAM Disk Size S6 128
(14) SD Card Not Installed RAM Disk Mode S7 01
(15) SSD Not Installed Wide A4 T6 00
(16) Finisher Not Installed Default Line Spacing U0+U1/100 6.00
(17) Card Authentication Kit (B) Not Installed Default Character Spacing U2+U3/100 10.00
(18) Data Security Kit (E) Not Installed Reserved U4 01
(19) UG-33 Not Installed Country Code/Symbol Set U6/U7 41/53
(20) USB Keyboard Not Connected Default Pitch U8+U9/100 10.00
(21) USB Keyboard Type US-English Default Font Height V0*100+V1+V2/100 12.00
Default Font Name V3 Courier
(22) Print Coverage Default KANJI Font Size V4*100+V5+V6/100 10.00
Average (%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) Default KANJI Font Name V7 MTHSMINCHO-W3
(23) Total Courier/LetterGothic V9 05
K: 0.00 / 0.00 MP Tray Paper Type X0 01
(24) Copy Cassette 1 Paper Type X1 01
K: 0.00 / 0.00 Cassette 2 Paper Type X2 01
(25) Printer Cassette 3 Paper Type X3 01
K: 0.00 / 0.00 PCL Paper Source X9 00
(26) FAX Auto Error Clear Y0 00
K: 0.00 / 0.00 Error Clear Timer Y1 06
(27) Period ( - 04/08/2016 01:46) Finishing error Y3 127
(28) Last Page (%) 0.00 Special Type Act Mode Y4 00
(29) Last Job (%) 0.00 PDF mode Y5 00
e-MPS error control Y6 03
(30) FRPO Status
Reserved B0 00 RP Code
Default Pattern Switch B8 00 (31) 0008 01E2 3177
Page Orientation C1 00 (32) 0008 027A C873
Default Font Number C5*10000+C2*100+C3 00000 (33) FFFF FFFF FFFF
Reserved C6 00 (34) 0008 01E2 31F5
PCL Font Switch C8 00
Print density D4 03
Reserved D6 03
Host Buffer Size H8 05
FF Time Out H9 06
Reserved I5 01
Reserved I6 00
Zoom J0 00
Text wrap mode J7 00
Horizontal user offset K0+K1/100 0.00
Vertical user offset K2+K3/100 0.00
Default KANJI number K4 00
KANJI code switch K6 00
Reserved K9 00
KIR Mode N0 02
Duplex mode N4 00
Sleep Timer N5 120
EcoPrint Mode N6 00
Reserved N7 00
Print Resolution N8 01
6-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Service Status Page ZKG6400006

MFP
01/08/2016 14:30
ECOSYS M4132idn [2.1.6] [2P1_F000.001.008]
Firmware Version 2P1_Q000.001.146 2016.08.01 [2P1_1000.001.020] [2P1_1100.001.001] [2P1_7000.001.216]
Controller Information Engine Information

Print Settings (38) NVRAM Version _Cb26630_Cb26630
(35) MP Tray Priority Off (39) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version 2GR_5000.001.001
FAX APL Version 2GR_5100.001.001
FAX IPL Version 2GR_5200.001.001
(40) MAC Address 00:17:C8:16:84:04
(37) System Firmware(Details) (41) DP Counters
2P1_Q000.001.146 Total 0
2P1_QA00.001.146
2P1_R000.001.146
2P1_R100.001.146
2P1_R200.001.146
2P1_R300.001.146
2P1_R400.001.146
2P1_R500.001.146
2P1_R600.001.146
2P1_R700.001.146
2P1_R800.001.146
2P1_R900.001.146
2P1_RB00.001.146
2P1_RD00.001.146
2P1_S100.001.146
6-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Service Status Page ZKG6400006

MFP
01/08/2016 14:30
ECOSYS M4132idn [2.1.6] [2P1_F000.001.008]
(1) Firmware Version 2P1_Q000.001.146 2016.08.01 [2P1_1000.001.020] [2P1_1100.001.001] [2P1_7000.001.216]
(42)(43) 1/1
(44) 600/600
(45) 0/0/0/0/0/
(46) 0/0/0/0/0/
(47) 0/50/0/50/
(48) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
(49) 0000000//0000000/0000000//0000000/
(50) 0000000/
F00/U00/0/1/1/1/25/25/50/0/0/0/0/00//5/2/0/1/ (51)(52)(53)(54)(55)(56)(57)(58)(59)(60)(61)(62)(63)(64)(65)(66)(67)(68)(69)
(70) 2010/9000/4010/5000/3010/2010/4000/4010/3010/2010/5000/6000/
5010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/2010/
(71) 00000000/00000000/00000000000000000000000000000000/00000000000000000000000000000000/0000/00/00
(72)(73) /0/
(74) [3NN_9000.002.001][][]
(75) [2P1_81DK.001.003][2P1_81SE.001.003][2P1_81NO.001.003][2P1_81BR.001.003][2P1_81TR.001.003]
(76) 0258000000/0258000000/0000------/----------/--------00/000000002E/C3694B6---/----------/----------/---0000000/
0---------/----------/----------/----------/---------0/0000000---/----------/----------/----------/---00A00A8/
C00360000-/----------/----------/----------/----------/---0000000/0---------/----------/-----00000/000-------/
---96AF961/43C14-----/---000493E/0--------0/0000000000/249F000024/9F0000249F/000000000-/-------000/0000000000/
0000000000/000000000-/-0202-----/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/
----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/----------/-------000/00000
(77) 0/
(78)(79) -/-/
(80)(81) 0/5/
(82) 1/
1/0/1/ (83)(84)(85)
(86) EZJ00Z400033/
(87) EZK00Z400016/
6-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(1) Firmware Version -
(2) Machine serial number -
(3) System date -
(4) API version of the HyPAS application -
(5) Browser version -
(6) Enginee firmware version -
(7) Enginee boot version -
(8) Operation panel firmware version -
(9) Total memory size -
(10) Local time zone -
(11) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(12) NTP server name -
(13) Whether the paper feeder is installed or Cassette(500 sheets×1) / Cassette(1500 sheets×2) / Not Installed
not
(14) Availability of the SD memory card Installed/Not Installed
(15) Whether the SSD Installed/Not Installed
(16) Availability of the finisher 500 sheets finisher/not installed
(17) Availability of the ID Card Authentication Introduced/ before introduction/trial

Kit
(18) Availability of the Security Kit(E) Installed/Not Installed
(19) Availability of UG-33 Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(20) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(21) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German/French
(22) Page count converted to the A4/Letter size Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of toner
consumption and will not match the actual toner consumption.
(23) Entire average coverage Black
(24) Average coverage for copy Black
(25) Average printer coverage Black/
(26) Average coverage for FAX Black
(27) Cleared date and output date -
(28) Coverage on the last output page -
(29) Last job coverage information -
(30) FRPO setting -
(31) RP code Coding the Enginee firmware version and the date of the previous
update.
(32) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the latest update.
(33) RP code Coding the Enginee firmware version and the date of the previous
update.
6-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(34) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous
update.
(35) MP tray priority setting Off : No setting

Auto : Auto paper feed
Always : All times
(37) System Firmware (detail) -
(38) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225

(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME
firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are identical
with (c) and (f).
(39) FAX firmware version -
(40) Mac address -
(41) DP counter The number of times of DP feeding
(42) Destination information -
(43) Area information -
(44) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(45) Top offset -
(46) Left offset -
(47) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left margin integer
part /Left margin decimal part
(48) Life counter (cassette 1) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette/Paper feeder 1/Paper feeder 2/
Duplex
(49) Life counter (cassette 2) Drum unit/Transfer unit/MC roller/Fuser unit
(50) Life counter (cassette 3) Maintenance kits
(51) Panel lock information F00: OFF

F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(52) USB information U00: Not Connected

U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
6-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(53) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select
1: Paper source fixed
(54) Auto cassette change 0: OFF

1: ON (Default)
(55) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 1: A3 (Less than 420 mm length), Single counts
2: Legal(Less than 356mm length), Single counts
3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(56) Billing counts timing 0: When secondary paper feed starts

1: When completing output
(57) Temperature (machine inside) -
(58) Temperature (machine outside) -
(59) Relative humidity (machine outside) -
(60) Absolute humidity (machine outside) -
(61) Machine inside humidity -
(62) LSU1 humidity information -
(63) LSU2 humidity information -
(64) DRT information -
(65) Asset Number -
(66) Job end judgment time-out time -
(67) Job end detection mode 0: Detects as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detects as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a break in job
(68) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off

1: On
(69) Scan to SMB mode setting 0: Off

1: On
(70) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings

1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
For details on settings, refer to MDAT 2: Normal 2 2: Low
command in "Prescribe Commands 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Reference Manual".
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Heavy 4 1: Enable
8: Heavy 5
9: Extra Heavy
(71) RFID information -
(72) RFID reader/writer version -
(73) Toner install mode information 0: Off

1: On
(74) Cassette2 software version -
6-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
No. Items Contents

(75) Option message version -
(76) Maintenance information -
(77) MC correction 1 to 7
(78) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(79) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(80) Toner low setting 0: Disabled

1: Enabled
(81) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(82) Shift regulation for a single original 0: disable (shift regulation off)
1: enable (shift regulation on)
(83) ErP applied mode setting 0: ErP non-applied mode

1: ErP applied mode
(84) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)

1: Full-page mode
(85) Wake-up mode 0: Off (Don't wake up)

1: On (Do wake up)
(86) Drum serial number -
(87) Developer serial number -
6-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

(Message: Exit Mainte)
Contents
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method

The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Set Factory Default

(Message: Set Factory Def)
Contents
Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
2 Select [Mode1(All)].
Items Contents
Mode1(All) Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
4 Turn the power switch off.

An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U002.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0002 Setting information initialization failure
0003 Address book information initialization failure
0004 Job accounting information initialization failure
0005 Event log/Fax log/Job log information initialization failure
0006 Fax memory forward/panel program information initialization failure
0007 Short-cut key information initialization failure
0008 Fax reserve information initialization failure
0009 Account information initialization failure
0010 RP code backup execution failure
0011 Event log counter information/Accounting/Maintenance category initialization

failure
0012 Coverage counter information initialization failure
6-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Codes Contents
0013 Life counter information initialization failure
0014 Enginee information initialization failure
0015 Scanner information initialization failure
0016 Log audit (inspection log) initialization failure
0017 Device information initialization failure
• The operation is terminated abnormally and it is necessary to execute it once more after turning the power off.
U004 Machine Number
(Message: Machine No.)
Contents
Sets or displays the machine serial number.
Purpose
Checks the machine serial number
After the main/Enginee PWB replacement, execute if the "C0180 machine number mismatch" occurs.
Caution
Do not execute U004, select [Execute] and press [Start] key if the machine serial number in the Enginee PWB is
different from the main unit serial number. A different machine serial number is overwritten in the main PWB.
Method

When the machine serial number in the Enginee PWB matches the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number in the Enginee PWB does not match the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number in the Enginee PWB.
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1 Select [Execute].

The serial number writing starts.
Completion

6-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

(Message: Set Mainte ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security.
Method
2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Change Change the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Initialize Initializes the maintenance mode ID for the field.
Method: Check
1 Select [New ID].

Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Execute Change the maintenance mode ID for the field.
2 Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.

Either [*] or [#] must be included.
3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
4 Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5 Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID.
6 Select [Execute].

Method: Initialize
1 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.
2 Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.

Completion
6-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
U019 Firmware Version

(Message: Firm Version)
Contents
Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method

The firmware version is displayed.
2 Change the screen using the [Λ] [V] key.

Items Contents
Controller Main firmware
CMN App CMN App firmware
SST App SST App firmware
MNT App MNT App firmware
CPY App CPY App firmware
PRT App PRT App firmware
SND App SND App firmware
BOX App BOX App firmware
FAX App *1 FAX App firmware
WPG App WPG App firmware
AUTH App AUTH App firmware
PCS App PCS App firmware
SCO App SCO App firmware
PLP PLP firmware
EXSP EXSP firmware
Version Info Version Info firmware
MMI Operation firmware
Browser Browser firmware
Option Language1 Optional language1 firmware
6-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
Sub MMI Panel firmware
Sub MMI Boot Panel Boot
Fax APL *1 Fax APL firmware
Fax Boot *1 Fax Boot

*1
Fax IPL Fax IPL firmware
Enginee Enginee firmware
Enginee Boot Enginee boot
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DF *2 finisher firmware
DF Boot *2 finisher boot
AK *3 Attachment kit firmware
AK Boot *3
Attachment kit boot
PF Paper feeder firmware
PF Boot Paper Feeder boot
HyPAS EMB API HyPAS EMB API firmware
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
*1
: FAX iinstalled machine only/ *2: DP installed machine only/ *3: AK installed machine only
Completion
6-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U021 Initializes Memory

(Message: Init Memory)
Contents
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call error history and
mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area specification selected in the maintenance mode U252
(Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode U021.
Error codes
Items Contents
0002 Setting information initialization failure
0003 Address book information initialization failure
0004 Job accounting information initialization failure
0005 Event log/Fax log/Job log information initialization failure
0006 Fax memory forward/panel program information initialization failure
0007 Short-cut key information initialization failure
0008 Fax reserve information initialization failure
0009 Account information initialization failure
0010 RP code backup execution failure
0011 Event log counter information/Accounting/Maintenance category initialization

failure
0012 Coverage counter information initialization failure
0013 Life counter information initialization failure
0014 Enginee information initialization failure
0015 Scanner information initialization failure
0016 Log audit (inspection log) initialization failure
6-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
• The operation is terminated abnormally and it is necessary to execute it once more after turning the power off.
Completion

U025 Firmware update (S)

(Message: Firm Update(S))
Contents
Executes Firmware-Update from the USB memory while "Very High" is selected in the Security Level settings under the
System Menu.
Supplement
Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB memory is inserted
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware

This is not executable when a USB memory is not installed.
4 After normal completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off
and on.
Completion

6-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U030 Motor operation check

(Message: Chk Motor)
Contents
Drive each motor.
Purpose
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
2 Select the motor to operate.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Main Operate the main motor
Exit(CW) Operate the exit motor(CW)
Exit(CCW) Operate the exit motor(CCW)
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
DLP Operate the the developer motor
To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion

6-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U031 Check the conveying switch

(Message: Chk Switch)
Contents
Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
Execute to check the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
2 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
3 The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.

Items Contents
Regist Displays the switching status of the registration sensor
Fuser Displays the switching status of the exit sensor
Dup Displays the switching status of the DU sensor
Feed Displays the switching status of the paper feed sensor
Tray Full Displays the switching status of the exit full sensor
JobSepa Full Displays the switching status of the job separator full sensor
Bridge Displays the switching status of the bridge switch
Contain Displays the switching status of the container sensor
Completion

6-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U032 Clutch operation check

(Message: Chk Clutch)
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch's operation.
Method
2 Select the clutch to operate.

Items Contents
Feed1 Operates the paper feed clutch 1
Regist Operate the registration clutch
Dup Operate the duplex clutch
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Motor Operate the motor
The clutch operation is available while the motor is operated.
4 To stop the clutch operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion

6-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U033 Solenoid operation check

(Message: Chk Solenoid)
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid's operation.
Method
2 Select the solenoid to operate.

Select the motor before checking the motor rotation.
Items Contents
MPT Operate the MP solenoid
Eject Operate the exit solenoid
Motor Operate the motor
The solenoid operation is available while the motor is operated.
4 To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.

Completion

6-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U034 Paper timing data adjustment

(Message: Adj Paper Timing)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method
2 Select the item to adjust.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Full Adjust the leading edge timing
LSU Out Left Adjusts the center line
Adjustment: LSU Out Top Full
2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key .
Note
Press the [System Menu/Counter] key and the setting screen below is displayed for necessary settings.
(Source/Conveying speed/Duplex/Color/Copies)
3 Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Cass Adjust the leading edge timing for the cassette paper -70 to 70 0 1 dot
feed
MPT Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -70 to 70 0 1 dot
Dup Adjust the leading edge timing for the duplex print -70 to 70 0 1 dot
5 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value is
decreased.
6-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.5 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Important
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance
mode.
U034 > U066(P. 6-41) > U071(P. 6-46)
Adjustment: LSU Out Left
Note

setting variatio
n
MPT Adjust the center line for the MP tray -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
Cass1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
Dup Adjusting the center line when duplex copying (Back page) -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting value is decreased.
6-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Center line of printing

(within ± 0.5 mm)
Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2
Important
mode.
U034 < U067(P. 6-43) < U072(P. 6-48)
Completion

U035 Folio size setting

(Message: Adj Folio Sz)
Contents
Changes the printable area when copyng with Folio paper.
Purpose
Setting the actual size of Folio to use prevents the image dropout at the trailing edge or right/left edges.
Method
setting variatio
n
Length Sets the Folio paper length. 318 to 356 (mm) 330 1(mm)
Width Sets the Folio paper width. 200 to 220(mm) 210 1(mm)

Completion

6-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U037 Fan motor operation check

(Message: Chk Fan Motor)
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Purpose
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
2 Select the fan motor to operate.

Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Eject Operate the exit fan motor
Low Power Operate the power source fan motor
LSU Cooling Operate the LSU fan motor
Conveying Operate the Conveying fan motor
Temp/Hmd Operate the temperature/humidity fan motor
• To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion

6-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment

(Message: Adj Paper Loop)
Contents
Adjusts the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded in a Z-shape.
Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method

Items Contents
Full Paper loop amount adjustment at full speed
Half Paper loop amount adjustment at half speed
Adjustment: Full/Half
Note
3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range setting variation
MPT Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP tray -30 to 20 0 1mm
feed
Cass1 Paper loop amount adjustment for the cassette -30 to 20 0 1mm
1 feed
PF Paper loop amount adjustment for the PF feed -30 to 20 0 1mm
Dup Paper loop amount adjustment for the duplex -30 to 20 0 1mm
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases when the setting value is
decreased.
6-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion

6-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U053 Adjusting the motor speed

(Message: Adj Motor Speed)
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
Method

Items Contents
Full Adjusting the motor speed at full speed
Half Adjusting the motor speed at half speed
Setting: Full/Half

Main Sets the main motor -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Main(MPT) Sets the main motor (MP) -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Main(Dup) Sets the main motor (DU) -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Main(PF) Sets the main motor (PF) -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Fuser Sets the fuser motor -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Polygon Sets the polygon motor -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Exit Sets the exit motor -100 to 100 0 0.1%
DLP Sets the developer motor -100 to 100 0 0.1%
Note
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu/Counter] key as interruption copy mode
when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion

6-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U063 Shading position adjustment

(Message: Adj Shading)
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning the shading plate, namely
there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or scratch of the shading plate.
Setting
Position Changes the scanner shading position -3 to 18 (32 0 -
sheets) 0 -
-6 to 34 (25
sheets)
If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and toward the right side if the value
is reduced.
Note
(Source/Conveying speed/Duplex/Orientation/Color/Copies)
Completion

6-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

(Message: Adj Scn)
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusts the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the above incorrect
Important
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depending on the
content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P. 6-39)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P. 6-39)
Method
Note

Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scanning -75 to 75 0 0.02%
direction
Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub- -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction
Adjustment: Main Scan
• For the copy example 1, increase the value.
• For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
6-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Adjustment: Sub Scan
When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion

6-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

(Message: Table Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
Note

Front Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. -30 to 30 *2 0 0.158 (mm)
-57 to 57 *1 0 0.158 (mm)
*1: 25 ppm model *2: 32 ppm model
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value is
decreased.
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Important
mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U065(P. 6-39) > U066
Completion
6-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

(Message: Table Center)
Contents
Adjusts the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
Note

Front Adjusts the scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085 (mm)
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting value is decreased.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Important
mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U065(P. 6-39) > U067
Completion

6-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U068 DP scanning position adjustment

(Message: DP Scn Start Pos)
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used
Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method

Items Description Setting Initial Data
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -38 to 38 *2 0 0.158 (mm)
originals. -72 to 72 *1 0 0.158 (mm)
Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test copy 0 to 3 0 -
originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1 Select [DP Read].
When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value is
decreased.

Adjustment: Black Line
1 Select [Black Line].
4 Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu/Counter] key .
Note
5 Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line
appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion

6-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U070 DP magnification adjustment

(Message: Adj DP Motor)
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
Note
3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

Sub Scan (F) Adjusting the magnification for table scanning -125 to 125 0 0.02%
Sub Scan (B) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion

6-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

(Message: DP Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is
used
Method
Note
• Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -36 to 36 0 -
Front Tail Trailing edge registration. (Front page) -36 to 36 0 -
Back Head Leading edge registration. (Back page) -36 to 36 0 -
Back Tail Trailing edge registration. (Back page) -36 to 36 0 -
Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
6-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Important
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary. Check the copy image after the adjustment.
If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail
1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value. For the copy example 1, increase the
value. For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion

6-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U072 Adjusting the DP original center

(Message: DP Center)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image when the DP is used
Adjustment
Note
Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

Front DP center line. (Front page) -60 to 60 0 0.085 (mm)
Back DP center line. (Back page) -60 to 60 0 0.085 (mm)
6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value. For the copy example 1, decrease the
value. For the copy example 2, increase the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting value is decreased.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Important
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
Check the copy image after the adjustment.
If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U065(P. 6-39) > U067(P. 6-43) > U072
Completion
6-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U089 MIP-PG pattern output

(Message: Output MIP-PG)
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scanner section using the MIP-
PG pattern output without image scanning process.
Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and page count displayed on the
service status page.
Method
2 Select the MIP-PG pattern to output

Items Contents
Gray scale Gray scale pattern PG
Mono1 Gray check PG (density: 0)
Mono4 Gray check PG (density: 70)
6-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Items Contents
256Gradation PG for the grayscale level check (256 grayscale PG1)
Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty application
PG for the developer status and Enginee ID check, for drum quality check
(Gray scale, Mono4)
Caution
Note
(Copies)
4 Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.

Completion

6-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U099 Original size detection setting

(Message: Detect Org Sz)
Contents
Sets the original size detection check and detection threshold
Purpose
Changes the detection threshold if the original size is often mis-detected with entirely dark originals (high density) or
originals dark at edges only
Setting

Items Contents
Data1 Display of the original width of OriginalArea color
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display of the original copies width of OriginalArea color (when the document
processor is installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
1 Place an original copy on the table and close the document processor.
2 The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. The original size sensor detects
the original lengthwise. (Detected twice)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected number of pixels (mm) in the original width
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)
Setting: B/W Level1
6-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Original1 Sets the threshold to judge the original 0 to 255 50 -
Light Source Sets the threshold to judge the light source 0 to 255 49 -
Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can be detected but the original mat
may be detected as an original.
If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of placing the original.
Original mat Original

In the figure Original width size range
R/G/B
1 1 A4R to A3 8.5" to 11"
1 2 3 2 2 B6R to A4R 5.5" to 8.5"
297mm 3 3 to B6R to 5.5"

Completion

6-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U100 Main high voltage adjustment

(Message: Main HV Output)
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method

Items Description
Adj AC Bias Adjust the main charge AC bias
Set AC Auto Adj Sets the automatic AC bias adjustment
Set DC Bias Displays the main charge DC bias correction value
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq Sets the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current Displays the electric current flows
Setting: Adj AC Bias
1 Displays the current setting. (Enginee firmware displays the environmental correction result)
When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the setting value is decreased.
Set value is variable depending on the environment.

AC(K) Black main charge AC bias value 400 to 2300 950 1V

Setting: Set AC Auto Adj

Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
Initial setting: On

Setting: Set DC Bias
6-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Displays the current setting. (Enginee firmware displays the environmental correction result)
DC1(K) Black main charge DC bias value (Full speed) 225 to 675 450 1V
Setting: Adj DC Bias
When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the setting value is decreased.

DC2(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value -128 to 127 0 1V
(Full speed)

Setting: Set Charger Freq
When the setting value is increased, the image get thicker, and it gets thinner when the setting value is decreased.

Generally Setting the frequency of the main charger 500 to 3000 1800 1Hz
(Normal speed)

Setting: Chk Current
1 Displays the current setting.

Items Contents
K Black inflow current
Note
Completion

6-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment

(Message: 1st TC Output)
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
On Timing On timing setting -1000 to 1000 0 1ms
Off Timing Off timing setting -1000 to 1000 0 1ms
Bias(L) Bias (L) setting 300 to 2400 748 *2 0.1μA

586 *1 0.1μA
Bias(M) Bias (M) setting 300 to 2400 970 *2 0.1μA

759 *1 0.1μA
Bias(S) Bias (S) setting 300 to 2400 1410 *2 0.1μA

1104 *1 0.1μA
Bias Half(L) Half-speed bias setting (L) 300 to 2400 423 0.1μA
Bias Half(M) Half-speed bias setting (M) 300 to 2400 483 0.1μA
Bias Half(S) Half-speed bias setting (S) 300 to 2400 643 0.1μA
Note
Completion

6-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment

(Message: Adj Sepa Sbias)
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the separation shift bias.
Purpose
Execute when paper separation failure occurs. (Paper rolled up by the drum is held down)
Method
Mode Mode setting 1 to 8 1 -
Note
Completion

U110 Drum counter

(Message: Drum Cnt)
Contents
Displays the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method

The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displays the drum counter
Completion

6-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U111 Drum drive time

(Message: Drum Time)
Contents
Display the drum drive time that is used for the high-voltage time correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method

Displays the drum drive time.
Items Contents
K Displays the drum drive time.
Completion

U117 Drum unit number

(Message: Drum No.)
Contents
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method

Displays the drum number.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum number
Completion

6-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U118 Drum unit history

(Message: Drum History)
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method

Select the item to refer to.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum history
Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 The drum counter history
Completion

U120 Drum drive distance counter

(Message: Drum Drv Dist Cnt)
Contents
Displays the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Drum control counter that is used instead of the conventional drum drive counter.
Method

Displays the drum drive distance counter
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum drive distance counter
Completion

6-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Message: Clr Trans Cnt)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verify the transfer unit count after replacement. Also, clear the transfer counts after replacement.
Method

The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the transfer counts
Clear Clearing the transfer counts
Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].
2 Press the [Start] key to clear the transfer counter value.

Completion

6-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U136 Toner level detection setting

(Message: Set Toner Near End)
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval between toner near end and
toner empty is too short.
Setting
K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
Note
The setting change done during the toner low indication is not reflected.
Turn the main switch off and on to execute the setting change during the toner low indication.
Completion

6-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U139 Temperature, humidity

(Message: Temp/Humidity)
Contents
Displays the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Method
2 Select the item to check.

Displays the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Ext Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
Ext Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Int Temp Machine inside temperature (°C)
Completion

6-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(Message: Adj Dev Bias)
Contents
Displays/changes the developer bias set values.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias set values.
Method
Bias Bias setting 120 to 220 170 10
Duty Duty setting 40 to 70 59 *2 1

63 *1
Clock Clock setting 2600 to 3000 2700 50
Bias(Half) Bias setting (Half speed) 120 to 220 170 10
Duty(Half) Duty setting (Half speed) 40 to 70 65 1
Clock(Half) Clock setting (Half speed) 2600 to 3000 2700 50

Completion

6-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U147 Setting the toner applying mode

(Message: Set Toner Apply)
Contents
Mode selection for the operation to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode).
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount.
Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method

Items Contents
Mode0 Execute the toner applying operation
Mode1 Not to execute the toner applying operation
Initial setting: Mode1

Completion

U148 Drum refresh mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Refresh)
Contents
Sets the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting
Mode Sets Auto drum refresh 0: Off
1: Short 0 -
2: Standard
3: Long

Completion

6-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U150 Toner sensor operation check

(Message: Chk Toner Sensor)
Contents
Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor for toner.
Purpose
Execute to check each switch and sensor are operating correctly.
Method
2 Check the on/off status of the switch and sensor.

If "On" is detected, indication of corresponding switch and sensor is "1".
Items Contents
Container Set Toner container switch
Container Sensor Toner sensor
Waste Box Sensor Waste toner sensor
Motor Main motor drive
To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
Completion

U157 Developer drive time

(Message: Dev Time)
Contents
Displays the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method

Displays the developer drive time.
Items Contents
K Displays the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion

6-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U158 Developer counter

(Message: Dev Cnt)
Contents
Displays the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method

The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displays the black developer counter.
Completion

6-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U161 Fuser temperature adjustment

(Message: Adj Fuser Temp)
Contents
Sets the fuser temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl, creases and fusing failure
on thick paper.
Method

Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature setting except at printing
Grain Mode Setting the granular image control mode
Belt Mode Fuser belt tension mode setting
Setting: Warm Up
1st Feed(C) Print start temperature (center): T23 50 to 185 150 *2 1°C
140 *1 1°C
Print(C) Printing temperature (center): T25 100 to 210 165 *2 1°C

155 *1 1°C
Standby(C) Standby temperature (center): T26 120 to 185 150 *2 1°C

140 *1 1°C
1st Feed(D) Print start duty 0 to 100 20 1%
2nd Feed(D) Secondary feed start duty 0 to 100 40 *2 1%

35 *1 1%
6-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Grain Mode

Items Contents
Mode0 Present state
Mode1 Granular image reduction mode (Low) (Standby temperature: -10°C, Control
temperature: -5°C)
Mode2 Granular image reduction mode (High) (Standby temperature: -20°C, Control
temperature: -5°C)

Setting: Belt Mode

Items Contents
Mode0 No drive at Standby (Ready, Low Power) (Default)
Mode1 Full-speed drive for 500ms at every 10 minutes at Standby (Ready, Low Power)
Mode2 Full-speed drive for 500ms at every 3 minutes at Standby (Ready, Low Power)

Completion

6-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U167 Clearing the fuser count

(Message: Clr Fuser Cnt)
Contents
Display/set/clear the fuser count.
Purpose
Execute to check or change the counter value after replacing the fuser unit.
Method

The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the fuser count
Release Displays the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press Displays the fuser unit drive time (press)
Clear Clears the fuser count
Setting: Cnt / Release / Press

Method: Clear
1 Select [Clear].

Clears the fuser unit count
Completion

6-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U198 Fuser phase control setting

(Message: Set Phase Ctrl)
Contents
Switch to fixed phase control.
Purpose
Used to switch to fixed phase control.
Method
Mode Fuser phase control type setting 0 to 2 0 -

Completion

U199 Fuser temperature

(Message: Fuser Temp)
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method

Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Edge1 Displays the fuser heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Center Displays the fuser heat roller center temperature (°C)
Completion

6-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U201 Initializing the touch panel

(Message: Init Touch Panel)
Contents
Adjusts touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation panel is replaced or if the
detecting positions are not aligned.
When unable to press the software numeric keys due to the touch screen press position error and unable to enter the
maintenance mode, press and old [Home], [Stop] and [Reset] keys 3 seconds to start up U201.
Method
2 Select the item to execute.

The screen for executing is displayed.
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode Active U201
Initialize Touch Panel
Initialize
Check
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch panel display position
Check Checks the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
1 Press the center of indicated "+".
2 Repeat three times.
3 After finishing setting, the [Check] screen is automatically displayed.

Method: Check
6-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
1 Press the center of indicated three "+", and then check the display position.
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key to return to Step.1.
Completion

6-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U203 Check DP operation

(Message: Chk DP Ope)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3 Select the scan speed

Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scanning
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed
1 Select the item to operate.

Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD
CCD RADP With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD

The operation starts.
3 To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion

6-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U207 Operation key check

(Message: Chk Panel Key)
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1 Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2 [Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3 Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by one. When
pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the LED is lit.
Completion

6-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U222 Setting the IC card type

(Message: Set IC Card Type)
Contents
Sets the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting

Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
Initial setting: Other

Completion

6-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U230 Optional device serial number

(Message: Device Serial No)
Contents
Displays the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem occurrence.
Method

Displays the serial number.
Items Contents
PF1 Displays the paper feeder 1 serial number.
Completion

6-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U243 Checking the DP motor

(Message: Chk DP Motor)
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
2 Select the item to operate.

Items Contents
Feed Motor Drive the DP feed motor
Conv Motor Drive DP conveying motor.
Rev Motor Drive DP feed-shift motor.
Regist clutch Drive DP registration clutch.
3 Press the [Start] key. Each operation starts.

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion

6-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U244 DP switch check

(Message: Chk DP Switch)
Contents
Displays each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
2 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.

The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Feed Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
Set Check DP original sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Cover Open Check DP top cover switch.
Open Check the DP open/close switch
Completion

6-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U250 Maintenance counter preset

(Message: Mnt Cnt Pre-set)
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment
Setting
M.Cnt A Changes the maintenance counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 300000 -
M.Cnt HT Change the maintenance counter preset value (HT 0 to 9999999 0 -

adjustment)
Cass1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000 -

(Cassette 1)

(Cassette 2)

(Cassette 3)

Completion

6-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U251 Maintenance counter clear

(Message: Clr Mnt Cnt)
Contents
Displays, clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 0 -
M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999 0 -
Cass1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 1) 0 to 9999999 0 -
Clear Clears all the maintenance counts 0 0 -
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].
2 Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.

Completion

6-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Dest)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization
Method

Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
*2
Europe Metric Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
*1: 100 V model only, *2: Except 100 V model

Initial setting: Destination

Initializes according to the destination
6-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U253 Double/single count switch

(Message: Set D/S Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as one sheet (single
count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2 Select [B/W].
Items Contents
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
3 Select [SGL] or [DBL].

Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set single count for A3(420mm) size or smaller
DBL(B4) Set single count for Legal(356mm) size or smaller
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
Initial setting: SGL(All) (100V model), DBL(A3/Ledger) (120V/220-240V model)

*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035. However, the double count will
be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or longer.

Completion

6-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U260 Feed/eject counter switch

(Message: Set Count Mode)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2 Selects the copy count timing.

Items Contents
Feed When secondary feed starts.
Eject Selects the paper eject timing
Initial setting: Eject

Completion

6-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U265 Setting by destination

(Message: Set Model Dest)
Contents
Sets the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
Items Contents
No. Displays the OEM code
Completion

6-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U278 Delivery date setting

(Message: Set Delivery Date)
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method
2 Select [Today].

Sets the delivery date of the machine.
Clearing
1 Select [Clear].

Clears the delivery date of the machine.
Completion

6-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Svc Sts Page)
Contents
Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting

Items Contents
On Displays the digital dot coverage.
Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.
Initial setting: On
3 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Completion

6-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U287 Automatic recovery function

(Message: Set Reset Func)
Contents
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
Purpose
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error or system error
Setting
3 By using the[<] [>] keys change the setting value.

Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
C0XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after On/Off Off
the service call error
the C1xxx code service call error
CFXXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after On/Off On
the CF code service call error

Completion

6-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U290 Application storage drive setting

(Message: Set Drive App)
Contents
Set the HyPAS application storage rive.
Purpose
Set to save in the SD card or optional SSD.
Setting

Items Contents
SD Card Set to the SD card.
SSD Set to the SSD card.
Completion

6-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U326 Black line cleaning display setting

(Message: Set Clean Bk Line)
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the contact glass when scanning
from the document processor.
Method

Items Contents
Black Line Mode Sets On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication
Settin: Black Line Mode

Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated
Initial setting: On

Completion

6-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

(Message: Adj Calc Rate)
Contents
Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation
to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for 0.1 to 3.0 1.0 -
custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. -

Completion

6-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U341 Printer cassette setting

(Message: Set Prn Cass)
Contents
Sets the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it cannot be used for copy.
Setting

Multiple cassettes are selectable.
Items Contents
Cass1 Setting cassette 1 to the printer paper source
Cass2 Setting cassette 2 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Cass3 Setting cassette 3 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Initial setting: Off (Cassette1 to 3)

Completion

6-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U343 Duplex priority mode setting

(Message: Set Dup Pri Mode)
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Set the frequently used settings depending on the user’s usage.
Setting

Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled
Initial setting: Off

Completion

6-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting

(Message: Set Mnt Time Disp)
Contents
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by setting the number of prints
that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Displays the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value before the maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting
Cnt Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 9999 0 -
(Remaining number of prints that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle reaches)

Completion

6-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

(Message: Slct Sleep Mode)
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method

Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save 1: BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save 0: BAM conformity setting Off

Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
Initial setting: More Energy Save (0)
Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On Enable auto sleep function.
Off Disable auto sleep function.
Initial setting: On
If it is set to Off, sleep shift operation will not be performed even if sleep mode is set in the system menu.
Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off

Completion

6-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U402 Print margin adjustment

(Message: Print Margin)
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second page.
Adjustment
Note

Lead Adjusts the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 (mm)
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 (mm)
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 (mm)
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 (mm)
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge margin(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
A
Left margin Right margin
(4.0 mm or less) (4.0 mm or less)
Trailing edge margin(4.0 mm or less)
Important
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U402
Completion
6-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table)

(Message: Scan Margin Tbl)
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment
Note

A Margin Adjusts the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5(mm)
B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5(mm)
C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5(mm)
D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5(mm)
A
Important
mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U402(P. 6-94) > U403
Completion
6-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP)

(Message: Scan Margin DP)
Contents
Adjusts the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment
Note

A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5(mm)
B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5(mm)
C Margin Sets the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5(mm)
D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5(mm)
A
Important
mode.
U034(P. 6-31) > U402(P. 6-94) > U403(P. 6-96) > U404
Completion
6-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Reversal)

(Message: WR DR Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the writing timing in rotated 180 degrees.
Purpose
Adjusted when the page image of copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner reading image (image on the
memory)
Important
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P. 6-31)> U402(P. 6-94)> U066(P. 6-41)> U403(P. 6-96)> U071(P. 6-46)> U404(P. 6-98)> U407
Adjustment
Note
5 Select [Adj Data].

Adj Data Adjusts the leading edge timing when writing the -47 to 47 0 1dot
image in the memory
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Completion
6-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

(Message: Adj Half Tone)
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment

Displays the execution information screen.
A test pattern is output on A4 paper.
2 Set the output test pattern as original, in the back side which the direction of the arrow is, looking down the
side which is printing to the original glass.
Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.

The auto adjustment is executed.
6-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 An error code appears when an error occurs.

Error codes
Codes Occurrence Contents Re-
position adjustme
nt
S001 Scanner Original type error Enable
S002 Original reference patch is not detected Enable
S003 Original deviation is in excess in the main scanning Enable

direction
S004 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scanning Enable

direction
S005 Original skew is in excess Enable
S006 Other scanner error Enable
E001 Enginee Enginee status error Disable
E002 Enginee sensor error Disable
E003 The Enginee is driving. Enable
C101 Controller Pause status Disable
C102 Adjustment result error Disable
C1FF Other controller error Disable
C200 Table adjustment value error Disable
C300 Simple increment adjustment value error Disable
Completion

6-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U411 Scanner auto adjustment

(Message: Auto Adj Scn)
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/sub scanning
direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color correction matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF correction, Input gamma,
automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Items Use Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Table (Chart A) In case of losing Execute automatic adjusts the table 7505000005
adjustment data, scanning.
differing from the
color tone extremely
LED light intensity
(not improve in case
of executing U410) Scan timing
When replacing White reference correction factor
ISU(CCD unit), Chromatic aberration correction filter in
Optical LED lamp the main scanning direction *3 COL OR SCANN ER
and Enginee
CHART A4
No.302K 357010
Input gamma correction coefficient

EEPROM.
Color correction matrix factor
Use when setting up
DP or executing
U021 initialization
DP FU(ChartA) Use when setting up Execute the 1st side automatic

DP or executing adjustment in the DP scanning section.
U021 initialization
White reference correction factor
DP FU(ChartB) Execute the 1st side automatic 302AC68243

adjustment in the DP scanning section.
Magnification in the sub-scanning

direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 7505000005
Debug *1 Adjusting the document processor Without Chart B, executed in a

scanning section with the chart output simplified manner.
by the local machine
Magnification in the sub-scanning

direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
6-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
*1: Only when USB is installed

Method: Table (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
Usually, it adjusts here.
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
2 Enter maintenance item U411.
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [Table(ChartA)].
7 Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
8 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the barcode is not
read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value
1 Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [Table(ChartA)].
8 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.

If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjusting it with ChartA. First,
use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
6-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Select [Target].
4 Select [Auto].
6 Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
7 Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.

When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode is not
read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value
1 Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2 Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
4 Select [Target].
5 Select [U425].
7 Select [DP FU(ChartA)].

Method: DP FU (Chart B)
Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
6-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3 Select [DP FU(ChartB)].

If an error occurs during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case, check the error
and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action
00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error Set the original correctly and execute the adjustment
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the sub- again.
scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading edge in

the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in the

main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end in the

07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing edge in

the sub-scanning direction)
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in the main Check the attachment position of DP.
scanning direction) Check lighting of the lamp or replace it.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in the Check the back and front of the adjustment original.
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading edge in the

sub-scanning direction)
0b Black band is not detected

(Original check of DP leading edge in the sub-
scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing edge in the

0d White band is not detected (DP trailing edge in the

0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on, and execute
again.
0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning direction Turn the power switch off then on, and execute
again.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning direction
Adjust manually.
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning direction (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direction
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on, and execute
again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning direction Turn the power off and on, and execute again.
Adjust manually.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direction
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
16 Magnification error in the main scanning direction
6-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]

17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and execute again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and execute again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error Clean the contact glass and slit glass.

Exchange the adjustment original.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and execute again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction

coefficient error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and execute again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original error
6-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]

40 Black dot detection error at the linearity correction Set the original correctly and execute again.
41 (Point A)
Check if the lamp lights. If the lamp does not
42 Black dot detection error at the linearity correction
light, it is a defect.
(Point B)
43
Black dot detection error at the linearity correction
44
(Point C)
45
46 (Point D)
48 (Point E)
4a (Point F)
4b Black dot detection error at the linearity correction

(Point G)
4c
4d (Point H)
4e Black dot detection error at the linearity correction
4f (Point I)
(Point J)
(Point K)
(Point L)
(Point M)
(Point N)
(Point O)
(Point P)
50 White reference plate correction ratio error. Set the original correctly and execute again.
If not cleared, it is the failure with an input data
error.
99 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
Completion

6-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U425 Target adjustment

(Message: Set Target)
Contents
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Method

Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA

Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
2 By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of
the adjustment original.
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -
6-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Black
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -

Setting: Gray1
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -

Setting: Gray2

Setting: Gray3
6-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]


Setting: C

Setting: M

Setting: Y

Setting: R
6-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: G

Setting: B

Setting: Adjust Original
This setting is usually unnecessary.

Lead Set the adjustment value of the leading edge. 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the left edge. 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing edge. 189.0 to 191.0 190.0 0.1mm
1 Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt 3 of
6-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Measurement procedure
• Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B: 105mm
from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge
of black belt 1.
• Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2 Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
4 Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original.
• Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of black
belt 2.
5 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
7 Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on the
adjustment original at two positions.
• Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the leading
edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and deduct A. E:
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at
180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
• Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8 Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COL OR SCANN ER
CHART A4
No.302K 357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
6-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: DP(ChartB)

Lead Set the adjustment value of the leading edge. 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the left edge. 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing edge. 388.0 to 392.0 390.0 0.1mm
1 Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
2 Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
3 Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
5 Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the
adjustment original.
6 Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.

Original for adjustment
B ChartB (P/N:302AC68243)
A
Completion

6-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate

(Message: Adj JPEG Rate)
Contents
Sets the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce the image roughness by
changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged copy . If the set value is reduced, compression is
high and image quality is lowered. If the set value is increased, image quality is improved but processing speed is slower.
Method

Items Contents
Copy Compression rate of the copy
Send Compression rate of the Send
System Compression rate of the temporary saving in the system
Method: Copy

Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
Setting: Photo
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 4 to 10 10 1%
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 4 to 10 10 1%

Setting: Text
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 4 to 10 10 1%
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 4 to 10 10 1%
6-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Method: Send

Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Sets the compression rate for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression priority).
Setting: Photo
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30 1%
CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 30 1%

Setting: Text
6-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]


Setting: HC-PDF(BG)

Setting: HC-PDF(Char)

Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)
6-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: System
Y Compression rate of the brightness 4 to 10 10 1%
CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 4 to 10 10 1%
Note
Completion

6-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U520 TDRS setting

(Message: Set TDRS)
Contents
Checks/sets the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
2 Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].

Items Contents
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS
Completion

6-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U600 Initialize: All Data

(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the
destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file system is
checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method

The screen for entering the country code and OEM code is displayed.
2 Select [Country Code].
Refer to the following country code list.
No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Country code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
Execute Executing data initialization
4 Select [Execute].

Data initialization starts.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6 The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.

The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.
Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
Country code list

code code
6-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Completion

6-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U601 Initialize: Keep data

(Message: Init Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method

The screen for entering the country code and OEM code is displayed.
2 Select [Country Code].
Refer to the country code list. (See page 6-121)
No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Country code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
Execute Executing data initialization
4 Select [Execute].

Data initialization starts. Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6 The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization. The firmware version of 3 types of application,
boot and IPL is displayed.
Completion

6-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U603 User data 1

(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Sets the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2 Select [Line Type].

Items Contents
Line Type Line Type

Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS

[Completed] is displayed.
Completion

6-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U604 User Data 2

(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method
2 Select [Rings(F/T)].
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 - -
If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.

Completion

6-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clr Data)
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2 Select [Clear Com.Rec.].

Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

Completion

6-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U610 System setting 1

(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
Method

Items Contents
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the
auto reduction mode.
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.
Setting: Cut Line: A4

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data
is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is
further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variatio
n
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.

Setting: Cut Line(100%)
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when
recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting, they are recorded on the
next page.
n
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 0 to 22 3 -
100% magnification.
Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease the value if there is
dropout in received image.
6-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data
is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is
further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
n
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction 0 to 22 0 -
mode.
Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge margin.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.

Completion

6-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method

Items Contents
ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is
set.
Setting: ADJ LINES

n
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 0 to 22 7 -

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)

n
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 0 to 22 22 -
paper is set.

6-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
n
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter 0 to 22 26 -
size paper is set.

Completion

6-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method

Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direction or at 100%
magnification.

Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the FAX
paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.
Initial setting: On

Setting: Protocol List

Sets the automatic protocol list printing.

Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion

6-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U615 System Setting 6

Contents
Sets the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification machine
Method

Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Setting: RX WIDTH FOR 11"

Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
Initial setting: LEDGER

Completion

6-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U620 FAX system

(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
2 Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.

Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode

Items Contents
One Sets the one-shot type detection
Cont Sets the continuous type detection
Initial setting: One

Completion

6-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U625 Communication Setting

(Message: Set Comm)
Contents
Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete transmission.
Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method

Items Contents
Interval Sets the auto redialing interval
Times Sets the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval
n
Sets the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 -
minutes

Setting: Times
n
Sets the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

Completion

6-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U630 Communication control procedures 1

(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method

Items Contents
TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Sets the reception speed.
TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Sets the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for
transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the communication speed.

Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 Set to V.17 14400bps.
4800bps/V27ter Set to V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter Set to V.27ter 2400bps
Initial setting: 14400bps/V17

6-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Setting: RX Speed
Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has the V.34
capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1 Select the reception speed.

Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
Initial setting: 14400bps

Setting: TX Echo
Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo at the
transmitter side.

Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Initial setting: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo
at the receiver side.

Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Initial setting: 75

Completion

6-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(Message: Comm Cnt 2)
Contents
Purpose
Sets the transmission and reception of ECM
Sets the CED frequency
Method

Items Contents
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.
ECM RX Sets ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.

Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.

Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Setting: CED Freq

Sets the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement measures for the international
communication.
6-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz
Initial setting: 2100

Completion

6-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method

Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Sets whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.

Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Sets the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.

Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.
2Time Detects CNG twice.
Initial setting: 1Time (100V model)/2Time (Others)

Completion

6-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method

Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception.

Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Initial setting: On

Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.

Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
Initial setting: On

Setting: DIS 2Res

Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the corrective measures
for transmission errors and other problems.
6-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
Initial setting: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Sets the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors occur frequently
due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.

Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
Initial setting: 15%

Completion

6-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Contents
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as one of measures
to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2 Select [TCF Check].
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
TCF Check Sets the allowed error bytes when detecting the 1 to 255 0
TCF signal

Completion

6-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U640 Communication time setting 1

(Message: Comm Time 1)
Contents
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Time(One) Sets the one-shot detection time for remote 0 to 255 7
switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Sets the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80

remote switching.

Completion

6-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U641 Communication time setting 2

(Message: Comm Time 2)
Contents
Sets the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method

Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Sets the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Sets the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Sets the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Sets the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Sets to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the destination unit
sets the auto switching function.
Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Sets the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 56
58 (100V model)

Setting: Td Time Out

Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
range setting
Sets the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 36
38 (100V model)
6-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: T2 Time Out

The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
range setting
Sets the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/telephone
automatic switching mode. If either receiving a FAX signal within this time or passing this time, the mode automatically
switches to the FAX reception mode. Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching.
range setting
Sets the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 s 30

Start of fax reception
as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring back tone

Ring detection
send start
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Setting: Tb1 Time Out
Sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/telephone automatic
switching mode. Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.
range setting
Sets the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20
6-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/telephone
automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/
telephone switching.
range setting
Sets the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after a connected handset
receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, operated as a normal phone after this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
range setting
Sets the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 s 60

Setting: Td Time Out

Sets the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure not
to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone.
range setting
Sets the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6
30 (100V model)
9 (120V model)

Completion

6-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method

Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level.
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr
1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr
1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

Setting: RX Mdm Level
1 Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].

Initial setting: -43dBm

Completion

6-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Sets the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Sgl LVL Modem Sets the modem output level -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV (Cent) DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
-9 (100V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6 (120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Sets the DTMF output level (level 0 to 5.5 2
difference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

Completion

6-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U660 Ring setting

(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Sets the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Sets the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.

Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
Initial setting: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public
switched telephone network.

Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.
Initial setting: On
6-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Busy Tone

Sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected and the
line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this problem may be improved.
However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.

Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
Initial setting: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.

Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
Initial setting: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing.

Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.
Off Detects the loop current before dialing.
Initial setting: On

Completion

6-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U670 List output

(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is pressed to halt
printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4 Output selected list.

Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential boxes,
firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance mode
(self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion

6-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U695 FAX function customization

(Message: Custom FAX Func)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Setting: FAX Bulk TX
1 By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
Initial setting: On

Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg
1 By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4

Completion

6-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U699 Software switch: Set

(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method
2 Select [SW No.].
3 Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4 Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.

Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion

6-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. bit Contents
36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or more
Communication time setting

No. bit Contents
53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
6-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Modem setting
No. bit Contents
89 76543 RX gain adjust
NCU setting
No. bit Contents
121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
Calling time setting

No. bit Contents
133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected
147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC
circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
6-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U901 Clearing the counters by paper source

(Message: Clr Paper FD Cnt)
Contents
Displays and clears the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Displays the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Displays/clears the MP tray feed counter
Cass1 Displays/clears Cassette 1 count
Cass2 Displays Cassette 2 count
Cass3 Displays Cassette 3 count
Duplex Displays/clears the duplex unit count
2 Select the counter to clear.

Unable to clear [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3]

Completion

6-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U903 Clearing the jam counter

(Message: Clr Paper JAM Cnt)
Contents
Displays/clears the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2 Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.

Method: Total Cnt
1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
2 Change the screen using the [Λ] [V] key.

Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.
Completion

6-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U904 Clearing the service call error counter

(Message: Clr Svc Call Cnt)
Contents
Displays/clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

Items Contents
Cnt Displays/clears the service call counter.
Total Cnt Displays accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2 Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.

Method: Total Cnt
1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.
Completion

6-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U905 Optional counter

(Message: Option Cnt)
Contents
Displays the counter values of the document processor and finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor and finisher.
Method
2 Select the device to check.

Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP Displays the document processor count.
DF *1 Displays the document finisher count.
*1: DF installed machine

Method: DP
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
Method: DF
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter The document finisher counter is displayed.
Staple Displays the staple counter.
Completion

6-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U908 Total counter

(Message: Total Cnt)
Contents
Displays the total counter.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the main unit.
Method

Counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Total Cnt Displays the total count
Completion

U910 Black rate data

(Message: Clr Coverage Dat)
Contents
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on the service status
page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.
3 Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.

Completion

6-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U911 Counter by media type

(Message: Paper SZ Cnt)
Contents
Display the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts.
Purpose
Displays the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method

Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Displays A3 feed counts
*1
B4 Displays B4 feed counts
B5 *1 Displays B5 feed counts
Folio *1 Displays Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Displays Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Displays Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Displays Letter feed counts
Statement *2
Displays Statement feed counts
ETC Displays Other paper feed counts.
*1: *1: metric specification, *2: inch specification

Completion

6-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U917 Read/Write Backup Data

(Message: R/W Bkup Data)
Contents
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Method
1 Turn the power switch off.
3 Turn the power switch on.

Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
5 Select [Export] or [Import].

Items Contents
Import Imports data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
6-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
6 Select the object item.

Items Contents Depending data*
Address Book Address book information -
Job Account Job accounting -

information
One Touch One-touch key Address book information

information
User User management Job accounting information

information
Document Box Document box Job accounting, User information

information
Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Fax Forward FAX forward information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
System System setting -

information
Network Network setting -

information
Job Setting Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting information -
Fax Setting FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User

management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX
setting
Panel Setting Panel setting information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX setting
and Program
Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or written.
7 Press the [Start] key. Starts reading or writing.

The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
9 When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 seconds
between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e0001 Internal processing error
e0002 File access error (Inability to access the USB memory, etc.)
e0003 The file necessary for Import does not exist.
e0004 The file incompatible with Import is directed.
e0005 The file is broken (Unzipping the file to import failed).
e0100 to eFFFF Data processing error when executing Import/Export.
Completion
6-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U920 Billing counter

(Message: Chg Cnt)
Contents
Displays the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
2 Select the item to display.

The charge counts are displayed.
Items Contents
B/W Copy B/W copy count is displayed.
B/W Prn B/W print count is displayed
B/W FAX FAX count
Simplex Simplex print count is displayed
Duplex Duplex print count is displayed
Comb(Off) Combine print counts (Off) is displayed
Comb(2in1) Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed
Comb(4in1) Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed
Completion

6-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters

(Message: Clr Chg/Life Cnt)
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion

6-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Life Cnt)
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method

The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the machine life count
Completion

U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

(Message: Clear Charger Roller Counter)
Contents
Displays and clears the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacementt
Method

The main charge roller counter for each color is displayed.
Items Contents
K The main charger roller counts are displayed.
Method: Clear
2 Select [Clear].

Completion

6-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U935 Relay PWB Maintenance

(Message: Mnt Relay Board)
Contents
Set the mode when a failure occurs.
Purpose
Set when the relay board is faulty.
Method
Mode Malfunction setting mode 0 (Disabled) 0
1 (Enabled)

Completion

6-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U942 DP loop amount setting

(Message: Adj DP Loop Amt)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method
Front Single-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.176mm
Back Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.176mm
When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases when the setting value is
decreased.
Increase the set value if no feed jam or skew feed occurs and reduce the set value if creases appear on the original.
Note
Completion

6-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U964
Contents
Transfer the log files save in the nonvolatile memory to a USB memory.
Transfer the log and screenshot at the log retrieval.
Purpose
Transfer the log file saved in the nonvolatile memory to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
3 Turn the power switch on.
5 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

Starts transferring the log files saved in the nonvolatile memory to a USB memory.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7 [Completed] appears after normal completion.
An error code appears when there is an error.
6-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error codes
Codes Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error SSD to USB memory copy failure
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion

6-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture)
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory to check it.
Method
2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.

When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed.
Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data processing
or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurs
Completion

6-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U984 Developer unit number

(Message:Dev No.)
Contents
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method

Displays the developer unit number.
Items Contents
K Displays the Black developer unit number.
Completion

6-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U985 Developer unit history

(Message: Dev History)
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Displays the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
2 Select [K].
Items Contents
K Displays the Black developer unit history.
Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion

6-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U991 Scanner counter

(Message: Scn Cnt)
Contents
Displays the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method

Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Displays times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Displays times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Displays times of other scan operations.
Completion

6-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Maintenance mode > Service mode
6 - 2 Service mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1)Service mode execution method
[Message Display]
Ready to copy
1. Press the [System Menu/Counter] Key.
System Menu:
.
.
.
.
. 3. Select [Service Setting] using
. WKH>ȁ@>9@NH\V
Adjustment/Maintenance Adjustment/Maintenance:
.
. 4. Select the item to be set.
2. Select [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Service Setting Service Setting:
XVLQJWKH>ȁ@>9@NH\V
Enable Repaired Unit
Developer
FAX Country Code *1
FAX Call Settings *1
SSD Format *2
SD card Format *3
Memory Diagnostics
*1: 'LVSOD\VRQO\ZKHQWKH)$;NLWLVLQVWDOOHG
*2: Displays only when the SSD is installed
*3: Displays only when the SD card is installed
(2)Service mode table

Items Contents Page
Clearing the partial operation Retrieve the control of the defect unit. P. 6-177
Developer unit Set Toner Install mode when replacing the developer unit. P. 6-178
FAX country code Initializes all data and image memory. P. 6-179
FAX calling setting Set up for connection P. 6-180
Altitude Adjustment Sets the altitude adjustment mode P. 6-181
Formatting the SSD Format the SSD P. 6-181
Formatting the SD card Format the SD card P. 6-182
Memory diagnostics Memory diagnostics is executed at start-up to check if read/write is P. 6-183

executed properly.
6-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Resetting the partial operation

Contents
When replacing the defect unit, the system control turns to normal and use of the unit is enabled.
Appears on the menu only at the partial operation status.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the defect unit.
Method
1 Enter [Service Settings] menu.
2 Press [Λ] or [V] key and select [Clear partial operation].
3 Press [Execute] key.

Completion
Power is restarted after execution.
6-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Developer unit
Contents
Set Toner Install mode when replacing the developer unit.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the developer unit.
Method
2 Press [Λ] or [V] key and select [Developer unit].

Completion
1 After execution, power is automatically restarted and Toner Install operation is executed.
6-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
FAX country code

Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to the
destination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
2 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [FAX country code]
4 Enter the country code using the numeric keys.

Data initialization starts.
Country code list

code code
Completion
6-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
FAX calling setting

Contents
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2 Press [Λ] [V] key and select [FAX calling setting].

Items Contents
PBX selection Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
PBX setting Setting the PBX connection
PSTN connection number PSTN access code setting

setting
Setting: PBX selection
1 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [ PBX selection]
3 Press [Λ] [V] key and select [PBX] or [PSTN].

Setting: PBX Setting
1 Press [Λ] [V] key and select [PBX settings].
3 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [Loop] or [Flash].

Setting: Access code Setting
1 Press [Λ] or [V] key and select [PSTN connection number setting].
3 Press [Λ] or [V] key and input the access code. (0 to 9, 00 to 99 )

Completion
6-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Formatting the SSD

Contents
Initialize the SSD.
Purpose
Initialize the SSD when replacing the SSD in the field.
Important
The following settings are initialized if the SSD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document Box,
etc.),Shortcut key, Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software, color table.
Method
2 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [Format SSD]
3 Press the [Yes] key to execute the initialization.
Completion
6-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Formatting the SD card

Contents
Initialize the SD card.
Purpose
Executed when starting use of the SD card or when necessary.
Method
2 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [Format SD Card]
3 Press the [Yes] key to execute the initialization.

Completion
6-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Memory diagnostics
Contents
Memory diagnostics is executed at start-up to check if read/write is executed properly.
Purpose
A memory device defect is considered as one of factors of the case where the F-code error, lock-up or abnormal image
occurs and is not cleared.
Check the memory failure
Method
2 By pressing [Λ] [V] key, select [Memory diagnostics]
Completion
6-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems
7 Troubleshooting
7 - 1 Image formation problems
(1)Isolate the place of image failure
How to isolate the cause
Print MIP-PG pattern at U089 to check an image failure.
Yes: Engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.

Yes: Scanner factor
1 Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page 7-2 or 7-12).
(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass→CCD]*2 or [CIS]*1 failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Scan by the main unit [CCD]*2 or [CIS]*1)
b. On the contact glass (Scan by the main unit [CCD]*2 or [CIS]*1)
2 Refer to image failure with Engine factor (See page 7-21 or 7-28).
(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Tansfer image formation process failure)
*1:CIS model, *2:CCD model
Image data flow

When copying:
(CCD model) LED lamp CCD

APC PWB
Main PWB
(LSU)
(CIS model) CIS
When sending:
(CCD model) LED lamp CCD

Main PWB PC
(CIS model) CIS
Data printing from PC:

APC PWB
Printer driver Main PWB
(LSU)
7-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)
No. Contents Image sample

(2-1) Abnormal image
(2-3) Black dots
(2-4) Blurred characters
(2-5) Mismatch between the center of the original and

the center of the copy image (Front side)

the center of the copy image (Back side)
(2-7) Horizontal black streaks
(2-8) Vertical streaks, band (black or color)
7-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-9) Regular difference of the leading edge on the
original image and copy image (Front side)

original image and copy image (Back side)
(2-11) Vertical streaks, band (white)
(2-12) Moiré
(2-13) Missing entire image (White / Black)
(2-14) Image is dark partly or light
(2-15) Blurred image
(2-16) Image is missing partly
7-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-17) Skewed image
(2-18) Entire image is light
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

(2-1)Abnormal image
(When scanning from the DP)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not connected properly. Clean the FFC terminals of the following FFC
Or it is faulty. and reconnect them. If the FFC terminal is
deformed or broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD model: CCD PWB - Main PWB
• CIS model: CIS PWB - Main PWB
2 (CCD model) Replacing the The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit.
lens unit
3 (CIS model) Replacing the The CIS PWB is faulty Replace the lamp unit.
lamp unit
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
(2-2)Colored background.

1 Changing the setting The density adjustment is not Set [Background Density] to [Auto] at
set [System Menu/Counter] > [Common
Settings] > [Function Defaults]
2 Reloading the original The original is raised at Correct the wavy original and set it
scanning.
3 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
4 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. When the same phenomenon occurs at the
table scanning too, execute U411
[Table(chartA)].
5 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
7-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Reattaching the lamp unit The lamp unit is not attached Reattach the lamp unit.
properly.
8 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty or not Clean the DP slit glass or reattach it.
properly attached.
lens unit
10 Replacing the lamp unit The LED drive PWB (CCD Replace the lamp unit.
model) or CIS PWB (CIS
model) is faulty.
(2-3)Black dots

1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Check the black dots on the original and
replace it if necessary.
2 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass.
lens unit
lamp unit
(2-4)Blurred characters

1 Checking the original The originals out of Ask a user to use the specified paper.
specification are used. (They
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and the
roller and the bushings bushing is dirty. bushing.
4 Reattaching the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulley and the
pulley and the pressure spring does not rotate smoothly. pressure spring.
5 Reattaching the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Reattaching the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up guide.
up guide does not operate properly.
7 Replacing the DP scanning The DP scanning guide is Replace the DP scanning guide.
guide deformed.
8 Reinstalling the document The document processor is Reinstall the document processor.
processor not properly installed in the
main unit.
7-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Checking the DP hinge The DP hinge is faulty. Open and close the document processor.
Then, check if there is no space between the
document processor and the main unit at the
machine front and rear sides when closing
the document processor. If there are any
space, replace the DP hinge.
(2-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Front
side)
(When scanning the front side through DP)

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust U072 [Front].
the front page of the originals
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].
when DP scanning is not
executed.
(2-6)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image (Back
side)
(When scanning the back side through DP)

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust U072 [Back].
the back page of the originals
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
(2-7)Horizontal black streaks


1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
lens unit
lamp unit
7-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-8)Vertical streaks, band (black or color)


1 Cleaning the DP slit glass and The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and the DP
the DP original conveying conveying guide.
guide
the contact glass.
3 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the optical mirror
4 Removing dust The dust is adhered on the Remove dust inside the laser path of the
lamp unit. lamp unit.
5 (CCD model) Cleaning the Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
CCD PWB
6 Executing U063 The image scanning position Execute U063 to change the scanner
is incorrect. shading position.
8 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust U068 [DP Read].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
9 Executing U072 The center line settings are Adjust U072 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)
10 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].
when DP scanning is not
executed.
lens unit
lamp unit
(2-9)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Front side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust [Front Head] at U071.
original leading edge at the
document processor is not
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart B)].
is incorrect.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and the
roller and the bushings bushing is dirty. bushing.
4 Replacing the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying roller.
roller worn down.
7-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Applying the grease The DP drive motor rotates Apply the grease to the drive gear of the DP
irregularly and the excessive drive motor. (EM-50LP: Part number
load is applied to the DP drive (7BG010009H))
gear.
6 Replacing the DP drive motor The DP drive motor rotates Reattach the DP drive motor and reconnect
irregularly due to the fault. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
(2-10)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original image and copy image (Back
side)

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust [Back Head] at U071.
leading edge on the back page
of the originals at the
document processor is not
properly set.
(2-11)Vertical streaks, band (white)


the contact glass.
lens unit
lamp unit
(2-12)Moiré

1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] at [System Menu/
not set properly. (moiré Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function
changes depending on the Defaults]
image quality.)
7-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Rotate the originals in 180 degrees and
(moiré appears in the original reload them.
scanning direction.)
(2-13)Missing entire image (White / Black)


1 Reloading the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
is incorrect.
5 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive belt comes Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt off.
lens unit
lamp unit
(2-14)Image is dark partly or light


2 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
3 Reattaching the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is bent. Reattach the DP slit glass.
4 Reattaching the DP scanning DP scanning guide is not Reattach the DP scanning guide.
guide installed properly.
model) is faulty.
7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-15)Blurred image

1 Replacing the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Removing condensation (DP The DP slit glass has Remove the condensation on the DP slit
slit glass) condensation. glass.
3 Checking the mirror The mirror has condensation. Remove condensation from the optical mirror
4 Removing condensation The lens unit (CCD model) or Remove condensation from the lens unit
lamp unit (CIS model) is (CCD model) or lamp unit (CIS model)
condensed
5 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartA)].
scanner is incorrect.
lens unit
lamp unit
(2-16)Image is missing partly


1 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
2 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
3 Changing the setting The copy position is rotated Set [Auto Image Rotation] to [Off] from the
automatically. System Menu.
5 Reattaching the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is not Reattach the DP slit glass.
properly attached.
lens unit
lamp unit
7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-17)Skewed image

1 Checking the original The original is bent, curled or Stretch the bend or the paper creases of the
creased. original.
2 Resetting the original width The original skews. Relocate the original width guides.
guides
3 Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty Clean the DP feed roller.
4 Replacing the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is worn Replace the DP feed roller.
down
5 Cleaning the DP registration The DP registration roller is Clean the DP registration roller.
roller dirty.
6 Reattaching the DP The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration pulley.
registration pulley registration pulley is faulty.
7 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop amount at U942.
before registration is improper.
(2-18)Entire image is light


is incorrect.
2 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the
adjusted. (The original type originals.
and image quality differs.)
3 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
"On".) [EcoPrint]
4 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark.
adjusted. (The density setting
is too light.)
5 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Background Density
adjusted. ([Background Adjustment to make dark.
density] is set to "Off".)
6 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
[On] [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
[Prevent Bleed-thru]
the contact glass.
8 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartA)].
adjusted.
lens unit
lamp unit
7-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(3-2) Colored background
(3-3) Black dots

the center of the output image
(3-6) Horizontal black streaks
(3-7) Vertical streaks or bands

original and output image
7-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-10) Moiré
(3-11) No image comes out (White or Black)
(3-12) Image is dark partly or light
(3-14) Image is missing partly
(3-15) Skewed image
7-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(3-1)Abnormal image

lens unit
lamp unit
(3-2)Colored background

1 Reloading the original The original is raised at Set the original during pressing.
scanning.
the contact glass.
3 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
properly.
lens unit
model) is faulty.
(3-3)Black dots

1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Check the black dots or color dots on the
original and replace it if necessary.
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
lens unit
7-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]

lamp unit

1 Removing foreign material There is a load on the scanner Remove foreign objects adhering to the
movement since the foreign scanner rail (CCD model) or scanner rod
objects adhere on the scanner (CIS model)
rails (CCD model) or scanner
rod (CIS model)
properly.
3 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt tension
scanner movement since the properly.
belt tension is improper.
4 Removing foreign material Foreign objects adhere to the Remove foreign objects adhering to the
scanner wire drum and pulley scanner wire drum and pulley (CCD model)
(CCD model) or scanner drive or scanner drive belt (CIS model)
belt (CIS model)
5 (CCD model) Replacing the There are scratches on the Replace the scanner wires.
scanner wire scanner wire.
6 (CIS model) Replacing the The scanner belt is scratched Replace the scanner belt
scanner belt
(3-5)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the output image

1 Replacing the original The original is not properly set Reset the originals.
on the contact glass.
2 Reattaching the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass.
properly attached.
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is not Adjust U067 [Front].
adjusted.
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scanning Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
adjustment is not executed.
(3-6)Horizontal black streaks

3 Executing U066 Scan the image at back side of Adjust U066 [Front].
the size indication plate.
(Adjustment value at U066
[Front] is not appropriate.
7-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Executing U411 The image at the backside of Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
the size indication plate is
scanned.
(The adjustment value of
[Table(ChartA)] at U411 is
incorrect.)
lens unit
lamp unit
(3-7)Vertical streaks or bands

2 Changing the setting Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
detected original size are
mismatched.
3 (CCD model) Checking the The wire of the original size Check if 3 wires of the original size sensor
wire of the original size sensor sensor is faulty. are pinched up between the rear side plate
and the hinge of the scanner unit. If pinched
up, replace the wire.
4 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
5 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)
6 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
incorrect. (Streaks or bands
appear out of the original.)
7 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and the shading
shading plate at the backside plate at the backside of the contact glass.
of the contact glass is dirty.
10 (CCD model) Cleaning the Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
CCD PWB
lens unit
7-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]

lamp unit
(3-8)Regular difference of the leading edge on the original and output image

1 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
(The leading edge of the
original is not set on the
contact glass properly)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front].
timing is incorrect
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
timing is incorrect
4 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
5 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt loose.
6 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor is faulty, Reattach the scanner motor and reconnect
and so the rotation is irregular. the connector. If not repaired, replace it.

1 Reloading the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror in the lamp unit.
the contact glass.
lens unit
lamp unit
(3-10)Moiré

1 Changing the setting The original image quality is Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/
not set properly. (moiré Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
changes depending on the [Function Defaults].
image quality.)
7-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the original The original is not set properly. Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset
(moiré appears in the original them.
scanning direction.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scanning Change the value at U065 [Main Scan] to
direction is large. (This reduce the scanner magnification in the main
problem occurs when the print scanning direction.
ratio is set as 100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner section is incorrect
(3-11)No image comes out (White or Black)

1 Reloading the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
lens unit
lamp unit
(3-12)Image is dark partly or light

2 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
3 Reattaching the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
properly attached.
6 Cleaning the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror in the lamp unit.
model) is faulty.
7-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3-13)Blurred image

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Removing condensation The contact glass has Remove the condensation on the contact
(contact glass) condensation. glass.
3 Removing condensation The lens unit (CCD model) or Remove condensation from the lens unit
lamp unit (CIS model) is (CCD model) or lamp unit (CIS model)
condensed
4 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner is incorrect.
lens unit
lamp unit

1 Changing the setting Marked part by highlighter pen Set [Copy] > [Functions] > [Original image] >
on the original cannot be [Others] > [Highlighter] > [On]
scanned.
2 Checking the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
3 Changing the setting The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
4 Changing the setting The copy position is rotated Set [Auto Image Rotation] to [Off] from the
automatically. System Menu.
5 Cleaning the contact glass The original scanning side of Clean the original scanning side of the
the contact glass is dirty. contact glass.
the contact glass.
properly attached.
9 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected properly, or the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Original size sensor - Engine PWB (YC15)
wire of the original size sensor sensor is faulty. are pinched up between the rear side plate
and the hinge of the scanner unit. If pinched
up, replace the wire.
7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Replacing the original size Original size and paper size Replace the original size sensor.
sensor are not matched on the
operation panel display.
(Original size sensor is
misdetected.)
9 Replacing the lens unit The lens unit is not attached Reattach the lens unit.
properly.
11 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit.
12 Replacing the Engine PWB The Engine PWB is faulty. Replace the Engine PWB.
13 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replacing the main PWB.
(3-15)Skewed image

1 Reloading the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set. (The original is skewed.)
properly.

1 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the
adjusted. (The original type originals.
and image quality differs.)
2 Changing the setting The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
"On".) [EcoPrint]
3 Changing the setting The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark.
adjusted. (The density setting
is too light.)
4 Changing the setting [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
[On] [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
[Prevent Bleed-thru]
the contact glass.
6 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
lens unit
lamp unit
7-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(4-1) Black dots (toner dirt)
(4-2) Image is missing partly (blank image, white

spots)
(4-3) Blank image

the center of the copy image
(4-5) Dirty reverse side
(4-7) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)
(4-8) Irregular errors at the leading edge of the

original image and the copy image (variation of
paper leading edge timing)
7-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-10) Offset
(4-11) Fusing failure
(4-12) Paper skew at the trailing edge
(4-13) Uneven transfer
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(4-1)Black dots (toner dirt)

1 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or When the black dots appears in the transfer
scratched. roller circumference interval (52mm), clean
it. If not repaired, replace it.
7-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the fuser separation The fuser separation nails are Clean the fuser separation claws if dirty
claws dirty
3 Checking the fuser unit The fuser roller is dirty, If black dots appears in the interval of fuser
scratched or foreign objects roller circumference (94mm), clean it.
adheres Remove foreign objects on the fuser roller by
printing solid images. If it is not improved,
replace the fuser unit.
(4-2)Image is missing partly (blank image, white spots)

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage The paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if necessary.
place humidity environment. Also, ask users to store paper in a dry place.
3 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or Clean the transfer roller if the image failure
scratched. appears in the transfer roller circumference
interval (52mm). If not repaired, replace the
transfer roller.
4 Setting the media type The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.
(4-3)Blank image

1 Checking the right cover The right conveying unit is not Check the lock of the right cover Assy, and
closed. open and close the right cover (conveying
unit).
• High-voltage PWB - Engine PWB
3 Checking the high-voltage The transfer bias output from Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB the high-voltage PWB is faulty.
(4-4)Mismatch between the center of the original and the center of the copy image

1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides width guides do not fit with the size.
paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when image Adjust the center line at U034 [LSU Out Left].
writing the data is incorrect.
7-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-5)Dirty reverse side

1 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty or Clean the transfer roller if the image failure
scratched. appears in the transfer roller circumference
transfer roller.
2 Changing the setting The transfer bias is improperly Retrieve the transfer bias to the default at
set. U101
3 Checking the fuser pressure The fuser pressure roller is Perform the duplex printing with the solid
roller dirty caused by the paper type image and clean the fuser pressure roller.
setting. And set proper paper thickness in System
Menu.
4 Cleaning the conveying guide The conveying guide is dirty Clean the conveying guide.

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper..
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if necessary.
3 Changing the setting The secondary transfer Retrieve the transfer voltage to the default at
voltage is improperly set. U106
4 Checking the transfer bias The transfer bias contact is Clean the transfer bias contact or correct it
contact dirty or deformed, so, the so that it grounds securely.
impression is unavailable.
(4-7)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)

1 Cleaning the fuser roller The fuser roller is dirty When the image failure appears in the fuser
roller circumference interval (94mm), clean
it.
2 Checking the right cover Only one side of the right Close the right cover (conveying unit).
cover (conveying unit) is
closed, or the pressure spring
is deformed.
3 Checking the transfer unit The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring. If not repaired,
properly attached or replace the transfer unit.
deformed.
7-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-8)Irregular errors at the leading edge of the original image and the copy image (variation of
paper leading edge timing)

1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is not Adjust the leading edge timing at U034 [LSU
properly adjusted. Out Top].
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount before Execute U051 to adjust the paper loop
registration is improper. amount before registration.
3 Checking the clutch The feed conveying related Execute U032. If the paper feed / conveying
clutch does not operate clutches (feed clutch, middle clutch or
correctly. registration clutch) do not operate properly,
reattach them and reconnect the connectors.
If not repaired, replace the drive unit.

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the
specification.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.
3 Applying the grease The drives from the conveying Apply the grease to the drive gear of the
motors are not smoothly conveying related motor. (EM-50LP: Part
transmitted. number (7BG010009H))
4 Replacing the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser forwarding guide is Replace the fuser unit.
deformed or the fuser
pressure is uneven.
(4-10)Offset

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the
specification, or change to the media type
setting closest to the specified paper.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Change the settings according to the media
set. type (paper weight).
3 Cleaning the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty. Clean the transfer roller if the image failure
appears in the circumference interval
(52mm)
4 Checking U101 The secondary transfer Retrieve the transfer voltage to the default at
voltage is improperly set. U101
5 Checking U161 The higher fuser temperature Execute U161 [Print] and reset the fuser
is set. temperature to the default value.
6 Cleaning the fuser roller The fuser roller is dirty When the image failure appears in the fuser
roller circumference interval (94mm), clean
it.
7 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser roller surface is Replace the fuser unit.
scratched
7-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4-11)Fusing failure

1 Replacing paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the proper paper.
2 Setting the media type The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.
3 Checking U161 The lower fuser temperature is Change the fuser temperature to the default
set. value.
4 Replacing the fuser unit The nipping pressure (width) Replace the fuser unit.
is small and fuser pressure
setting is weak.
(4-12)Paper skew at the trailing edge

1 Cleaning the transfer unit The neighboring parts of the Clean the transfer roller, separation needle
secondary transfer roller are and paper conveying path
dirty with paper dust.
2 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking fan motor if it
material such as a piece of does not operate properly when executing
paper. U037 [Toner].
3 Relocating the paper width The set position of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides / MP paper width paper width guides to fit them with the paper
guides guides is mismatched with the size.
paper size, and so, the paper
is skewed.
4 Checking the conveying The registration rollers or the Check if the registration rollers and the
section middle pulleys are not properly middle pulleys are properly attached. If
attached, or they are dirty. necessary, reattach them. Also, they are dirty
with toner or paper dust, clean them.
5 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
right cover closed. and close it firmly.
6 Reinstalling the fuser unit The fuser unit is not properly Insert the fuser unit straight into the main
installed. unit, and lock both sides of the fuser unit
firmly.
(4-13)Uneven transfer

1 Opening and closing the The conveying section is not Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
conveying section closed completely. and close it firmly.
2 Cleaning the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty. Clean the transfer roller if the image failure
appears in the circumference interval
(52mm)
3 Checking the transfer unit The transfer roller is faulty or Correct the pressure spring deformed. If not
the pressure spring is repaired, replace the transfer unit.
deformed.
7-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Replacing the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in the Replace the fuser unit.
drive section or the fuser
press-release section are
deformed or worn down.
(4-14)Blurred image

1 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the new dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if necessary.

1 Cleaning the fuser unit The fuser heat roller and fuser Execute the solid image printing to clean the
separation claws are dirty with fuser heat roller. And also clean the
paper dust and toner separation nails. If the parts in the fuser unit
is broken, replace the fuser unit.
2 Changing the setting The media type is not properly Set the proper media type via the System
set. Menu.
3 Cleaning the exit feed-shift The exit feed-shift guide has Clean the exit feed-shift guide.
guide toner dirt or welding.
4 Cleaning the separation The separation needles are Clean the separation needle above the
needle dirty with paper dust or toner. transfer roller with a cleaning brush, etc.
5 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty, Clean the transfer roller if the image failure
deformed or worn down. appears in the transfer roller circumference
transfer roller.
7-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(5-1) Background image is foggy.
(5-8) Blank image
7-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-9) No image comes out (Black)
(5-10) Periodic toner dirt
(5-11) Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)
(5-14) Horizontal uneven density
(5-15) Vertical uneven density
(5-16) Offset
7-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-17) Gradation reproducibility is low
(5-19) Trailing image
Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(5-1)Background image is foggy.

1 Checking the print coverage The charge amount of the Check the print coverage on the service
toner is low. status page and if printed in high coverage,
execute the drum refresh.
2 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
3 Checking the developer high- The developer high-voltage Clean the developer high-voltage contact
voltage contact contact of the high-voltage and correct it so that it grounds securely. Or
PWB is dirty or deformed. reattach the high-voltage PWB.
4 Executing U140 The setting values at U140 are Retrieve the U140 setting values to the
different from the default. default
5 Checking the developer unit The charge amount of the Replace the developer unit.
toner is low.
6 Replacing the high-voltage The developer bias output Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB from the high-voltage PWB is
high

1 Reinstalling the main charger The main charger unit is not Reinstall the main charger unit to the drum
unit installed properly. unit, and Reinstall the drum unit to the main
body to ensure that the connector is
connected.
2 Checking the main charger The MC roller surface is dirty. Clean the MC roller surface. If not resolved,
unit replace the main charger unit and clear the
MC roller counter at U930.
7-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Main charger unit replacement The MC roller reaches its life. If the main charger roller counter exceeds
300,000 at U930, the drum surface potential
is lowered under the low temperature
environment. Therefore, replace the main
charger unit and clear the main charger roller
counter at U930.
4 Changing the setting The setting value of the main If the setting values at U100 are not the
high-voltage is incorrect. default values, reset them to the default
values.
5 Checking the drum unit and The drum is faulty. Replace the drum unit.
the developer unit
6 Checking the main charger The main charger high-voltage Clean the charger high voltage contact and
high-voltage contact contact of the high-voltage correct it to ensure that it is grounded. Or,
PWB is dirty or deformed. reinstall the high voltage PWB.
7 Replacing the high-voltage The main charger bias output Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB from the high-voltage PWB is
high
9 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the If the machine inside temperature is below
inside the main unit installation environment. 10°C / 50°F at U139, instruct user to change
the installation environment of the room
temperature 16°C / 60.8°F or higher. (This
phenomenon tends to occur immediately
after being left in a low temperature
environment for few days if turning on the
power).

• LSU(APC PWB) - Main PWB
2 LSU replacement The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.

1 Reinstalling the toner Toner is collected on one side. Sufficiently shake the toner container and
container reinstall it to the main unit.
2 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
3 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Correct the developer bias contact so that it
contact deformed. grounds securely.
4 Executing U140 The setting values at U140 are Retrieve the U140 setting values to the
different from the default. default
6 Replacing the high-voltage The developer, main charger Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB and transfer bias output from
the high-voltage PWB is low.
7-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]


1 Executing Drum refresh Condensation on the drum Execute Drum refresh.
surface
2 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
3 Checking the eraser Eraser is faulty Reinsert the drum unit into the main unit all
the way. If not repaired, replace the drum
unit.
4 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down and photoconductor
layer is thickened. The drum
surface potential after
exposure is high.

• LSU(APC PWB) - Main PWB
2 LSU replacement The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
2 Drum unit replacement There are adhered objects on Replace the drum unit.
the drum surface.
(5-8)Blank image

1 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
2 Developer unit replacement The developer drive gear is Replace the developer unit.
faulty.
3 Checking U140 The setting value of the Execute U140 and reset the developer bias
developer bias is improper. to the default value.
• Developer motor - Engine PWB
• LSU (APC PWB) - Main PWB
7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
6 Checking the developer motor The developing motor does Execute U030 to check the developer motor
not operate properly. operation. If the developer motor does not
operate properly, reattach it and reconnect
the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
7 Replacing the high-voltage The developer, main charger Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB and transfer bias output from
the high-voltage PWB is low.
8 LSU replacement APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
(5-9)No image comes out (Black)

1 reinstalling the main charger The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger unit to the drum
unit and drum unit charger unit is not properly unit and reinstall the drum unit into the main
installed. unit to ensure secure contact .
2 Checking the MC roller The contact of the MC roller is Clean the main charger roller contact and
contact dirty or deformed. (Charge correct it so that it is grounded securely.
bias can't be applied)
3 Checking the high-voltage The high-voltage contact of Clean the high-voltage contact and correct it
contact the high-voltage PWB is dirty so that it grounds securely. Or reattach the
or deformed. high-voltage PWB.
5 Replacing the high-voltage The main charger bias voltage Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB output is not even from the
main high-voltage PWB.
(5-10)Periodic toner dirt

1 (In case of 94mm cycle) The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
Executing drum refresh
2 (In case of 94mm interval) There are some scratches on Replace the drum unit.
Checking the drum unit the drum surface.
3 (In case of 37.5mm interval) There is dirt or foreign object Clean the MC roller surface. If not resolved,
Checking the main charger on the MC roller surface replace the main charger unit and clear the
unit MC roller counter at U930.
4 (In case of 40mm interval) There is dirt, foreign object or Wipe the developer roller dry. If it does not
Checking the developer unit scratch on the developing improve, replace the developer unit.
roller.
5 (In case of 63mm interval) Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the DS pulley.
Checking the DS pulley DS pulley.
7-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-11)Horizontal streaks, band (White, black)

1 Checking the developer unit Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the developer roller and
roller are dirty and it causes the developer bias contact.
the developer bias leakage.
2 Developer unit replacement Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit.
roller and the developer bias
contact are deteriorated and it
causes the developer bias
leakage.
4 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is scratched Replace the drum unit.
and there is leak.
5 Main charger unit replacement The MC roller surface is dirty Replace the main charger unit if the image
or scratch. failure appears in the MC roller
circumference interval, and then clear the
main charger roller counter at U930.
7 Replacing the high-voltage The main charger bias voltage Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB output is not even from the
main high-voltage PWB.

2 Drum unit replacement The cleaning blade or drum Replace the drum unit.
surface is worn out.
3 Cleaning the MC roller Streaky dirt adheres to the Clean the MC roller surface with water.
surface of the MC roller, and
no electric potential is applied.
4 Main charger unit replacement MC roller surface is streaky Replace the main charger unit and clear the
altered. MC roller counter at U930.
5 Checking the developer unit Foreign materials are pinched Remove foreign objects between the blade
between the blade and and magnet roller. If not improved, replace
magnet roller the developer unit.

1 Developer unit replacement Foreign objects or aggregated Clean the developer roller. Or, replace the
toner adhere on the developer unit if not repaired after cleaning.
developing roller.
2 Removing foreign material There are foreign objects on Remove foreign objects on the frame or
the laser path of the LSU. sealing material between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
4 Drum unit replacement There are some scratches on Replace the drum unit.
the drum surface.
7-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Checking the main charger There is dirt, foreign object or Clean the MC roller surface. If not resolved,
unit scratch on the MC roller. replace the main charger unit and clear the
6 Cleaning the eraser Eraser is dirty Clean the eraser.
(5-14)Horizontal uneven density

1 Checking the main charger MC roller rotation is uneven. Reattach the main charger unit.
unit
2 Main charger unit replacement The MC cleaning roller is Replace the main charger unit and clear the
deformed. MC roller counter at U930.
3 Cleaning the DS pulleys The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
4 Developer unit replacement The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit.
5 Cleaning the developing bias The conduction is not Clean the developer bias contact.
contact stabilized due to the dirty
developer bias contact.
6 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the shape Execute Drum refresh.
of a streak are on both ends of
the drum surface.
down.
8 LSU replacement The laser emission is uneven. Replace the LSU.
(5-15)Vertical uneven density

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
2 Checking the main charger Streaky dirt adheres to the Clean the MC roller surface. If not resolved,
unit surface of the MC roller. replace the main charger unit and clear the
down.
(5-16)Offset

down or has some scratches.
3 Cleaning the developing roller The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
4 Developer unit replacement The developer roller surface is Replace the developer unit.
worn down or has scratches.
7-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5-17)Gradation reproducibility is low

1 Adjusting the image Grayscale adjustment is not Execute System Menu [Adjustment/
executed Maintenance] > [Grayscale]
(5-18)Blurred image

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
2 Checking the LSU The LSU dust-proof glass is Clean or replace the LSU
dirty or altered
(5-19)Trailing image

1 Changing the media type The transfer current setting Change the media type setting of the
setting mismatches the paper used cassette with the target paper.
Select the cassette at Cassette/MP tray
setting in System Menu and set the media
type to Custom 8. (Transfer current setting
value is increased)
7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1)Prior standard check items
Wear, dirt or foreign matter adhesion of conveyance system rollers, pulleys and gears
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam from paper factor
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam due to the guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam from the factor of conveying roller, motor or clutch
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection

1 Opening / closing the front The front cover is not Open the right cover and close it securely.
cover engaged.
2 Checking the toner container The toner container and waste Check how the toner container and waste
and waste toner box toner box are not attached toner box are attached. Reattach them if
properly necessary.
3 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not aligned Open the right cover and close it again
right cover to the other exterior covers. securely.
4 Checking the conveying unit Parts on the conveying unit Check the attachment of the transfer roller
are not attached properly unit and drum cover on the conveying unit,
and reattach them if necessary.
(1-2)Paper jam from paper factor

1 Reloading paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Replacing paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
enough or the cutting edge of the paper direction. Correct or replace paper
loaded paper is damaged. if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used or Ask a user to use the specified paper type.
foreign objects are on the Or, remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
7-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl

1 Checking the paper path and The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs, check if a piece of
the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the torn paper, foreign objects or the burrs on the
leading edge of the sheet is part do not exist on the paper path, and
bent. remove them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature to the default
fuser temperature is improper. value at U161 when the paper curls.
(1-4)Paper jam due to the guide

1 Checking the guide The guide is dirty or foreign The guide is dirty with toner, paper dust, etc.
objects adhere Or if foreign objects adhere, clean it with
cloth, etc.
2 Checking the guide The guide does not properly Check the guide, and remove any burrs.
operate due to the incorrect Also, if the guide does not operate smoothly
attachment or a fault. manually, reattach the guide. Then, replace
the guide if it is not fixed or if there is
deformation or frictional wear.
3 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not operate Execute U033 and check if the guide can
properly. move smoothly by the operation sounds. If
the guide does not operate thoroughly or
smoothly, reattach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not resolved.
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides width guides do not fit with the paper width guides along the paper size
paper size. when the paper skew or the paper creases
occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the paper source.
enough. If a part of the paper is bent, remove it.
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
(1-7)Paper jam from the factor of conveying roller, motor or clutch

1 Checking the roller or the The roller or surface of the Check if the rollers or the pulleys have no
pulley pulley is dirty, or faulty. paper dust, toner, foreign objects, diameter
change or frictional wear, and clean their
surface. If not repaired, replace the parts.
2 Cleaning the roller shaft and The roller shaft or the bearings If a load is given to the roller rotation caused
the bearings are dirty. by the dirt of the roller shaft or the bearings,
clean.
7-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the spring The spring does not press the Check if the spring is dropping off or the
conveying roller or pulley roller and the pulley are pressed properly,
properly. then reattach them if necessary.
4 Checking the clutch The clutch does not operate Execute U032 (main unit), U243 (dual scan
properly. DP) to check the clutch operation. If the
clutch does not operate properly, reattach it
and reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace the individual clutch or the unit
containing the clutch.
5 Checking the motor The motor does not operate Execute U030 [Main unit] and U243 [DP] and
properly. check the related motor operation. If not
operating normally, replace the motor.
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor

1 Checking the actuator and the The actuator or the return If the actuator is caught or came off, reattach
recovery spring spring does not operate the actuator or recovery spring.
correctly.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. If the sensor surface is dirty with paper dust,
etc., clean it.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Check the sensor operation by executing
correctly. U031 (main unit) or U244 (document
processor). If the sensor does not operate
properly, clean and reattach it, then reinsert
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper leading The leading edge margin is If there is no image margin at the paper
edge margin not enough. leading edge, execute U034 to adjust the
leading edge timing and then U403 to adjust
the leading edge margin
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misdetected. Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides paper width guides along with the paper size
to properly detect the paper size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not properly If the media type setting does not match the
set. actual paper thickness, set the paper weight
at [System Menu] > [Common Settings] >
[Paper Settings] > [Media Type Settings].
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity

1 Checking the ground The static electricity When the main unit is installed in the low
accumulates. humidity environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates on the
conveying guide during the continuous
printing,
check if the discharge sheet in the exit
section and the metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded securely. Reattach
them if necessary.
7-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are
always damp.)

1 Checking the paper storage Papers have been stored in Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
place the improper place.
2 Setting the cassette heater The paper is damp. Turn the cassette heater switch on at the
machine rear side.
7-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Paper misfeed detection

(2-1)Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed message on the
operation panel. To remove paper misfeed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the front cover or paper conveying
cover.
The locations are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.
Jam location indication
10:10 9
Paper jam.
4
Clear the paper jammed in 7 7 8 2 2
Cassette 1.
Press [Next >] to follow

the instructions.
2 1
JAM 0001 1/3 3
3
1 2 < Back Next >
5
4
6
1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Shows the previous step.
3 Shows the next step.
4 Shows the removal procedure.
Display Jam location Display Jam location

1 Misfeed in MP tray 6 Misfeed in the cassette 3
2 Misfeed inside the right cover 1 7 Misfeed in the document finisher
3 Misfeed in the cassette 1 8 Misfeed in the conveying unit
4 Misfeed inside the right cover 3 9 Misfeed in the document processor
5 Misfeed in the cassette 2
7-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition

Main unit + Optional unit
S R
T
9
1
U
9
1
7
1 7
1 8
1 8
1
J I
7
1 O N M 2
1
Q P
2
1
H 2
1 1
A 3
1 G
E
B 5
1
F 4
1
C 6
1
Item Sensor name Item Sensor name

A Paper sensor L DU sensor
B PF paper sensor 1 M BR conveying sensor 1
C PF paper sensor 2 N BR conveying sensor 2
D Conveying sensor O BR conveying sensor 3
E PF conveying sensor 1 P DF conveying sensor
F PF conveying sensor 2 Q DF exit sensor
G MP paper sensor R DP originsl sensor
H Registration sensor S DP paper feed sensor
I Exit sensor T DP registration sensor
J Paper full sensor U DP timing sensor
K JS full sensor
7-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code and JAM location

JAM JAM JAM JAM
Error code Error code Error code Error code
location location location location
J0000 - J4002 3 J4901 8 J6023 -
J0100 - J4003 3 J4902 8 J6043 -
J0101 - J4012 2 J4903 8 J6103 8
J0104 - J4013 2 J4908 8 J6113 7
J0105 - J4201 2 J4909 8 J6123 7
J0106 - J4202 2 J4911 8 J6413 7
J0107 - J4203 2 J4912 8 J6423 7
J0110 - J4208 2 J4913 8 J6803 7
J0111 - J4209 2 J4918 8 J6813 7
J0114 - J4211 2 J4919 8 J6903 7
J0120 2 J4212 2 J5001 8 J6913 7
J0121 2 J4213 2 J5002 8 J7013 7
J0210 - J4218 2 J5003 8 J7023 7
J0501 3 J4219 2 J5008 8 J7913 -
J0502 3 J4301 2 J5009 8 J7923 -
J0503 3 J4302 2 J5011 8 J7933 -
J0508 2 J4303 2 J5012 8 J7943 -
J0509 1 J4309 2 J5013 8 J7953 -
J0511 3 J4311 2 J5018 8 J7963 -
J0512 3 J4312 2 J5019 8 J9000 9
J0513 3 J4313 2 J9001 9
J0518 3 J4319 2 J9002 9
J0519 3 J9004 9
J1403 5 J9010 -
J1413 4 J9011 -
J9110 9
J9200 9
J9400 9
J9410 9
7-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Jam Codes
Error code Contents note
J0000 Power ON jam
J0100/J0101/J0104/ Jam from firmware factor
J0105/J0106/J0107
J0110/J0111/J0114 Cover open detection J0110: Right cover open detection, J0111: Front cover open
detection, J0114: Bridge cover open detection
J0120/J0121 Firmware triggered jam at duplex
J0210 PF right cover open detection Object: 500-sheet paper feeder, 500-sheetx2 paper feeder
J0501/J0502/J0503 Cassette no feed
J0501/J0502/J0503 Cassette no feed J0501: Registration sensor does not turn on
J0502: PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on
J0508 Duplex no feed
J0509 No paper feed from the MP tray
J0511 Multi-feeding from cassette
J0512/J0513 Multi feed jam Object: Paper feeder
J0518 Multi-feeding from the duplex
section
J0519 Multi-feeding from the MP tray
J1403 PF conveying sensor 1 non-
arrival jam
J1413 PF conveying sensor 1 stay jam
J4002/J4003 Registration sensor non-arrival
jam
J4012/J4013 Registration sensor stay jam
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Eject sensor non-arrival jam
J4208/J4209
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4218/ Eject sensor stay jam
J4219
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4309 DU sensor non-arrival jam
J4311/4312/4313/4319 DU sensor stay jam
J4901/4902/4903/4908/ BR conveying sensor 2 non-
4909 arrival jam
J4911/4912/4913/4918/ BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam
4919
J5001/5002/5003/5008/ BR conveying sensor 3 non-
5009 arrival jam
J5011/5012/5013/5018/ BR conveying sensor 3 stay jam
5019
J6023 DF staple cover open jam
J6043 DF top cover open jam
J6103 DF conveying sensor jam
J6113 DF conveying stay jam
J6123 DF conveying sensor stay jam
J6413 DF exit sensor stay jam
J6423 DF exit sensor stay jam
J6803 Front adjustor plate operation on
error
J6813 Front adjustor plate operation off
error
7-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents note

J6903 Rear adjustor plate operation on
error
J6913 Rear adjustor plate operation off
error
J7013 Staple operation error
J7023 Staple initial operation error
J7913 Sequence error 1
J9000 No original feed
J9001 DP conveying jam
J9002 Paper jam detected when starting
the paper conveying
J9004 DP switchback jam
J9010 DP cover open jam
J9011 DP top cover open jam
J9110 DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam
J9200 DP registration sensor non-arrival
jam
J9400 DP timing sensor non-arrival jam
J9410 DP timing sensor stay jam
Content of Jam Code

J0000: Power ON jam
The power is turned on while a conveying sensor turns on.

1 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
remaining on paper conveying adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
route to turn on the sensor. the parts such as the guide or the actuator,
remove them.
2 Specifying the sensor If the faulty sensor can be Specify the sensor turning on at U031, clean
specified at U031, the and reattach the sensor. Then, reconnect
connector is not properly the connector. If the sensor turning on is
connected or the wire is faulty. displayed at U031 again, replace the wire or
the sensor.
wire of the original size sensor sensor is faulty. (This failure are pinched up between the rear side plate
cannot be specified at U031.) and the hinge of the scanner unit. If pinched
up, replace the wire and the main PWB.
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106/J0107: Jam from firmware factor

The firmware does not properly activate.
7-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the paper on the conveying section.
activate properly. Turn off the power switch off and unplug the
power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn the power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
properly activate.
J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection

J0110: Right cover open detection, J0111: Front cover open detection, J0114: Bridge cover open
detection
Cover opened during printing

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is closed firmly, and
reattach it if necessary. If the cover is
deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch and reconnect the
operate properly. connector. If the cover switch is faulty,
replace it.
J0120/J0121: Firmware triggered jam at duplex

The firmware does not properly activate.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the paper on the conveying section.
activate properly. Turn off the power switch off and unplug the
power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn the power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
properly activate.
J0210: PF right cover open detection

Object: 500-sheet paper feeder, 500-sheetx2 paper feeder
PF right cover opened during printing

1 Checking the PF right cover The PF right cover is not Check if the cover is securely closed, and
aligned to the other exterior reattach it if necessary. Correct or replace it if
covers. deformed.
2 Checking the PF right cover The PF right cover switch Reattach the PF right cover switch and
switch does not operate properly. reconnect the connector. If it is faulty, replace
it.
J0501/J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed

Prior checkpoints at no paper feed from the cassette

1 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction
7-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Correct the paper. Switch the leading edge
and the trailing edge of paper, or flip paper
upside down and reload the paper
4 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Use the paper matching the specification
J0501/J0502/J0503: Cassette no feed

J0501: Registration sensor does not turn on
The next sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch turns on when feeding from cassette 1-3

1 Relocating the paper width The paper width guide and Relocate the paper width guides and paper
guides and paper length guide length guide set position does length guide to match the paper size.
not match the paper
2 Checking the actuator for the The actuator does not operate If the actuator is deformed or does not
upper paper sensor/lower properly. properly operate, replace it.
paper sensor.
3 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If there is a piece of paper, foreign objects,
piece of paper, etc. etc. on the conveying path, remove them.
4 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of the Check the pickup spring. In case of
pickup pulley is not enough. installation failure, reattach the spring. Clean
the pickup roller surface. If the surface is
worn down, replace the pickup roller.
5 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the feed roller surface. If worn down,
paper feed roller is not replace it.
enough.
6 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch is not Reattach the feed clutch and reconnect the
clutch connected, so the paper feed connector. If not repaired, replace it.
roller does not rotate.
7 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Reattach the sensor and reconnect the
correctly. connector. If not repaired, replace it.
8 Checking the wire connection The connector is not properly Reconnect the connectors on the Engine
connected. PWB and PF PWB.
J0508: Duplex no feed

The registration sensor does not turn on when feed from the duplex section.

2 Checking the conveying roller The paper conveying force is Clean the surface of the DU conveying roller
and the pulley lowered. and conveying pulley. Check the pressure to
the roller and pulley. If the spring or bushing
comes off, reattach it. Check the drive gear
and replace it if damaged.
7-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the registration The registration sensor does Execute U031 [Regist]. If the registration
sensor not operate properly. sensor does not operate properly, clean and
reattach it then reconnect the connector. If
not repaired, replace it.
4 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not operate Execute U032 [DU1]. If DU clutch does not
correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn on.

2 Checking the MP feed roller The paper conveying force is Clean the surface of the MP feed roller. If it is
and drive gears lowered or slippage occurs worn down, replace it. If the foreign objects
adhere on the drive gear, remove them. If
damaged, replace it.
4 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate does not Execute U030 [MPT]. If the MP lift plate does
operate properly. not operate normally, reattach the MP lift
plate. If not repaired, replace the drive unit.
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette

The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding from cassette 1.

2 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the retard pulley surface. If worn
the retard pulley is not down, replace it.
enough.
3 Checking the retard roller The retard roller does not Rotate the retard roller to check if it contacts
operation contact the feed roller the feed roller. If the load is heavy in excess,
check the drive belt and clean the ISU shaft
4 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected by If the paper size loaded in the cassette
switch paper length switch. differs from the paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach the paper length
switch and reconnect the connector. If not
repaired, replace the paper length switch.
6 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch does Execute U032 [Feed]. If the feed clutch does
clutch not operate properly. not operate normally, replace the drive unit.
7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0512/J0513: Multi feed jam

Object: Paper feeder
The PF conveying sensor does not turn off when feeding from cassette2, 3

2 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the retard pulley surface. If worn
the retard pulley is not down, replace it.
enough.
3 Checking the retard roller The retard roller does not Rotate the retard roller to check if it contacts
operation contact the feed roller the feed roller. If the load is heavy in excess,
check the drive belt and clean the ISU shaft
4 Checking the paper length Paper size is misdetected by If the paper size loaded in the cassette
switch paper length switch. differs from the paper size indicated on the
operation panel, reattach the paper length
switch and reconnect the connector. If not
repaired, replace the paper length switch.
5 Checking the PF conveying PF conveying sensor does not Check the operation of the actuator. Clean
sensor operate correctly. and reattach the sensor, then reconnect the
connector. If not repaired, replace it.
6 Checking the PF paper feed The PF paper feed clutch does If the PF feed clutch does not operate
clutch not operate properly. normally, replace the PF drive unit.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section.

2 Checking the DU clutch DU clutch does not operate Execute U032 [Dup]. If the DU clutch does
correctly. not operate normally, replace the drive unit.
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

When feeding from MP tray, registration sensor does not turn off.

1 Checking the paper size Paper size on display and Adjust the paper setting to match the actual
actual one mismatch (actual is paper size
longer)
2 Checking the MP feed roller The paper separation force of Clean the MP feed roller and MP separation
and the MP separation pad the MP separation pad is pad, or replace them
insufficient.
7-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Checking the MP solenoid The MP feed roller rotation Execute U033 [MPT]. If the MP solenoid
does not stop due to the MP does not operate normally, replace the drive
solenoid operation failure unit.
J1403: PF conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

The PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn on when feeding from cassette 3

1 Checking the PF cover The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely.
Replace it if it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
2 Checking PF conveying PF conveying sensor 1 does Check the operation of the actuator. Clean
sensor 1 not operate normally and reattach the sensor, then reconnect the
3 Checking the PF conveying PF conveying clutch does not If the PF conveying clutch does not operate
clutch operate correctly. normally, replace the PF drive unit.
J1413: PF conveying sensor 1 stay jam

The PF conveying sensor 1 does not turn off when feeding from cassette 3

1 Checking the PF cover The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely.
Replace it if it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
2 Checking PF conveying PF conveying sensor 1 does Check the operation of the actuator. Clean
sensor 1 not operate normally and reattach the sensor, then reconnect the
J4002/J4003: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding from cassette 3.

J4012/J4013: Registration sensor stay jam

The registration sensor does not turn on when feeding from cassette 2-3
7-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4208/J4209: Eject sensor non-arrival jam

The exit sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-3, duplex section or MP tray.

1 Checking the actuator The actuator or exit sensor Move the actuator for the exit sensor in the
connecting section does not fuser unit and check the joint section
operate properly. operates normally and the exit sensor turns
on. If not, correct the actuator or replace the
fuser unit.
2 Checking the paper setting The actual paper and the Change to the proper paper setting from
paper settings (paper weight, System Menu
media type, etc.) do not
match.
3 Checking the fuser heat roller/ Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the fuser heat roller, Fuser pressure
Fuser pressure roller/front fuser heat roller, Fuser roller and fuser front guide. If not repaired,
fuser guide pressure roller or fuser front replace the fuser unit.
guide
4 Checking the fuser separation Foreign materials such as If toner, etc. adhere on the fuser separation
claws toner adhere on the fuser nails, remove them. If it is deformed, replace
separation nails. Or the fuser the fuser unit.
separation nails are deformed
or improperly attached.
5 Checking the leading edge The leading edge margin is Execute U034 [Adj Paper Timing] and adjust
margin insufficient the leading edge timing.
6 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor does not Execute U031 [Fuser]. If the exit sensor does
operate properly. not operate properly, clean and reattach it
then reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4218/J4219: Eject sensor stay jam

The exit sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-3, duplex section or MP tray.

1 Checking the fuser exit guide Paper is caught up at the fuser If welding of toner, burrs are on the
exit guide. conveying surface of the fuser exit guide,
remove them or replace the fuser exit guide.
2 Checking the exit guide Paper is caught up at the exit If welding of toner, burrs are on the fuser exit
guide guide, remove or replace them.
3 Checking the exit roller and The exit roller or drive parts do Check if the exit motor drive is transmitted to
the drive parts not operate correctly. the upper/lower exit roller. if the drive gears
is damaged or the bushing is worn down,
replace it.
7-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Checking the actuator The actuator or exit sensor Move the actuator for the exit sensor in the
connecting section does not fuser unit and check the joint section
operate properly. operates normally and the exit sensor turns
on. If not, correct the actuator or replace the
fuser unit.
5 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor does not Execute U031 [Fuser]. If the exit sensor does
operate properly. not operate properly, clean and reattach it
then reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
6 Checking the exit motor The exit motor does not Execute U030 [Exit]. If the exit motor does
operate correctly. not operate correctly, reattach it and
reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
7 Checking the feed-shift The feed-shift solenoid does Execute U033 [Eject] to check the exit feed-
solenoid not operate normally. shift guide operation. If it does not operate
correctly, reattach the solenoid and
replace it.
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4309: DU sensor non-arrival jam

The DU sensor does not turn on when feeding from cassette 1-3 or MP tray

1 Checking the exit guide Paper is caught up at the exit If welding of toner, burrs are on the fuser exit
guide guide, remove or replace them.
2 Checking the exit roller and The exit roller or drive parts do Check if the exit motor drive is transmitted to
the drive parts not operate correctly. the upper/lower exit roller. if the drive gears
is damaged or the bushing is worn down,
replace it.
3 Checking the feed-shift The feed-shift solenoid does Execute U033 [Eject] to check the exit feed-
solenoid not operate normally. shift guide operation. If it does not operate
correctly, reattach the solenoid and
replace it.
4 Checking the exit motor The exit motor does not Execute U030 [Exit]. If the exit motor does
operate correctly. not operate correctly, reattach it and
replace it.
5 Checking the DU conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the DU conveying roller. If the surface
roller DU conveying roller is not is worn down, replace it.
enough.
6 Checking the DU conveying Pressure of the DU conveying Check the DP conveying pulley. If the
pulley pulley is not enough. pressing parts are deformed or damaged,
replace them.
7 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not operate Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU sensor does not
correctly. operate properly, clean and reattach it then
replace it.
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4319: DU sensor stay jam

The DU sensor does not turn off when feeding from cassette 1-3 or MP tray
7-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Checking the DU conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the DU conveying roller. If the surface
roller DU conveying roller is not is worn down, replace it.
enough.
2 Checking the DU conveying Pressure of the DU conveying Check the DP conveying pulley. If the
pulley pulley is not enough. pressing parts are deformed or damaged,
replace them.
3 Checking the DU sensor DU sensor does not operate Execute U031 [DU1]. If DU sensor does not
correctly. operate properly, clean and reattach it then
replace it.
J4901/J4902/J4903/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 2 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-3, duplex section or MP tray.

1 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying belt comes Check the BR conveying belt and reattach it
belt off.
2 Checking the conveying guide The foreign objects such as Clean or replace the conveying guide.
toner are on the conveying
guide.
3 Checking the paper conveying Conveying capability of the Clean the conveying roller. If the surface is
roller conveying roller is not enough. worn out, replace it.
4 Checking BR conveying BR conveying sensor 2 does Reattach and reconnect BR conveying
sensor 2 not operate correctly. sensor 2. If not repaired, replace it.
5 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor does Reconnect the connector of the DP
motor not operate correctly. conveying motor. If it is not fixed, replace it.
6 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
7 Replacing the DF relay PWB The DF relay PWB is faulty Replace the DF relay PWB.
J4911/J4912/J4913/J4918/J4919: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-3, duplex section or MP tray.

guide.
J5001/J5002/J5003/J5008/J5009: BR conveying sensor 3 non-arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 3 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-3, duplex section or MP tray.
7-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]

guide.
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 3 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 3 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-3, duplex section or MP tray.

guide.
J6023: DF staple cover open jam

The DF staple cover open is detected during the DF operation

1 Checking the DF staple cover The DF front cover is not Check if the DF staple cover is closed firmly
aligned to the other exterior and reattach it if necessary. If the DF staple
covers. cover is deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DF staple cover The DF staple cover switch Check the DF staple cover switch. If not
switch does not operate normally operating normally, reattach it and reconnect
3 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.
J6043: DF top cover open jam

The DF top cover open is detected during the DF operation

1 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover is not Check if the DF top cover is closed firmly and
aligned to the other exterior reattach the DF top cover if necessary. If the
covers. DF top cover is deformed, repair or replace
it.
2 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover sensor does Check the DF top cover sensor. If it does not
sensor not operate correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect
7-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J6103: DF conveying sensor jam

The DF conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper output signal from the main
unit was received.

guide.
3 Checking the DF conveying The DF entry sensor does not Check the DF entry sensor. If it does not
sensor operate correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect
J6113: DF conveying stay jam

The DF conveying sensor does not turn off when passing the specific time after it turns on

guide.
3 Checking the DF conveying The DF entry sensor does not Check the DF entry sensor. If it does not
sensor operate correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect
J6123: DF conveying sensor stay jam

The conveying sensor detects paper at power-up or cover close

guide.
3 Checking the DF conveying The DF conveying sensor Check the DF conveying sensor. If not
sensor does not operate normally. operating normally, reattach it and reconnect
J6413: DF exit sensor stay jam

During the bundle eject operation, the DF exit sensor does not detect no paper when passing the specified time.

1 Checking DF adjustor tray Foreign objects such as toner, Clean the DF adjustor tray or replace it
etc. adhere to the DF adjustor
tray
7-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the exit roller The paper conveying force of Clean the exit roller. If the surface is worn
the exit roller is insufficient. out, replace it.
3 Checking the DF exit sensor The DF exit sensor does not Check the DF exit sensor. If it does not
operate correctly. operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect
J6423: DF exit sensor stay jam

The DF exit sensor detects paper at power-up or cover close

1 Checking DF adjustor tray Foreign objects such as toner, Clean the DF adjustor tray or replace it
etc. adhere to the DF adjustor
tray
2 Checking the exit roller The paper conveying force of Clean the exit roller. If the surface is worn
the exit roller is insufficient. out, replace it.
3 Checking the DF exit sensor The DF exit sensor does not Check the DF exit sensor. If it does not
J6803: Front adjustor plate operation on error

The DF adjusting sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specified time when executing jobs

1 Checking DF adjusting sensor DF adjusting sensor 1 does Check the DF adjusting sensor 1. If not
1 not operate normally operating normally, reattach it and reconnect
2 Checking the DF adjusting DF adjusting motor 1 does not Check the DF adjusting motor 1. If not
motor 1 operate normally operating normally, reattach it and reconnect
J6813: Front adjustor plate operation off error

The DF adjusting sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specified time when executing jobs

J6903: Rear adjustor plate operation on error

The DF adjusting sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the specified time when executing jobs
7-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]

J6913: Rear adjustor plate operation off error

The DF adjusting sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the specified time when executing jobs

J7013: Staple operation error

When starting the clinch operation, the initial setting of the staple for the next bundle is not ready after passing the
specified time.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF Check if the lower BF registration guide
registration guide shifts shifts manually, and reattach it if it does not
manually, and reattach it if it smoothly shift.
does not smoothly shift.
2 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit.
J7023: Staple initial operation error

During the initial operation at power-up or cover close, when the staple supply operation is performed 10 time, the initial
setting of the staple is not available.

J7913: Sequence error 1

Operation start=1 during Finisher operation permission=0

1 Firmware upgrade Firmware mismatches Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Maintenance mode request has occurred during Finisher operation permission = 0 or Operation start = 1


Backup data command 1 is received at operation start=1


Operation start=1 is received during standby=0


Paper interval and bundle interval are not normal.


The exit finish command is not sent from the finisher when passing 15s after the BR exit sensor turns off

J9000: No original feed

The DP feed sensor does not turn on after the paper feed was retried.

1 Checking the original The original leading edge has Correct or replace the original
a dog-ear, is curled, wavy or
others.
2 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.
3 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the If foreign objects adhere, remove them
original.
4 Checking the original The originals are stapled Remove the staple
7-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Checking the original Too many originals are loaded Reduce the original stack volume to the
specified
6 Checking the original width The location of the original Align the original width guides to the original
guides width guides and the original size.
size are mismatched.
7 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by a If there is a piece of paper, foreign objects on
piece of paper. the conveying path, remove them.
8 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of the Clean the pickup pulley surface. If worn
pickup pulley is not enough. down, replace it.
9 Checking the DP feed roller The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn
the DP feed roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.
10 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor does not Execute U244 [Feed]. If the DP feed sensor
operate correctly. does not operate normally, check the
actuator, spring and sensor connector. If not
repaired, replace the sensor.
11 Checking the DP feed clutch The DP feed clutch does not Check the DF feed clutch. If it does not
12 Checking the DP feed motor The DP feed motor does not Execute U243 [Feed Motor]. If the DP feed
operate correctly. motor does not operate correctly, reattach it
replace it.
13 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.
J9001: DP conveying jam

The DP timing sensor off is detected before the specified time after it turns on

specification is fed. specifications.
2 Checking the DP timing DP timing sensor does not Execute U244 [Timing]. If the DP timing
sensor operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it
replace it.
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

An unspecified conveying sensor turns on when starting paper conveying.

1 Specifying the sensor Specify the sensor which is Specified the sensor turning on at U244 and
turned on go to the next step
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If there is a piece of paper, foreign objects,
remaining on the paper etc. the conveying path, remove them.
conveying path to turn on the
sensor.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Clean and reattach the sensor specified at
correctly. U244 and reconnect the connector. If not
repaired, replace it.
7-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9004: DP switchback jam

During the reversing duplex scanning, the DP registration sensor does not turn on when passing the specified time after
the DP timing sensor turns off.

2 Checking the DP conveying The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
roller performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
conveying roller is insufficient.
3 Checking the DP feed-shift The original is hooked with the Check the DP feed-shift guide. If deformed,
guide DP feed-shift guide. replace it.
4 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor does Execute U243 [Rev Motor]. If the DP feed-
motor not operate correctly. shift motor does not operate correctly,
reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
5 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift sensor does Reattach the DP feed-shift sensor and
sensor not operate correctly. reconnect the connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
6 Checking the DP registration The DP registration sensor Execute U244 [Regist]. If the DP registration
sensor does not operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it
replace it.
J9010: DP cover open jam

The DP is opened during the original conveying

1 Checking the DP The DP is not connected Check if the DP is closed securely. Reattach
properly it if necessary.
2 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Option]. If the DP open/close
closing switch switch does not operate switch does not operate normally, reattach it
properly. and reconnect the connector.
J9011: DP top cover open jam

The DP top cover opens during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover is faulty. Check if the DP top cover closes securely
and reattach it if necessary. If the DP top
cover is deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover switch does Execute U244 [Cover Open]. If the DP top
switch not operate properly. cover switch does not operate correctly,
reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor or DP registration sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time after the DP timing sensor
turned on.
7-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]

others.
3 Checking the front DP The paper separation force of Clean the DP front separation pad and DP
separation pad and DP the DP front separation pad separation pulley. If worn down, replace
separation pulley and DP separation pulley is them.
not enough
4 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor or DP Clean and reattach the DP feed sensor and
and DP registration sensor registration sensor does not DP registration sensor and then reconnect
operate normally the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
5 Checking the DP feed clutch The rotation of the DP feed Check the DF feed clutch. If it does not
roller does not stop while the operate correctly, reattach it and reconnect
DP feed clutch remains the connector. If not repaired, replace it.
engaged.
J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn on when passing the specified time after the DP timing sensor turns on

others.
5 Checking the DP registration The DP registration sensor Execute U244 [Regist]. If the DP registration
sensor does not operate correctly. sensor does not operate correctly, reattach it
replace it.
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn on when passing the specified time after the DP registration sensor turns

others.
7-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]

replace it.
J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn off when passing the specified time after it turns on

others.
5 Checking the DP conveying The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
roller performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
conveying roller is insufficient.
replace it.
7-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Other Feeding/Conveying Failures

No. Contents Condition
(1) Paper creases (Fuser factor)
(2) Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor)
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(4-1)Paper creases (Fuser factor)
Condition: The image is printed on the crease section. (Fuser factor)
1 Checking the paper Paper is curled caused by the Flip paper upside down and reset. Or,
moisture absorption. Or, paper replace with new paper which is unopened
leading edge is waving. paper.
2 (When the paper is skewed) Paper is caught in the rear If a piece of paper or foreign objects are on
Checking the rear transfer transfer guide, discharge the conveying path, or foreign objects or
guide and the discharge needle, a piece of paper, etc.. burrs are on the rear transfer guide or the
needle. discharge needle, remove them or replace
them.
3 (If occurring under a specific The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via the System
condition) Changing the paper settings (media type, Menu.
setting paper size) do not match.
4 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in a damp Install the cassette heater if necessary.
place place. Also, ask users to store paper in a dry place.
5 Checking the transfer roller The transfer roller is dirty with Clean the transfer roller. If the surface is
the toner, paper dust or others, worn down, replace it.
or it is worn down.
6 Replacing the fuser unit The center of the fuser Check the pressure balance of both ends of
pressure roller is worn out. the fuser unit by checking the nipped
The front and rear pressure pressure on the solid image. If the balance is
spring are not attached uneven, replace the fuser unit.
properly.
(4-2)Paper creases (Registration or Transfer factor)

Condition: The image is not printed on the crease section. (Registration, transfer factor)
1 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
2 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove paper that the foreign objects
paper. adhere from the cassette.
3 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (conveying unit) once,
right cover closed. and close it firmly.
4 (When the paper is being The set position of the paper Reset the paper width guide or the MP paper
conveyed obliquely) Resetting width guides / MP paper width width guide matches to paper size. Or, check
the paper width guide or MP guides is mismatched with the set position of the support guide. (Excluding
paper width guide paper size, and so, the paper the cassette1)
is skewed.
5 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
7-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Checking the conveying Conveying related rollers are Clean the surface of the conveying related
rollers not attached properly. Or, the rollers and the pulleys (vertical conveying,
conveying capability is not middle, registration) and reattach.
enough due to dirty.
7 (When paper is skewed) Pressure balance is not good Check the pressure of the conveying related
Checking the pressure spring because the pressure spring rollers and the pulleys, and if the spring or
of front and back of the roller the bearings are dropped off, reattach them.
are not attached properly. If they are deformed or worn out, replace
them.
8 (When the paper skew occurs) Paper is caught at the If a piece of paper, the foreign objects are on
Checking the paper path conveying guide, piece of the conveying path, or the foreign objects, a
paper, etc.. burr are on the conveying surface of the
conveying guide, remove or replace them. If
the sheet guide material has a damage,
deformation, floating, repair or replace them.
7-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic
7 - 3 Self Diagnostic
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Caution
Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power
switch off and unplug the machine from power.
Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric charge may
remain in the capacitors on the low voltage PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the mounted parts to
protect you from electric shock.
7-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)Self diagnostic error codes

(1-1)Error codes list
Error code Contents
C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0060 Engine PWB communication error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0140 Backup memory data error
C0150 Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0190 Backup memory device error (Engine)
C0500 Drive lock detected by the Engine firmware
C0510 High-voltage remote control error
C0520 Developer control error
C0530 Backup task error
C0540 Engine firmware unexpected control detection
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error
C0870 PC FAX Image data transmission error
C0920 FAX file system error
C0980 24V power interruption detection
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 PF lift motor 1 error
C1030 PF lift motor 2 error
C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
C2000 Main motor steady state error
C2010 Main motor startup error
C2101 Developer motor steady state error
C2111 Developer motor start-up error
C2300 Fuser motor steady state error
C2310 Fuser motor start-up error
C2600 PF motor error
C3100 Carriage error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 LED error
C3200 CISerror
C3300 CCD AGC error
C3300 CIS AGC error
C3500 Scanner AISC communication error
C3600 Scanner sequence error
C4001 Polygon motor synchronization error
7-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

C4011 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 BD initialization error
C5101 Main high-voltage error
C6000 Fuser main heater broken wire
C6020 Fuser thermopile error
C6030 Fuser thermopile wire break detection
C6050 Fuser thermopile low temperature error
C6200 Broken fuser sub heater
C6220 Fuser thermistor high temperature error
C6230 Broken fuser thermistor detection
C6250 Fuser thermistor low temperature error
C6400 Zero-cross signal error
C6610 Pressure release error
C6650 Fuser thermopile EEPROM error
C7200 Inner thermistor broken (developer)
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)
C7800 Outer thermistor broken
C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C8030 DF tray upper limit detection error
C8040 DF belt error
C8140 Dr tray motor error
C8210 DF staple error
C8320 DF adjuster motor 2 error
C8330 DF adjuster motor 1error
C8350 DF roller motor error
C8360 DF slide motor error
C8460 EEPROM error
C8800 Document finisher communication error
C8830 Relay conveying unit communication error
C8990 Finisher setup error
C9000 DP communication error
C9060 DP EEPROM error
Content of Self Diagnostic

C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power plug. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power plug and turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.
C0060: Engine PWB communication error

Error was detected at the initial communication of the Engine PWB
7-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Resetting the main power The Engine PWB does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the connector (YC12) terminal on the
connected. Engine PWB and re-insert the connector
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable
installed. model.
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
2 Checking the main PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
the wire, FFC, the PWB is wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

2 Checking the MAC address The MAC address is incorrect. Replace the main PWB when the MAC
address is not indicated on the network
status page.
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

7-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C0140: Backup memory data error

The flash memory data read at the initial start-up is faulty

C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error

1. Continuous five times detection of no response from the device for 5ms or more on reading / writing.
2. Data read twice do not match continuous 8 times.
3. Writing data and reading data do not match continuous 8 times.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Engine Turn off the power switch and unplug the
PWB does not operate power plug. After 5s passes, reconnect the
properly. power plug and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the EEPROM on the The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the Engine PWB.
Engine PWB attached.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. 1. Print Maintenance Report at U000
beforehand.
2. Replace the EEPROM on the Engine
PWB. C0180 appears when turning the
power on. Execute U004 at that state.
3. Then, print Maintenance Report at U000.
Compare the setting values with
Maintenance Report printed before and
change the different values. (Target
maintenance mode: U051, U065, U067,
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
4. Check the output image and adjust the
image at U410, etc. if necessary.
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Engine Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly. power plug and turn on the power switch.
7-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021.
EEPROM on the Engine PWB
is faulty.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. 1. Print Maintenance Report at U000
beforehand.
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
C0170: Charger count error

1. Errors are detected in both backup memory of the Engine PWB charge counter and main PWB charge counter.
2. Main PWB counter data and Engine PWB counter date are faulty

1 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB and execute U004
2 Replacing the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. 1. Print Maintenance Report at U000
the Engine PWB beforehand.
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the Engine PWB mismatch when turning the power on.

1 Checking the machine serial The main PWB for the Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
No. of the main PWB different main unit is installed. Engine at U004, and install the correct main
PWB if the MAIN No. differs.
2 Checking the machine serial The EEPROM for the different Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
No. in the EEPROM on the main unit is installed. Engine at U004, and install the correct
Engine PWB EEPROM on the Engine PWB if the Engine
machine serial No. differs.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine serial No. differs at
U004, replace the main PWB and execute
U004.
7-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Checking the EEPROM on the The EEPROM is faulty. If the machine serial number on the Engine
Engine PWB PWB is different at U004, reattach the
EEPROM. If not repaired, replace the
EEPROM on the Engine PWB.
1. Print Maintenance Report at U000
beforehand.
U100, U101, U161, etc.)
C0190: Backup memory device error (Engine)

Data from the main unit IC cannot be read out at power-up

1 Resetting the main power The IC in the Engine PWB Turn off the power switch and unplug the
does not operate normally power plug. After 5s passes, reconnect the
C0500: Drive lock detected by the Engine firmware

During the Engine steady state control, the main motor drive continued 60 minutes or more (except during the
maintenance mode)

1 Resetting the main power The firmware in the Engine Turn off the power switch and unplug the
normally power plug and turn on the power switch.
C0510: High-voltage remote control error

Only the high-voltage remote signal turns on while the drum is stopped

C0520: Developer control error

The developer bias off is detected during the main charge bias off
7-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C0530: Backup task error

No operation 30s or more when monitoring the backup task operation

C0540: Engine firmware unexpected control detection

Eject switching solenoid turned on over the specified time

C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) is detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only when handling
the certain image data, check if the image
data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of the Acquire the job's log if the phenomenon can
certain file is faulty. be reproduced by specifying the job when
the error was detected.
C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
connected properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
faulty.
7-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C0840: RTC error

• Not communicated with RTC correctly.
• RTC data is inconsistent with empty battery.

1 Setting time and date (RTC) Time and date (RTC) are Set Date and Time (RTC) from System Menu
erased
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty, or the Replacing the main PWB
backup battery runs out.
C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version.
C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

2 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
incorrect
3 Reconnecting the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not Reinstall FAX PWB to Main PWB.
connected properly.
C0980: 24V power interruption detection

• 24V power shutoff signal is detected 1s continuously.
• Other service call error occurs after 24V power shutoff signal is lowered, and then 24V power is recovered.
7-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. When the +24V generation from the low
PWB voltage PWB is not stable, and it lowers,
replace the low voltage PWB.
C1010: Lift motor 1 error

• Cassette 1 lift motor over-current is detected 5 times continuously.
• Lift sensor on is not detected 5 times continuously when passing 15s after cassette 1 is loaded.

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate Repair or replace the lift plate when it does
properly. not move vertically.
• Lift motor - Engine PWB (YC18)
• Lift sensor - Engine PWB (YC19)
3 Checking the lift motor The lift motor is faulty. Check the lift motor operation, and replace it
if necessary.
4 Checking the lift sensor The lift sensor is not properly Reattach PF lift upper limit sensor. If not
attached, or it is faulty. repaired, replace it.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the Engine firmware to the latest
version. version
C1020: PF lift motor 1 error

The PF lift sensor 1 on is not detected 5 times continuously when passing 15s after loading cassette 2.

• PF lift moor 1 - PF PWB (YC4)
• PF upper limit sensor 1 - PF PWB (YC3)
3 Checking PF lift motor 1 PF lift motor 1 is faulty. Check the operation of lift motor 1, and
4 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift sensor 1 is not properly Reattach PF lift sensor 1. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
5 PF firmware upgrade The PF firmware is not the Upgrade the PF firmware to the latest
latest version. version.
7-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C1030: PF lift motor 2 error

Object: 500-sheetx2 paper feeder
The PF lift sensor 2 on is not detected 5 times continuously when passing 15s after loading cassette 3.

3 Checking PF lift motor 2 PF lift motor 2 is faulty. Check the operation of lift motor 2, and
4 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift sensor 2 is not properly Reattach PF lift sensor 2. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
5 PF firmware upgrade The PF firmware is not the Upgrade the PF firmware to the latest
latest version. version.
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

The communication error was detected 10 times continuously.

• Engine PWB (YC6) - PF PWB (YC1)
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the Engine firmware and PF
version. firmware to the latest version
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

For internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 4 times continuously when writing.

• Engine PWB (YC6) - PF PWB (YC1)
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the Engine firmware and PF
version. firmware to the latest version
7-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2000: Main motor steady state error

The main motor steady state off is detected 1s continuously after becoming the steady state

1 Checking the main motor The main motor drive is faulty Execute U030 [Main] and check the main
motor operation. Check if the gear rotates or
load is heavy in excess
• Main motor - Engine PWB (YC24)
version. version
4 Replacing the main motor The main motor is faulty. Replace the main motor.
C2010: Main motor startup error

The main motor is not in the steady state within 3s after start-up

1 Checking the main motor The main motor drive is faulty Execute U030 [Main] and check the main
motor operation. Check if the gear rotates or
load is heavy in excess
• Main motor - Engine PWB (YC24)
version. version
4 Replacing the main motor The main motor is faulty. Replace the main motor.
C2101: Developer motor steady state error

Developer motor steady state off is detected 1s continuously after the steady state

1 Checking the developer motor The developer motor drive is Execute U030 [DLP] and check the
faulty. developer motor operation. Check if the
gears in the drive unit rotate and there is
heavy load in excess.
• Developer motor - Engine PWB (YC25)
version. version
4 Replacing the developer The developer motor is faulty. Replace the developer motor.
motor
C2111: Developer motor start-up error

Developer motor is not in the steady state within 3s after start-up
7-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Checking the developer motor The developer motor drive is Execute U030 [DLP] and check the
faulty. developer motor operation. Check if the
gears in the drive unit rotate and there is
heavy load in excess.
• Developer motor - Engine PWB (YC25)
version. version
4 Replacing the developer The developer motor is faulty. Replace the developer motor.
motor
C2300: Fuser motor steady state error

The fuser motor steady state off is detected 1s continuously after becoming steady state

1 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor drive is faulty Execute U030 [Fuser] and check the fuser
motor operation. Check if the gears in the
drive unit rotate and there is heavy load in
excess.
• Fuser motor - Engine PWB(YC24)
version. version
4 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Replace the fuser motor.
C2310: Fuser motor start-up error

The fuser motor is not in the steady state within 3s after start-up

1 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor drive is faulty Execute U030 [Fuser] and check the fuser
motor operation. Check if the gears in the
drive unit rotate and there is heavy load in
excess.
• Fuser motor - Engine PWB(YC24)
version. version
4 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Replace the fuser motor.
7-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2600: PF motor error

An error signal was detected 2s continuously during the PF motor drive

• PF motor - PFPWB (YC2)
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the PF firmware to the latest
version. version.
3 Checking the PF motor The PF motor is faulty Replace the PF motor
C3100: Carriage error

Object: CCD model
The home position sensor is off and does not turn on when passing the specified time at initialization and it does not turn
on at retry once.

1 Unlocking the primary mirror The primary mirror unit is not Unlock the primary mirror unit.
unit unlocked.
2 Checking the scanner and A load is applied to the Move the mirror unit manually. If there is
scanner wire scanner movement. heavy load in excess, clean the scanner
wire, wire drum, scanner rail, etc.
wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.•
Scanner motor - Engine PWB
4 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor or belt Reattach the scanner motor and adjust the
and the belt tension. tension is faulty belt tension. If not repaired, replace the
scanner motor.
5 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor. If not
sensor faulty. repaired, replace it.
version. version
C3100: Carriage error

Object: CIS model
The home position sensor is off and does not turn on when passing the specified time at initialization and it does not turn
on at retry once.

1 Checking the scanner and ISU A load is applied to the Move the mirror unit manually. If there is
shaft scanner movement. heavy load in excess, check the drive belt
and clean the ISU shaft.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the wire connectors
connected properly, or the and reconnect the connectors. If there is no
wire is faulty. continuity, replace the wire.
• Scanner motor - Engine PWB
7-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor is faulty. Reattach the scanner motor. If not repaired,
replace it.
4 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor. If not
sensor faulty. repaired, replace it.
version. version
C3200: LED error

Object: CCD model
The white reference data retrieved by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or less.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not light. Check if the LED lamp lights. If it does not
light, replace the lamp unit and execute U411
[Table].
• LED drive PWB - Main PWB (YC3003)
3 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and execute U411.
version. version
C3200: CISerror
Object: CIS model
• The white reference data retrieved by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is lower than the specified value.
• The white reference data retrieved by lighting the lamp at the auto table adjustment is lower than the specified value.

1 Checking the CIS lamp The CIS lamp does not light Check if the CIS lamp turns on. If not,
replace the lamp unit and execute U411
[Table]
• CIS PWB - Main PWB (YC3001)
version. version
C3300: CCD AGC error

Object: CCD model
For internal count
The white reference data after adjustment is not within the target range
7-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Cleaning the backside of the The white reference sheet is Clean the white reference sheet at the
contact glass dirty. backside of the contact glass.
2 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp is broken. Check if the LED lamp lights. If it does not
light, replace the lamp unit and execute U411
[Table].
• LED drive PWB - Main PWB (YC3003)
4 Replacing the lens unit The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the lens unit and execute U411.
version. version
C3300: CIS AGC error

Object: CIS model
For internal count
The white reference data after adjustment is not within the target range

1 Cleaning the backside of the The white reference sheet is Clean the white reference sheet at the
contact glass dirty. backside of the contact glass.
2 Checking the CIS lamp The CIS lamp does not light Check if the CIS lamp turns on. If not,
replace the lamp unit and execute U411
[Table]
• CIS PWB - Main PWB (YC3001)
version. version
C3500: Scanner AISC communication error

Readback values are different 4 times continuously during communication between the scanner and ASIC

• Main PWB (YC26) - Engine PWB (YC3)
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware and the Engine
version. firmware to the latest version.
C3600: Scanner sequence error

• Mail box buffer overflow is detected.
• Software sequence error is detected.
7-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Executing U021 The memory operation is Execute U021 and initialize the backup data
faulty.
• Main PWB (YC26) - Engine PWB (YC3)
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error

The polygon motor does not become steady state when passing 10s after starting the drive

• Polygon motor - Engine PWB(YC23)
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it
does not rotate properly.
version. version
C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error

Steady state off is detected 1s continuously after the polygon motor is in the steady state

• Polygon motor - Engine PWB(YC23)
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it
does not rotate properly.
version. version
C4101: BD initialization error

BD is not detected within 1s after the polygon motor is in the steady state

• APC PWB(YC1) - Main PWB(YC24)
• Main PWB(YC26) - Engine PWB(YC3)
7-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the LSU The APC PWB does not Reattach or replace the LSU
operate normally
C5101: Main high-voltage error

When measuring the rush-in current by changing the Vpp in 3 steps at the Vpp adjustment, the difference between zero
current value and the third step current value is 5 or less.

1 Checking the drum unit and The drum or the drum screw Check if the drum or drum screw rotates by
the developer unit does not rotate properly due to manually and if not, replace the drum unit.
the excessive load.
2 Checking the main motor The main motor is faulty. Replace the main motor.
3 Checking the main charger Since foreign objects adhere Check the main charger unit high voltage
unit to the main charger high- contact. Clean it if foreign objects adhere.
voltage contact, it is deformed Replace the main charger unit if deformed or
or damaged, proper current damaged and clear the main charger roller
does not flow. counter at U930.
• high voltage PWB - Engine PWB (YC10)
5 Checking the high-voltage The high-voltage PWB is Replace the high-voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
version. version
C6000: Fuser main heater broken wire

1. The fuser thermopile does not detect 100°C/212°F within 20s after starting warm-up.
2. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the fuser thermistor does reach the edge ready temperature within 60s
after detecting 100°C/212°F.

1 Reinstalling the fuser unit There are foreign objects in Clean the drawer connector terminal of the
the drawer contact terminal of fuser unit. Check if the pin of the drawer
the fuser unit connector is not bent, and replace the fuser
unit if it is bent. If it is normal, reinstall the
fuser unit so that the drawer connector is
securely connected.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the wire connector terminal and
connected properly, or the reconnect it. If there is no continuity, replace
wire is faulty. the wire.
• Fuser heater - Low-voltage PWB (YC4)
• Thermal cutout - Low-voltage PWB (TB3)
• Fuser thermopile - Engine PWB (YC13)
3 Replacing the fuser thermopile The fuser thermopile does not Replace the fuser thermopile.
detect temperature correctly
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heater, thermal Replace the fuser unit.
cutout or others is faulty
7-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB
version. version
C6020: Fuser thermopile error

The fuser thermopile detects high temperature 1s continuously

PWB
version. version
C6030: Fuser thermopile wire break detection

1. During warm-up, the fuser thermopile detected the abnormal outer temperature output value for 1s.
2. During warm-up, the fuser thermopile detected the abnormal target output value for 1s.

2 Replacing the fuser thermopile The fuser thermopile is faulty Replace the fuser thermopile.
version. version
C6050: Fuser thermopile low temperature error

The fuser thermopile detected 100°C/212°F or less 1s continuously during printing

PWB
version. version
7-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C6200: Broken fuser sub heater

1. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the fuser thermistor does not reach 100°C/212°F within 60s after
starting warm-up.
2. During warm-up, the temperature detected by the fuser thermistor does not reach the edge ready temperature within
60s after detecting 100°C/212°F.

securely connected.
• Fuser thermistor - Engine PWB (YC13)
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser sub heater, fuser Replace the fuser unit.
thermistor, or others is faulty
PWB
version. version
C6220: Fuser thermistor high temperature error

The fuser thermistor detected high temperature 1s continuously

securely connected.
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor does not Replace the fuser unit.
PWB
version. version
7-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6230: Broken fuser thermistor detection

The fuser thermistor detects 42°C/108°F or less while the fuser thermopile detects 100°C/212°F or more during warm-
up

securely connected.
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor is faulty Replace the fuser unit.
version. version
C6250: Fuser thermistor low temperature error

The fuser thermistor detected 60 degree C or less 1s continuously during printing

securely connected.
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor is faulty Replace the fuser unit.
PWB
version. version
C6400: Zero-cross signal error

No zero-cross signal continued 3s during the heater control
7-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• Engine PWB (YC14) - Low-voltage PWB
(YC8)
PWB
version. version
C6610: Pressure release error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor changing from on to off is not detected when passing 10s after starting the fuser
pressure decrease.
2. The fuser pressure release sensor changing from off to on is not detected when passing 10s after starting the fuser
pressure increase.

securely connected.
• Engine PWB (YC21) - Fuser pressure
release motor
• Engine PWB (YC13) - Fuser pressure
release sensor
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty at the Replace the fuser unit.
fuser pressure release
mechanism or the fuser
pressure release sensor .
C6650: Fuser thermopile EEPROM error

1. Access to the thermopile EEPROM is not available.
2. During scanning, no response from the device is detected 5ms or more 5 times continuously.

• Fuser thermopile - Engine PWB(YC13)
version. version
7-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7200: Inner thermistor broken (developer)

The input sampling value of the sensor is at the reference value or more.

1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit so that the connector
properly installed. connects securely.
• Developer relay PWB - Engine PWB (YC8)
3 Developer unit replacement The sensor on the developer Replace the developer unit.
PWB is faulty
version. version
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

The sensor input sampling value is at the reference value or less

1 Reinstalling the developer unit The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit so that the connector
properly installed. connects securely.
• Developer relay PWB - Engine PWB (YC8)
3 Developer unit replacement The sensor on the developer Replace the developer unit.
PWB is faulty
version. version
C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the sensor is at the reference value or more.

• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine
PWB (YC9)
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
version. version
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The sensor input sampling value is at the reference value or less
7-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine
PWB (YC9)
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
version. version
C8030: DF tray upper limit detection error

Object: 500-sheet document finisher
The DF tray upper limit sensor on is detected when the DF tray motor is in ascending operation

• DF tray upper limit sensor - DFPWB (CN5)
• Paper level sensor 1, 2 - DFPWB (CN6)
2 Replacing the sensor The Dr tray upper limit sensor, Replace the DF tray upper limit sensor or
paper level sensor 1 or 2 is paper level sensor.
faulty
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DP firmware to the latest
version. version.
C8040: DF belt error

The DF belt sensor on or off cannot be detected when passing the specified time after the DF belt solenoid turns on

• DF belt sensor - DF PWB (CN10)
• DF belt solenoid - DF PWB (CN21)
2 Replacing the DF belt sensor DF belt sensor is faulty Replace DF belt sensor
3 Replacing the DF belt solenoid DF belt solenoid is faulty Replace DF belt solenoid
version. version.
C8140: Dr tray motor error

During the DF tray motor drive, the DF tray lower limit sensor, paper level sensor 1 and 2 on is not detected within 10s.
7-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]

• DF tray motor - DF PWB (CN15)
• DF tray lower limit sensor - DF PWB (CN5)
• Paper level sensor1, 2 - DF PWB (CN6)
2 Replacing the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor.
3 Replacing the sensor The DF tray lower limit sensor, Replace the DF tray lower limit sensor or
paper level sensor 1 or 2 is paper level sensor.
faulty
version. version.
C8210: DF staple error

JAM7013 and 7023 was detected twice

• DF staple unit - DF PWB
version. version.
C8320: DF adjuster motor 2 error

The DF adjusting sensor 2 on or off cannot be detected when passing the specified time after the DF adjusting motor 2
turns on

• DF adjusting motor 2 - DFPWB (CN18)
• DF adjusting sensor 2 - DFPWB (CN7)
2 Replacing DF adjusting motor DF adjusting motor 2 is faulty Replace DF adjusting motor 2
2
3 Replacing the DF adjusting DF adjusting sensor 2 is faulty Replace DF adjusting sensor 2
sensor 2
version. version.
7-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8330: DF adjuster motor 1error

The DF adjusting sensor 1 on or off cannot be detected when passing the specified time after the DF adjusting motor 1
turns on

wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.• DF
adjusting motor 1 - DFPWB(CN18)
• DF adjusting sensor 1 - DFPWB(CN7)
2 Replacing DF adjusting motor DF adjusting motor 1 is faulty Replace DF adjusting motor 1
1
3 Replacing the DF adjusting DF adjusting sensor 1 is faulty Replace DF adjusting sensor 1
sensor 1
version. version.
C8350: DF roller motor error

The DF roller sensor on or off cannot be detected when passing the specified time after the DF roller motor turns on

• DF roller motor - DF PWB (CN20)
• DF roller sensor - DF PWB (CN11)
2 Replacing the DF roller sensor DF roller sensor is faulty Replace DF roller sensor
3 Replacing the DF roller motor The DF roller motor is faulty Replace DF roller motor
version. version.
C8360: DF slide motor error

The DF slide sensor on or off cannot be detected when passing the specified time after the DF slide motor turns on

• DF slide motor - DF PWB(CN14)
• DF slide sensor - DF PWB(CN22)
2 Replacing the DF slide sensor The DF slide sensor is faulty. Replace the DF slide sensor
3 Replacing the DF slide motor The DF slide motor is faulty. Replace the DF slide motor
version. version.
7-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C8460: EEPROM error

EEPROM read/write is not available

version. version.
C8800: Document finisher communication error


• Engine PWB (YC5) - DF relay PWB (YC2)
• DF relay PWB (YC3) - DF PWB (CN1)
version. version.
version. version
C8830: Relay conveying unit communication error

Object: 500-sheet document finisher + relay conveying unit

• Engine PWB (YC5) - DF relay PWB (YC2)
• DF relay PWB (YC4) - BR PWB (YC5)
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the BR firmware to the latest
version. version.
version. version
C8990: Finisher setup error

Object: 500-sheet document finisher + relay conveying unit
1. Communication error occurs with either the finisher or relay conveying unit.
7-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
2. Communication error occurs while installation of the relay conveying unit is detected

• DF PWB (CN1) - DF relay PWB (YC3)
• DF relay PWB (YC4) - BR PWB (YC5)
version. version.
C9000: DP communication error

Object: Document processor

1 Firmware upgrade The main unit firmware and Upgrade the main unit firmware and the
the document processor document processor firmware to the latest
firmware mismatch version.
• DP PWB (YC2) - Engine PWB (YC4)
C9060: DP EEPROM error

The writing data and the reading data into the EEPROM mismatch.

1 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the DP PWB.
installed.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the DP PWB, then
execute U411.
7-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C9180: DP feed-shift motor error

1. The DP feed-shift motor home position cannot be detected even driving it for one round.
2. The DP feed-shift motor home position cannot be detected even after retrying the detection for 3 times.

• DP feed-shift motor - DP PWB (YC7)
• DP feed-shift sensor - DP PWB (YC4)
• DP PWB (YC2) - Engine PWB (YC18)
2 Replacing the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift sensor is Replce the DP feed-shift sensor.
sensor faulty.
3 Replacing the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is Replace the DP feed-shift motor.
motor faulty.
7-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

(2-1)System Error code list
Error code Contents

F000 Main unit CPU communication error (Controller - Panel)
F010 Program read error
F020 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
F040 Communication error between the main unit CPU (Communication error between the controller and Engine)
F050 Engine program error
F052 Panel Engine program error
(2-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

F000: Main unit CPU communication error (Controller - Panel)
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel main
PWB is unavailable.

1 Resetting the main power The communication between Turn off the power switch and pull out the
the main PWB and the power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
operation panel main PWB is power plug and turn on the power switch.
faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the wire, the terminal of SATA cable
connected properly. Or, the connector and reconnect them. If there is no
wire or the SATA cable is continuity, replace the wire.
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel PWB
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM
faulty. data.
5 Replacing the operation panel The operation panel main Replace the panel main PWB.
main PWB PWB is faulty.
F010: Program read error

Data corruption is detected at the program read

faulty.
faulty. data.
F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

faulty.
7-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]

faulty. data.
F040: Communication error between the main unit CPU (Communication error between the
controller and Engine)
There is an error in the communication between the main PWB and the Engine PWB.

1 Resetting the main power There is an error in the Turn off the power switch and pull out the
communication between the power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
main PWB and the Engine power plug and turn on the power switch.
PWB.
• Engine PWB (YC3) - Main PWB (YC26)
F050: Engine program error

The Engine program cannot start up.

version. version
2 Resetting the main power The Engine firmware Turn off the power switch and pull out the
checksum is faulty. power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM.
attached.
4 Checking the Engine PWB The connector or the FFC is Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly. Or, Engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
faulty. wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the Engine PWB.
F052: Panel Engine program error

The panel program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the panel firmware to the latest
version. version.
2 Resetting the main power The panel RAM checksum is Turn off the power switch and pull out the
faulty. power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
7-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
connected properly, or the operation panel PWB, reconnect the
wire is faulty. connector of the wire. If there is no continuity,
replace the wire.
7-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis
error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
Important
• Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
- Check the DIMM (DDR memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by
releasing and reinserting the DIMM.
If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM.
• Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after
turning the power off and then on.
Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
- It locks on a Welcome (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>SSD), * Execution of U024 will
screen.It locks on a and the connection state of a connector between vanish user data and the
starting logo (Taskalfa/ Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check. software installed.
Ecosys) screen.(Even if (2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and Reinstallation is required.
time passes for a definite perform an operation check. If exchangeable, it will
period of time in more exchange and will perform an operation check.
than * notes, a screen
(3) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
does not change)
(4) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(5) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
check.
(6) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(7) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.
* : only SSD standard model
F000 CF000 will be displayed if (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>SSD),
* notes progress is and the connection state of a connector between
carried out for a definite Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check.
period of time with a (2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and
Welcome screen.The perform an operation check. If exchangeable, it will
communication fault exchange and will perform an operation check.
between Panel-Main
boards.Communication
fault between Panel Core- (4) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
Main Core Notes 2 operation check is performed.
(6) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
check.
(7) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.
* : only SSD standard model
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
7-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F12X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards,
Scan control section and the connection state of a connector, and perform an
operation check.
(4) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation
check.
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only SSD standard model
F14X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and [Confirmation of KUIO
FAX control part the connection state of a connector, and perform an connector connection]
operation check. Is fax board in the lower slot?
(2) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Is the orientation of the fax
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an board correct?
(4) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by
U671. * Notes(Since it disappears when received data
remain, cautions are required.)
(5) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. *
Notes
(6) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
F15X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between authentication device Authentication device: Card
an authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection situation of a reader etc.
control section connector, and perform an operation check.
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(5) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F17X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
printer data control part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
7-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F18X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and
Video control section the connection state of a connector, and perform an
operation check.
(4) Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation
check.
F1DX Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * * Poor arrangement of
the image memory (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an F1D4:Random Access
Management Department operation check. Memory(1) Confirmation of
U340(2) Initialization of a set
point (U021)
F21X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an
an image-processing part operation check.
F22X
F23X (3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F24X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an * F248 is the abnormalities of
the system Management operation check. a printer process.In recurring
Department (2) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * by specific printer data,
please give me cooperation
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
at acquisition of capture data
operation check.
and USBLOG.
(5) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check.*
F25X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * [Main body to External
network management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an network]
department operation check. Ethernet connector
(4) Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service * It may occur according to a
headquarters. visitor's networkenvironment.
F26X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
the system Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F27X Department operation check.
F28X (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F29X (4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F2AX
7-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F2BX Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * [Main body to External
network control part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an network]
F2CX
operation check. Ethernet connector
F2DX (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2EX 4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
(Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture
F2FX acquisition)
F30X
F31X
F32X
F33X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards,
the Scan Management and the connection state of a connector, and perform an
Department operation check.
(4) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation
check.
F34X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and
the Panel Management the connection state of a connector, and perform an
Department operation check. * Notes
(4) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation
check. * Notes
* Note : A Dual Core CPU model and HyPAS model
the printing controlling (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
Management Department operation check.
7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
the FAX Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
(3) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by
U671.(Since it disappears when received data remain,
cautions are required.) * notes
(4) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. *
Notes
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main
board
the authentication (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
authorized Management operation check.
Department
F3AX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
the Entity Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F3BX Department operation check.
F3CX (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3DX (4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F3EX
F3FX
F40X
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X
F46X Abnormality detecting of a (1) Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of
printer rendering part (2) the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out(Depending a printer process.In recurring
on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) by specific printer data,
please give me cooperation
at acquisition of capture data
and USBLOG.
F47X Abnormality detecting of (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
an image editing (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
processing part operation check.
7-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
F4DX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
the Entity Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F50X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
the FAX Management (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
Department operation check. is needed for analysis, please
give me cooperation of
acquisition.
F52X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
JOB execution part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
F53X is needed for analysis, please
operation check.
F55X (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
acquisition.
F56X (4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F57X
F60X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. In case of F60A:
the maintenance mode/ (FULL of U024) * 60A is occurred when device
Remote Service (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an registered
Management Department operation check. Remote Service detects off-
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. line status with external
system.
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
Please check device Network
Settings and Network
* Only HDD standard model environment which device is
used
(include Disconnection rule/
status in night time and on
weekends.)
F63X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. *
device control section (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
F68X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * * F684 is the overwrite error
storage device control (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an at the time of an SSD security
section operation check. kit.
7-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
the extension application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
service part operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
management part operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
F9FX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
various service part operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
FC0X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
system application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
FC5X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
Copy application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FCAX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
Print application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
7-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
FCFX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
Send application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FD4X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
Box application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FD9X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
FAX application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FDEX Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
maintenance application (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
FF7X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
report creation part (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
acquisition.
[Controller problem]
Resolution is only power off /
* Only SSD standard model On.
the Data Access Platform (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
Service operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
7-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]

ber
FE3X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
authentication/ (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
authorization part operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
FF5X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize SSD and perform an operation check. * Since the USB log
the Application Entity (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an immediately after occurrence
Management Department operation check. is needed for analysis, please
acquisition.
7-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors
7 - 4 FAX Related Errors

(1)FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(2) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(3) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(4) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(5) C0920: FAX file system error
(6) The FAX cannot be sent
(7) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(8) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1)C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
(1-2)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable
installed. model.
(1-3)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

2 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB is not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
connected properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
faulty.
7-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version.
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD is Execute U024 [SSD Format].
faulty.
(1-5)C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
incorrect
3 Reconnecting the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not Reinstall FAX PWB to Main PWB.
connected properly.
(1-6)The FAX cannot be sent

1 Checking the connection of The modular cable Reconnect the modular cable.
the modular cable disconnects.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit to the
switching device or the like is telephone line.
connected to the telephone
line, it is affected.
3 Changing the setting The line settings are incorrect. Correct the line settings. (Reduce the
transmission speed, etc.)
4 Checking the status at the The destination unit is busy. Wait a while and then redial the number if
destination unit. busy tones are heard.
5 Checking the status at the The modular cable is Request the destination unit to reconnect the
destination unit. disconnected in the modular cable.
destination unit if the
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
7-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Checking the setting at the The manual reception is set in Ask the destination unit to change the
destination unit the destination unit if the reception settings.
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
7 Changing the sending content When transmitting the data to Input a pause at the last of the destination
the other country, the FAX number.
communication line is
automatically cut.
(1-7)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version. version.
(1-8)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the
A4 size data

1 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] according to the
destination unit is A4 / Letter. receivable size at the Address book
registration display > [i-FAX] > [Paper size].
2 Changing the setting The receivable size in the Select the condition of the destination unit
destination unit is A4 / Letter. when transmitting the data, choose [B4] or
[A3/Ledger] according to the receivable
sizes.
7-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Communication Errors
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U
followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-digit number)
Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits small
classification of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code
General classification of error code
Error code indication
Error code
Error code Contents
U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted number. Or, sub address-
based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID
in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was
not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address
box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not
registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 The optical section is faulty
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910/E00910 Some pages cannot be received after retry of transmission in the ECM mode
7-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN
signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
U01020/E01020 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending EOR•Q signal.
(ECM)
U01022/E01022 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028 T5 timeout is detected when sending in ECM (ECM)
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and communication speed
at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01095/E01095 Command send retry time is exceeded since the significant signal is not received after sending (PPS) Q signal
at phase D during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
7-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box specified by the
destination unit.
U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID
or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted
due to a mismatch in permitted ID or telephone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our
make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password was not registered in
the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified sub
address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no sub address bulletin
board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was not registered in the
destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did
not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Consequently, the transmission
was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or
the own unit did not return its phone number.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit can receive the
data and resend the data if there is no
particular problem.
U00100/E00100
1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
by a press of the stop/clear
key.
7-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00200/E00200
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted by Suspend resending from the destination unit
a press of the [Stop] key. or request the destination unit to resend the
data.
U00300/E00300
1 Request to the destination unit Recording paper on the Request the destination unit to set the
destination unit has run out recording papers.
during transmission.
U00430/E00430
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bulletin Register a valid permitted number
number board transmission were
requested, but the
communication was
interrupted because the
permitted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting unit.)
U00431/E00431
1 Request to the destination unit An sub address bulletin board Register the sub address password in the
transmission was interrupted destination unit.
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.
U00432/E00432
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin board Send by using correct the sub address
password transmission was interrupted password.
because the sub address
password did not match.
U00433/E00433
1 Checking the sub address box A sub address bulletin board Set data in the sub address box.
transmission request was
received but data was not
present in the sub address
box.
7-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00440/E00440
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address password.
password reception was interrupted
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
1 Checking the permitted The reception was interrupted Register the permitted number to be
number because the permitted ID and consistent at own machine side.
FAX number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check
transmission) in the
destination unit.
U00460/E00460
1 Checking the encryption key The encryption reception was Register an encrypted box number.
specified encryption box
number was not registered.
U00462/E00462
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key.
encryption key for the
specified encryption box was
not registered.
U00601/E00601
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and resend.
2 Checking the original The original length exceeds Check if the original length does not exceed
the maximum allowed. 1.6 meter and resend.
U00613/E00613
1 Checking the service call error The optical section is faulty Check the service call error record and
record perform the corrective actions.
7-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U00656/E00656
1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
because there was an error in
the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was interrupted Turn off the power switch and pull out the
because there was an error in power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
the modem. FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
version. version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
changed.
U00690/E00690
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and pull out the
power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
2 Measures for the system error System error in the main unit Perform the corrective actions for the system
error in the main unit.
U00800/E00800
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not properly sent and
speed occurred because of reception resending does not solve it, reduce transmit
of a RTN or PIN signal. start speed and resend the data.
U00811/E00811
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not properly sent and
remained after retry of resending does not solve it, reduce transmit
transmission in the ECM start speed and resend the data.
mode.
U00900/E00900
1 Re-reception An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a page not
transmitted because of a page transmitted properly.
reception error.
U00910/E00910
1 Re-reception Some pages cannot be Resend the page if there is a page not
received after retry of transmitted properly.
transmission in the ECM mode
7-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01000/E01000
1 Resending An FTT signal was received Resend.
for a set number of times after
TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal
was received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP) after
transmission at 2400 bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to reduce the
speed (Destination unit) transmit start speed. Then, resend the data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the default value of the transmit start
machine) speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01001/E01001
1 Resending Function as indicated by DIS Resend.
signal is not consistent with
the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since MBF Resend.
signal is received but DIS
signal is not after sending
EOM signal.
U01019/E01019
1 Resending Command send retrial times Resend.
exceeds since significant
signal is not received after
sending CNC signal. (between
own machines)
7-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01020/E01020
sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021
sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
U01022/E01022
sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected when Resend.
sending in ECM (ECM)
U01052/E01052
1 Resending DCN signal is received after Resend.
sending RR signal (ECM)
7-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U01080/E01080
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
U01092/E01092
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol speed
and communication speed at
V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX
since the received signal is Mm Level]. (Initial setting: -43dBm)
attenuated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
since the received signal is [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
response.
U01094/E01094
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send retrial Resend.
time is exceeded at phase B
during transmission.
7-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01095/E01095
1 Resending Command send retry time is Resend.
exceeded since the significant
sending (PPS) Q signal at
phase D during transmission.
U01096/E01096
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid Resend.
command is received at phase
D during transmission.
U01097/E01097
1 Resending The preset number of Resend.
command retransfers was
exceeded after transmission of
an RR signal or no response.
U01100/E01100
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request the destination unit to resend the
signal is not consistent with data.
the one of own machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].
U01101/E01101
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request the destination unit to resend the
signal except communication data.
type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
7-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01102/E01102
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is received Request the destination unit to resend the
while own machine has no data.
transmission data.
U01110/E01110
1 Request for resending No response is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DIS signal. data.
U01111/E01111
1 Request for resending No response is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DTC (NSC) signal. data.
U01113/E01113
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX
since the received signal is Mm Level]. (Initial setting: -43dBm)
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
since the received signal is [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
response.
U01125/E01125
1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request the destination unit to resend the
a CNS signal. (Between the data.
units of our make)
U01129/E01129
1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request the destination unit to resend the
an SPA signal. (Short data.
protocol)
7-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U01141/E01141
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending DTC signal. data.
U01143/E01143
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received after Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
sending FTT signal. [Rag G3 RX Ear]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
U01155/E01155
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request the destination unit to resend the
sending SPA signal. data.
(simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request the destination unit to resend the
per line is exceeded while data.
receiving message.
U01162/E01162
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request the destination unit to resend the
per line is exceeded while data.
receiving message.
U01191/E01191
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request the destination unit to resend the
with error during image data data.
receipt sequence at V.34.
7-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]

U01193/E01193
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal or Extend T2 time-out time in U641 [T2 TIME
invalid command is received OUT]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to
at phase C/D during reception. 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to
timing "9600bps" or less.
U01194/E01194
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request the destination unit to resend the
phase B during reception. data.
U01195/E01195
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in U641 [T2 TIME
phase C during reception. OUT]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to
150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to
timing "9600bps" or less.
U01196/E01196
1 Resending Error line control overflow and Resend.
decoding error occurred in
messages during reception.
U01400/E01400
1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" on Delete "#" from the registered numbers if "#"
number the phone numbers of the exists in advance of "x" on the phone
destination unit, so it is numbers of the destination unit.
processed as the invalid dial
line.
7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01500/E01500
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is the Execute U630 [TX Speed] to reduce the
speed poor condition. transmit start speed. Then, resend the data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of the transmit start
speed condition is poor and an error speed by executing U630 [TX Speed].
frequently occurs.
U01600/E01600
1 Request to the destination unit The communication line is the Request the destination unit to resend the
poor condition. data after reducing the transmit start speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit to resend the
timing condition is poor and an error data after lowering the reception start speed.
frequently occurs.
U01700/E01700
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
U01720/E01720
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4 (replacing
the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there is
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
7-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U01800/E01800
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit to resend the
occurred in phase 2 (line data after reducing the transmit start speed.
probing).
U01810/E01810
occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
U01820/E01820
occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
U01821/E01821
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit to resend the
interrupted because there is data after reducing the transmit start speed.
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
U03000/E03000
1 Request to the destination unit No document was present in Request the destination unit to set the
the destination unit when originals.
polling reception started.
7-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U03200/E03200
1 Request to the destination unit There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit to store the
address box in the main unit original data in the sub address box.
that are specified from the
destination unit.
U03300/E03300
1 Request to the destination unit The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit to register the
number registered in the own ID and the own FAX number as the
destination unit are incorrect. permitted ID and the permitted FAX number.
U03400/E03400
1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the
because the password input in receiversownFAXIDtoreceiveagain.'
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.
U03500/E03500
1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the
because the password input in receiversownFAXIDtoreceiveagain.'
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.
U03600/E03600
1 Resending Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after inputting the sub
reception was interrupted address password registered in the
because the specified sub destination unit.
address password did not
match.
U03700/E03700
1 Checking the destination unit Destination machine has no Check if the destination unit has a sub
sub address bulletin board address bulletin board communication
communication function or no function. If available, request the destination
originals are stored in any unit to save the original data in the sub
original delivery box (sub address box.
address box).
7-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U04000/E04000
1 Request to the destination unit The original was transmitted to Register the sub address password in the
the sub address box, but the destination unit.
specified box was not
registered in the destination
unit that is our own model.
2 Checking the sub address of The original was transmitted to Match the sub address in the FAX forward
the FAX transmission the sub address box in the condition
condition destination unit that is our own
model, but the sub address of
the transmission condition did
not match.
U04100/E04100
1 Resending The destination unit had no Transmit the data according to the reception
sub address reception function in the destination unit.
capability while the sub
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
1 Request to the destination unit In encrypted transmission, the Request the destination unit to register the
specified encryption box was encrypted box.
not registered in the
destination unit.
U04300/E04300
1 Resending The encryption transmission Transmit the data according to the reception
was carried out, but there is no function in the destination unit.
encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines.
7-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U05100/E05100
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the authorization
number interrupted because the number that has been registered.
permitted ID and FAX number
did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check
transmission).
U05200/E05200
1 Checking the settings The number does not match a Change the restricted reception settings.
permitted FAX number / ID, or
it matches a rejected FAX
number.
2 Request to the destination unit The own telephone number is Request the destination unit to register the
not informed from the own telephone number.
destination unit.
U05300/E05300
1 Request to the destination unit The number does not match a Ask the destination unit to change the
permitted FAX number / ID, or restricted reception settings.
it matches a rejected FAX
number.
2 Request to the destination unit The main unit did not Request the destination unit to register the
acknowledge its phone own telephone number.
number in question .
U14000/E14000
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX box Print documents stored in memory and make
was interrupted due to room in memory. Or stop receiving in the
memory overflow in its unit. FAX box.
U14100/E14100
1 Request to the destination unit Transmission was interrupted Request the destination unit to release
due to the memory overflow in memory.
the destination unit when
transmitting into the sub
address box.
U19000/E19000
1 Checking the memory The reception was interrupted Release memory by printing originals stored
due to the memory overflow in in memory.
the main unit during memory
reception.
7-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
U19100/E19100
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and pull out the
interrupted because there is power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
an error in the data during FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
transmission. turn on the power switch.
U19300/E19300
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and pull out the
interrupted because there is power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
an error in the data during FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
transmission. turn on the power switch.
version. version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
changed.
7-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors
7 - 5 Send Related Errors

(1)Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear
(3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the
security software settings

1 Changing the setting The incorrect port number has Change the SMB port number from "139" to
been set. "445".
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear

1 Changing the setting The Windows Fire Wall is not Open [Control panel] > [System and
properly set. (Windows Vista / Security] > Windows firewall] and select
7 / 8) [Permit the program or function through
Windows firewall]. Check [Share files and
printers] and the check box on the right as
well.
(1-3)The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent

1 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not set to Press [Send] key or [FAX] key, and select
[On]. [On] in [Advanced setup] > [Continuous
scan].
2 Changing the setting [Continuous Scan] is not set to Select [On] at [Functions] > [Continuous
[On]. scan]
7-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Sending Errors (Error Codes)

(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 SMTP protocol is invalid.
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Changing the setting SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Changing the setting The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Changing the setting The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Changing the setting The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 user name or
password is incorrect. password at [Function Settings] > [E-mail]
via the command center.
2 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.
7-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Changing the setting Destination address domain is Correct the settings in the Network Settings
restricted and transmission is via the Command Center.
denied.

SMTP protocol is invalid.

1 Checking the settings SMTP protocol is invalid. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
via the Command Center.

The sender address is not set.

1 Changing the setting The sender address is not set. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

command center.
2 Connecting the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
3 Changing the setting The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

command center.
2 Changing the setting The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
7-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]

incorrect.

The server cannot establish communication.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
port No.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
incorrect.
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

incorrect.

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

incorrect.

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

7-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

incorrect.

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Changing the setting The SMTP server settings are Set the correct SMTP Authentication
incorrect. Protocol at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via
the command center.

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Changing the setting The self-signed certificate of Correct the certificates in the Security
the device is incorrect. Settings via the Command Center.
2 Changing the setting The service certificate settings Correct the certificates in the Security
are incorrect. Settings via the Command Center.
3 Changing the setting The SMTP/POP3 settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a specific period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
7-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the
incorrect. Command Center.
incorrect.

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Correcting the user name or The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
2 Changing the setting FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting FTP protocol is not enabled. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings
device are incorrect. via the Command Center.

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Changing the setting The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings
device are incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Changing the setting The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
7-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
3 Correcting the FTP port no. The port number is incorrect. Correct the FTP port number.

Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

incorrect.

The server cannot establish communication.

incorrect.

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

7-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]

incorrect.
3 Correcting the destination The destination folder name is Set the correct destination folder.
folder name incorrect.

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

incorrect.

No response from the server during a specific period of time.

incorrect.

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

incorrect.

FTP server responded with an error.

incorrect.
7-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a specific period of time.
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Correcting the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
incorrect.

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the user name and The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
3 Changing the setting The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings of the
destination host / folder are destination host / folder.
incorrect.

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the destination host The invalid character is Correct the destination host name, folder
name, destination folder name included. name or the file name if the invalid
and the file name characters are included.
2 Correcting the destination The destination folder name or Revise the destination folder and file name
folder name and the file name the file name is incorrect. according to the naming rules.
3 Changing the setting of the The destination host or the Revise the destination host and destination
destination host and folder. destination folder is not set folder properly.
properly.
7-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]

SMB protocol is not enabled.

1 Changing the setting The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
protocol are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Login to the host has failed.

1 Correcting the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
3 Correcting the SMB port no. The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMB port number.
incorrect.

Writing scanned data has failed.

1 Correcting the sending file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file name.
name incorrect.
incorrect.

No response from the host during a specific period of time.

incorrect.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
7-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Print Errors
7 - 6 Print Errors
(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) The paper direction is incorrect
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(4) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver
and the main unit are mismatched.
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print.
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties
(8) Attention lamp is lit while the printer standby message The main unit locks up.
is indicated.
(9) Print is not available in sleep mode due to the main The main unit locks up.
unit startup error. Attention lamp is turned on.
(10) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up. The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the
Attention lamp on operation panel lights. main unit locks up.
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.
(1)
(12) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly
(2) connected.
(13) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate
(3) properly.
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.
(4)
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor "Offline" appears and the print function is unavailable.
(5)
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed. There is no error
(6) indication and print job will be held if print instruction is requested.
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor The main unit IP address is changed.
(7)
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting [Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be
(1) performed due to the error. (Can't print)
(19) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting [Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The
(2) printing document is not output and the job is held.
(20) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting A PC does not recognize the main unit.
(3)
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting PC operation does not stabilize.
(4)
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in
(5) the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting The incorrect printer driver was selected.
(6)
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it remains when
(7) reinstalling it
(25) The printed image is partly missing The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF)
is faulty.
(26) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears The paper size is not detected properly.
Content of Print Errors
7-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1)The paper loading message appears

1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded paper Load the paper of the paper size defined at
did not match the paper size "Paper size" in the [Basic] tab in the print
set in the printer properties. settings at the PC to the cassette.
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the operation
operation panel and the one panel and the one set for the paper source
set for the paper source do not do not match
match.
3 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
guides width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
paper size.
4 Checking the actuator and the The actuator or the spring Reattach the actuator and the spring for the
spring does not operate properly. upper / lower paper sensors. If not repaired,
replace them.
5 Checking the situation The print data generated by a Check if the print data not generated by a
certain application (Word) is certain application (Word) is output properly.
faulty. And then, change the application setting if
necessary.
6 Changing the setting Paper orientation is not Check the page orientation with preview
properly set in the print page before printing and reset the page orientation
setting on a certain application at the print setting on a certain application
(Word). (Word).
7 Checking the settings The paper size and the media Check if the paper size detected on the MP
type detected at the main unit tray and the media type of the MP tray set
did not match with the paper via the System Menu (for the main unit)
size and the media type set in matched to the paper size and the media
the printer driver. type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in the printer
properties at the PC.
8 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does not Select "MP tray" at [Source] in the [Basic] tab
match between the main unit in the print settings at the PC.
and printer driver
(2)The paper direction is incorrect

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Turn the power switch off after confirming
error. there is no job in process at PC and main
unit. When passing 5s, turn the power switch
on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Excel and Word is
resident. normal, print the font list to check if a font
supported to special data is built in.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default setting) and
setting) is unselected. print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.
7-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Paper is fed from the MP tray

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong

1 Changing the setting The Auto Cassette Change is Change the Auto cassette change setting to
[On]. [OFF] if paper is not available in the selected
cassette, paper will not be fed. ([System
Menu/Counter] > [Printer] > [Auto Cassette
Change] > [OFF])
2 Changing the setting "Media type" in the [Basic] tab Check the media type set on the main unit
in the print settings at the PC cassette and MP tray and set the media type
differs from the media type of for the main unit in the [Basic] tab in the print
the cassette that is set in the settings at the PC.
main unit.
3 Changing the setting The same media type is set Set different media types between the main
between the main unit unit cassette and MP tray
cassette and MP tray
(4)Garbled characters
The printer driver was not properly installed.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Turn the power switch off after confirming
error. there is no job in process at PC and main
unit. When passing 5s, turn the power switch
on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Excel and Word is
resident. normal, print the font list to check if a font
supported to special data is built in.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default setting) and
setting) is unselected. print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.
(5)Paper is not fed from the MP tray

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched.

1 Checking the settings The paper size and the media Check if the paper size detected on the MP
type detected at the main unit tray and the media type of the MP tray set
did not match with the paper via the System Menu (for the main unit)
size and the media type set in matched to the paper size and the media
the printer driver. type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in the printer
properties at the PC.
2 Changing the setting The MP tray setting does not Select "MP tray" at [Source] in the [Basic] tab
match between the main unit in the print settings at the PC.
and printer driver
(6)The same data is repeatedly printed out

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

1 Deleting the job The generated data is faulty. Delete the print job spooled in the PC and
print it out again.
7-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(7)PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated on the
printer properties
The main unit is not ready to print.

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to Check if an error is displayed on the
print. operation panel or [Attention] lamp blinks.
Then, clear the error.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready to Resolve the problem at the main unit if any
print.
(8)Attention lamp is lit while the printer standby message is indicated.

The main unit locks up.

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to Cancel the print jobs of all the PCs after
print. confirming no error appears on the operation
panel. Then, turn the power switch off. When
passing 5s, turn the power switch on.
(9)Print is not available in sleep mode due to the main unit startup error. Attention lamp is
turned on.
The main unit locks up.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
2 Changing the setting The sleep level is not set to Turn the power switch off. When passing 5s,
Quick Recovery mode. turn the power switch on. Then, set Sleep
Level to Quick Recovery
(10)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up. Attention lamp on operation panel
lights.
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.

1 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs when printing the
certain PC is faulty. data from all PCs in the network or from a
certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
2 Checking the situation The application is not properly Check if a problem occurring from a certain
set. application and file (big data like CAD data)
and change application setting and refer to
application's help.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and reprint in the
main unit job status
5 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the buttons are not
active, turn the power switch off and unplug
the power plug. After 5s passes, reconnect
the power plug and turn the power switch on.
7-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(11)Print output is unavailable due to the network factor (1)

The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the memory LED on the operation
network. panel of the main unit is blinking after printing
out from the PC. If not blinking, cancel the
processing job and reprint out.
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the When the printing error appears on the
network. operation panel or the PC screen, clear the
error caused by the toner or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the main unit IP Address in the status
network. page, etc. and then check if Command
Center can be opened using that IP Address.
If not, reconfigure the network again.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the internet connection and restore
network. the network connection if necessary
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the cable and reset the router or HUB.
network.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit locks Restart the PC or the main unit, and print out
up. again.

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

1 Checking the cable The cable between the main Check the cable connection between the
unit and the PC is not properly main unit and the PC.
connected.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC does Restart the main unit and then restart the
not properly start up. PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is faulty. Replace the Ethernet cable.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit to the PC with
the cross cable and then check if the same
data can be printed out.

The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

1 Restarting up The router or the HUB does Check if the link lamp of the router or hub is
not properly activate. lit and restart it.
2 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off, once disconnect
properly connected. the Ethernet cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is faulty. Replace the Ethernet cable.
4 Restarting up The router, HUB, PC or the In case of no connection while the link lamp
main unit do not start up is lit, restart the router or hub and then restart
properly. up the PC and the main unit.
7-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]

The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.

1 Changing the setting The IP address is not properly Check if the main unit IP Address indicated
set. in the status page is the same as the IP
Address in the [Port] tab of [Printer
Properties] at the PC. If not, correct the IP
address at the PC
2 Changing the setting The printer host name is not Check the printer host name by printing out
properly set. the status report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the printer host
name at the [Port] tab in the printer
properties at a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

"Offline" appears and the print function is unavailable.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the internet connection and restore
network. the network connection if necessary
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When "Offline" appears on the printer driver,
check if it is used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
3 Changing the setting The application is not properly Check if the other Excel / Word data can be
set. output and change the setting of the
application.
4 Changing the setting The IP address is not properly Check if the main unit IP Address indicated
set. in the status page is the same as the IP
address at the PC
5 Restarting up The IP address is not properly Check if communication via command center
set. or PING is available with IP address set up.
Set up IP address again and restart the main
unit if necessary.
6 Restarting up The port settings in the printer Remove the checks at the dual-directional
properties at the PC are support and the SNMP status in the [Port]
incorrect. tab of the printer properties in a PC. Then,
restart up the main unit and the PC.
7 Restarting up The main unit does not start After the printer is ready, check if the test
up properly. sheet can be output and restart the main
unit.
7-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
Print file: Test page
Connecting method: Wireless LAN
Only 1 PC can't print out of all PCs installed. There is no error indication and print job will be held if print instruction is
requested.

1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC does Restart up the main unit or the PC.
not properly start up.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection (Check if the
connected. network connection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the ID address is properly set, and
set. correct it if incorrect.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if access via command center or
network. PING is available and then check the hub or
router.
5 Changing the setting The printer port IP address, Correct the IP address and remove the
the SNMP of the printer driver, checks at the SNMP status and the dual-
or the bi-directional support is directional support in the [Port] tab of the
not properly set. printer properties at a PC. Then, restart up
the main unit and the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the security Check if the printer is available by
software or setting the software causes the uninstalling the security software. Or, set the
exception phenomenon. exception setting.

The main unit IP address is changed.

1 Restarting up There is trouble in the Check if a problem occurs with output from
network. all PCs on the network and restart up hub or
router.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check if there is problem with the cable
connected. connection on the network.
3 Restarting up The main unit does not start If the operation panel or the buttons are not
up properly. active, turn the power switch off and unplug
the power plug. After 5s passes, reconnect
the power plug and turn the power switch on.
4 Changing the setting IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP Address indicated
in the status page is the same as the IP
address at the PC
5 Changing the setting The static IP Address is not Set the static IP Address in the System Menu
set in the System Menu
7-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(18)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting (1)
Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
[Not connected] is displayed on PC and print job can't be performed due to the error. (Can't print)

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining.
Condition:
PC OS: Windows 7
[Preparing the printer] is displayed on the operation panel. The printing document is not output and the job is held.

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining.
A PC does not recognize the main unit.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon of PC is [Ready].
properly set. (Right click the printer icon and execute the
trouble shooting)
2 Installing the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.
3 Restarting up The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is not the Update the printer driver.
latest version.
PC operation does not stabilize.

1 Restarting up The printer driver is not Restart PC. (In case if many application
properly set. software are running or the free space of the
PC memory /SSD is low)
7-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the
data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the IP Address indicated in the main
set. unit status report and system menu is same
as the IP address in the port setting of
[Printer Properties] at the PC. If not, correct
the IP address at the port setting
The incorrect printer driver was selected.

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver is Select the correct printer driver. If it is not in
selected. the PC, install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.
Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it remains when reinstalling it

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in the Delete all print jobs spooling inside the
spool inside the printer driver. printer driver.
2 Uninstalling the printer driver There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer driver.
driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer icon and
select [Print resuming]. Then, check the
ready port.
4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects to a local
address is not properly set. network, check the host name and the IP
address on the status report of the main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/IP There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address in Standard
port Address in the Standard TCP/ TCP/IP port and print Test Page
IP Port
(25)The printed image is partly missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF) is faulty.

1 Checking the situation The image data processing When the phenomenon occurs with a certain
with a certain application file only, check if there is an abnormality in
(Excel, PDF) is faulty. the image data.
2 Checking the situation The data processing with a Check if the image does not drop out on the
certain application (Excel, print preview, and refer to the Help in the
PDF) is faulty. application if necessary.
3 Changing the setting The PDL settings is incorrect. Select "GDI compatible mode" at [PDL
settings] in the print settings at the PC.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware to the latest
version. version.
7-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(26)"Paper Mismatch Error" appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

1 Changing the setting The paper size for the MP tray Adjust the MP tray paper size
is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper width The locations of the MP paper Reset the MP paper width guides to match
guides width guides do not match the the paper size.
paper size.
3 Checking the MP tray The MP tray is not pulled out. Pull out the MP tray to extend it if the A3 size
paper is not detected.
4 Changing the setting The paper size is not set Register the custom size in [MP Tray Setting]
properly in the System Menu. in the System Menu > [Paper Size] > [Size
Entry].
5 Changing the setting Paper Mismatch Error is set to Set [Ignore] at [Common Settings] > [Error
[Ignore]. Handlings] > [Paper Mismatch Error] via the
System Menu.
7-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
7 - 7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) "Check the document processor" appears
(2) [Error occurred in cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1) even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/removing
paper remaining in the main unit
(3) [Error occurred in cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 2, 3) even after removing/inserting the cassette and checking/
removing paper remaining in the main unit
(4) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
(5) The cover open message remains after closing the front cover
(6) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
(7) When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
Content of Error Messages

(1)"Check the document processor" appears
Closing of the document processor cannot be detected.

1 Executing U244 The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the DP opening/
switch does not operate closing switch does not operate properly,
properly. reattach it and reconnect the connector. If
• DP opening/closing switch - DP PWB
• DP PWB - Low-voltage PWB
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Check the output of the DP opening/closing
closing switch signal switch signal output is faulty. switch signal on the DP PWB.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
(2)[Error occurred in cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 1) even after removing/inserting the

cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit

1 Reinstalling the paper feed The paper feed unit is not Pull the paper feed unit out, then reinsert it
unit inserted completely. completely.
2 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not rise up. Reattach the lift plate. If it is deformed,
replace it.
• Lift motor - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the lift motor The lift motor is faulty. Replace the lift motor.
7-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)[Error occurred in cassette X] is displayed (Cassette 2, 3) even after removing/inserting

the cassette and checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit
Object: Paper feeder
1 Reinstall the PF feed unit The PF paper feed unit is not Pull the PF paper feed unit out, and then
inserted completely. reinsert it completely.
2 Checking the lift plate The PF lift plate does not rise Reattach the PF lift plate. If it is deformed,
up. replace it.
4 Replacing the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. In case if it does not improve even U906
(Reset disable function) is executed, replace
the PF lift motor 1 and 2.
(4)The cover open message appears after closing the front cover
1 Reattaching the front cover The front cover does not turn Reattach the front cover.
the front cover sensor on due
to the fitting failure.
• Front cover switch - Low-voltage PWB
3 Replacing the front cover The front cover switch is faulty. Replace the front cover switch.
switch
(5)The cover open message remains after closing the front cover
1 Checking the right cover The covers are not fitted. The right cover switch does not turn on when
switch closing the right cover. If turning on when
directly pressing it, check the cover. If the
cover does not match, reattach it.
• Right cover switch - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is faulty. Replace the right cover switch.
switch
7-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
• MP paper sensor - Relay connector
• Relay connector - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the MP paper
sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is not Reattach the MP paper sensor, and replace
sensor properly attached or it is faulty. it if it is not fixed.
(7)When DP is used, [Remove the original from document processor] is wrongly displayed
1 Checking the connection The DP original sensor wire is Check the DP original sensor wire. If it is
faulty constantly on due to short-circuit, replace the
wire.
• DP original sensor - DP PWB
2 Checking the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the DP original
sensor
3 Checking the DP original The DP original sensor is not Reattach the DP original sensor. If not
sensor attached properly or faulty. repaired, replace it.
7-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise
7 - 8 Abnormal Noise
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic support)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the
conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects,
improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy Fan motor is dirty or faulty.
(7) Abnormal sound from the paper feed section Wear, dirtiness, foreign material adhesion or attachment failure at
the paper feed section
(8) Abnormal sound from the MP feed section Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at
the MP feed section
(9) Abnormal sound from the fuser exit section The fuser exit roller bushing and pulley are dirty and foreign
objects adhere to them
(10) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between
the parts in the fuser section
(11) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Toner container drive failure, toner supply shutter opening/closing
failure or toner aggregation
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in
the developer section
(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste
toner clogging in the drum section
(14) Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit
Content of Abnormal Noise

(1)Abnormal noise (Basic support)
1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear or Check the rotation of the roller, the pulley or
bushing is not enough. the gear, if they do not rotate smoothly, apply
the grease on the gears or the bearings.
(EM-50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H)
2 Reattaching the gears or the The parts such as each gear Reattach the gear or the bearings.
bearings or bushing are not properly
attached.
7-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the gears of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying related rollers, and apply the
them. grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the conveying
grease worn down. related pulley and apply the Hanarl.
(302LV94550)
3 Checking the pressure spring Pressure of the conveying Reattach the pressure springs of the
related roller and pulley are conveying related rollers or the pulleys, or
weak, and the bearing vibrates replace them.
as the roller and pulley rotate.
4 Replacing the drive unit The parts in the drive unit are Replace the drive unit
faulty.
(3)Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

1 Executing U030 (Specify that the abnormal Execute U030 [DLP] to check if the abnormal
noise arises from the noise arises from the developer unit. Then,
developer unit.) go to the next step.
2 Checking the developer unit The developer unit drive is Check if the developer is not leaking from the
faulty. developer unit, there is no damaged location,
and whether the roller rotates manually.
Repair if necessary.
3 Developer unit replacement The developer unit is faulty. Replace the developer unit.
(4)Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bearings and the shafts of the DP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying roller, and apply the grease (EM-
them. 50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H).
2 Replacing the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bearing of the DP conveying
roller.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the gears which transmit the drive to
grease foreign objects are on it. the DP conveying roller, and apply the
grease (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H).
4 Reattaching the motor The motor does not engage Reattach the DP conveying related motors.
with the drive gear.
7-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Abnormal sound from the exit section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushings and gears of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying rollers and apply the Hanarl (EM-
them. 50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H).
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the conveying
grease worn down. pulleys and apply the Hanarl. (302LV94550)
3 Cleaning and applying the The bearings are dirty or the Clean the reverse guide and the shaft of the
grease foreign objects adhere. exit feed-shift guide. If it is not possible to
remove the dirt or the foreign objects,
replace them.
4 Checking the exit motor The exit motor is faulty. Execute U030 [Exit]. If the abnormal sound
occurs, replace the exit reverse motor.
(6)Fan rotating sounds are noisy

Fan motor is dirty or faulty.

1 Cleaning the fan motor The fan of the fan motor is Execute U037 and specify the fan motor
dirty. which has a high rotation sound, and clean
the fan.
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and reconnect the
(7)Abnormal sound from the paper feed section

Wear, dirtiness, foreign material adhesion or attachment failure at the paper feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or Reattach the gear or the clutch at the paper
clutch the clutch are not properly feed drive section if they are not properly
attached. attached.
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the gears and the bearings of the feed
grease dirty or foreign objects are on drive section, and apply the grease. (EM-
them. 50LP, Part number: 7BG010009H)
3 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bearings of the feed
grease dirty or foreign objects are on roller, and apply the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
them. number: 7BG010009H)
4 Checking the paper feed roller The paper feed roller surface Clean the paper feed roller, or replace it if
is dirty or worn down. necessary.
7-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(8)Abnormal sound from the MP feed section

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or When the gears or the clutch in the MP
clutch the clutch are not properly paper feed drive section are not properly
attached. attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bearings of the MP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on feed roller, and apply the grease. (EM-50LP,
them. Part number: 7BG010009H)
3 Checking the MP friction pad The surface of the MP friction Clean the MP friction pad and replace it if
pad is dirty or worn out. necessary.
4 Checking the MP lift plate The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
attached properly.
(9)Abnormal sound from the fuser exit section

The fuser exit roller bushing and pulley are dirty and foreign objects adhere to them

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit roller, bushing Clean the fuser exit roller, the bushing, stop
grease or stop ring is dirty, or foreign ring, etc., and apply heat-resistant grease.
objects adhere to it.
(10)Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit roller, bushing Clean the fuser exit roller, bushing, stop ring,
grease or stop ring is dirty, or foreign pulley, etc. and apply grease (EM-50LP, Part
objects adhere to it. number: 7BG010009H)
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear and apply the
grease objects are on it. grease. (EM-50LP, Part number:
7BG010009H)
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.
(11)Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Toner container drive failure, toner supply shutter opening/closing failure or toner aggregation

1 Checking the toner container The torque increases due to Shake the toner container enough and
the toner condensation. reinstall it. Or, replace it.
2 Cleaning the drive parts of the The drive gear shaft or the If the drive gear of the container motor does
container motor bearings of the container not rotate smoothly, clean the shaft or the
motor is dirty. Or, the foreign bearings.
objects are adhered.
7-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

1 Checking the developer unit The shaft or the bushing of the Check if the developer roller rotates. If not
developer roller is dirty or rotating smoothly, clean the shaft or the
foreign objects are on them. bushing of the developer roller.
2 Checking the developer unit The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Then, replace it if
developer unit increased due the issue is not resolved.
to the toner condensation, etc.

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to supply the toner
drum. to the cleaning unit.
2 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check the drum screw rotation and if it does
properly rotate. not rotates smoothly, clean it. If it locks,
replace the IH unit.
3 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth surface of the drum drive
grease tooth of the drum drive gear, or gear and apply the grease. (EM-50LP, Part
the grease is not enough. number: 7BG010009H)
4 Drum unit replacement The torque inside the drum Replace the drum unit.
unit increased due to the
waste toner clogging, etc.
(14)Abnormal sound from rear side of the main unit

1 Reattaching the motor in the The motor in the drive unit is Reattach the motor in the drive unit.
drive unit faulty
2 Reattaching the drive unit The gears in the drive unit and Reattach the drive unit
the neighboring gears are not
engaged properly.
7-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction
7 - 9 Malfunction
(1) The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or
not displayed
(2) The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the
power switch
(3) No display in the operation panel (Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)
(4) The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel
and does not change main PWB can't be done.
(5) The login fails with other than the ID card
Content of Malfunction
(1)The size of paper set in the cassette is misdetected or not displayed
Object: Main unit, Paper feeder
1 Checking the paper length The paper length switch or Reattach the paper length switch or fan-
switch and fan-shape arm fan-shape arm does not shape arm
operate properly
• Paper length switch - Engine PWB
• Paper width switch - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the paper length The paper length switch is Replace the paper length switch
switch faulty
4 Replacing the paper width The paper width switch is Replace the paper width switch
switch faulty
(2)The main unit malfunctions even if turning on the power switch

1 Measuring the input voltage The power cord has no Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
continuity.
2 Checking the power cord The power plug of the power If the power plug is deformed or faulty,
cord is faulty. replace the power cord.
3 Checking the power cord The power cord is faulty. If there is no continuity of the power cord,
replace the power cord.
4 Checking the power switch The power switch is faulty. Check the continuity between the contacts of
the power switch. Replace the power switch
if there is no continuity.
5 Checking the low voltage The connector is not Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
PWB connected properly. The wire low voltage PWB, then reconnect the wire
or the PWB is faulty. connector. If the wire is faulty, repair or
replace it. If not repaired, replace the low
voltage PWB.
6 Checking the main PWB The connector or FFC terminal Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
is not connected properly. Or, main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
the wire, FFC, PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
7-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Malfunction

7 Checking the Engine PWB The connector or FFC terminal Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
is not connected properly. Or, Engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
the wire, FFC, PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the Engine PWB.
(3)No display in the operation panel

(Image on the operation panel is faulty or becomes pure white)

1 Resetting the main power The main firmware does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
start correctly. power plug. After passing 5s, reinsert the
connected properly. Or, the connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
wire is faulty so that the power there is no continuity, replace the wire.
for display is not supplied. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB
• Main PWB - Low-voltage PWB
4 Checking the operation panel The operation panel main Replace the panel main PWB.
PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Replacing the low voltage Low voltage power PWB is Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB faulty and the power is not
supplied to the main PWB.
(4)The operation panel remains displaying "WELCOME" and does not change
Communicate between the main PWB and the operation panel main PWB can't be done.

faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Clean the following wire, the terminal of
connected properly. Or, the SATA cable connector and reconnect them.
wire or the SATA cable is If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
faulty. • Main PWB - Operation panel main PWB
faulty. data.
(5)The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Changing the setting [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job Account] > [ID Card
while the card authentication Settings] > [Key Login] via the System Menu.
kit is not installed.
7-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB
8 PWBs
8 - 1 Description for PWB
(1)Main PWB
(1-1)PWB photograph
CCD model
CIS model
(1-2)Connector position
30 36
1 YC3001 *1 10
YC12 1
YC6 YC13
5 5 1 YC3003 *2 YC3
1 7
1 1
YC3002 *2 20
1 5 1 25
1 YC5
YC26 YC2
10
38 12
YC25 1 4
9
10
YC4
5
1
2 3
P1 L4
YC27
YS1
YC9
33
1 P10 L1
YC24
12
8-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-3)Connector lists
Destination
• YC2: SD card
• YC3: Wi-Fi PWB
• YC4: USB device
• YC5: USB host (Front)
• YC6: USB host (Side)
• YC9: Ethernet
• YC12: Operation panel PWB, Power switch
• YC13: Operation panel PWB
• YC24: APC PWB
• YC25: Low voltage PWB
• YC26: Enginee PWB
• YC27: eKUIO PWB
• YC3001: CIS *1
• YC3002: CCD PWB *2
• YC3003: LED drive PWB *2
*1: CCD model, *2: CIS model
Connector Pins Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2 1 CD/DAT3 IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Data[3]
2 CMD IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Command
3 VSS O - Ground
4 VDD O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
5 CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Transfer clock
6 VSS O - Ground
7 DAT0 IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Data[0]
10 CD I 3.3 V DC Detecting switch
11 COMMON I - Common Connection (Ground)
12 WP I 3.3 V DC Write-Protect
YC3 1 SD_D3 IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Data[3]
2 SD_D2 IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Data[2]
3 SD_CMD IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Command
4 GND O - Ground
5 SD_CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Transfer clock
6 GND O - Ground
9 GND O - Ground
10 VIO O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
11 VBAT O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
8-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

12 GND O - Ground
YC3 13 PAVDD O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
14 GND O - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE O - Not use (Ground)
16 GND O - Ground
17 RESET O - Not use (Ground)
18 GND O - Ground
19 USB_+ O - Not use (Ground)
20 USB_- O - Not use (Ground)
YC4 1 VBUS O 5 V DC VBUS
2 D- IO 0.4 V DC (pulse) Data(-)
3 D+ IO 0.4 V DC (pulse) Data(+)
4 GND O - Ground
5 STDB_SSTX- IO - Not use
6 STDB_SSTX+ IO - Not use
7 GND O - Ground
8 STDB_SSRX- IO - Not use
9 STDB_SSRX+ IO - Not use
2 DATA- IO 0.4 V DC (pulse) Data(-)
3 DATA+ IO 0.4 V DC (pulse) Data(+)
4 ID - - Not use
5 SHEELD-G O - Ground
2 DATA- IO 0.4 V DC (pulse) Data(-)
3 DATA+ IO 0.4 V DC (pulse) Data(+)
4 ID - - Not use
5 SHEELD-G O - Ground
YC9 R1 TD1+ IO -1.0 to +1.0(pulse) Data
R2 TD1- IO -1.0 to +1.0(pulse) Data
R3 TD2+ IO -1.0 to +1.0(pulse) Data
R5 CT1 - - Center tap
R6 CT2 - - Center tap
L1 YWLED_A O 3.3 V DC LED anode (Power supply output)
L2 YWLED_K I - LED cathode (Ground)
L3 GRLED_K I - LED cathode (Ground)
L4 GRLED_A O 3.3 V DC LED anode (Power supply output)
YC12 1 I2C_SCL_NFC O 3.3 V DC (pulse) NFC communication clock
2 I2C_SDA_NFC IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) NFC communication data
3 3.3 V DC 2_NFC O 3.3 V DC NFC Power supply output
4 NIRQ I 0V NFC interrupt
5 FPRST O 0V Panel reset
8-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY I 3.3 V DC Energy Saver key input
YC12 7 P2C_SDAT I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel communication data
8 PNL_WKUP_REQ I 0V Operation panel recovery request
9 C2P_SDAT O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel communication data
10 AUDIO O Analog FAX Audio
11 P2C_SDIR I 3.3 V DC Panel communication direction
12 NC - - Not use
13 P2C_SBSY I 3.3 V DC Panel communication permission
14 LED_ATTENTION O 0V LED control
15 C2P_SCK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel communication clock
16 LED_MEMORY O 0V LED control
17 DISPLAY_POWERON - - Not use
18 BEEP_POWERON O 0V Alert sound drive
19 INT_ANYKEY I 0V Energy saver recovery
20 GND O - Ground
21 GND O - Ground
22 GND O - Ground
23 5 V DC 1 O 5 V DC Power supply output
24 GND O - Ground
26 JOB_LED O - Job separator LED
28 GND O - Ground
30 POWER_SW I 3.3 V DC Power source switch
YC13 1 GND O - Ground
2 LCD_OFF O 3.3 V DC Conducting LCD
3 LOCKN I 3.3 V DC Communication sync
4 GND O - Ground
5 TX0N O -100 to +100mV(pulse) LCD data (N)
6 TX0P O -100 to +100mV(pulse) LCD data (P)
7 GND O - Ground
YC24 1 5 V DC 4_IL O 5 V DC Power supply output
2 GND O - Ground
3
4
5 VDATA1N O -100 to +100mV(pulse) Image data
6 VDATA1P O -100 to +100mV(pulse) Image data
7
8 SAMPLE1 O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Sample / hold
9 OUTPEN O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Output permission
10 VCONT O Reference voltage
11 PDN I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal sync signal
12 3.3 V DC 4 O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
YC25 1 GND - Ground
2 24 V DC 2 I 24 V DC Power supply input
8-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC25 5 5 V DC 0 I 5 V DC Power supply input
6 SLEEP O 5 V DC Sleep signal
7 GND I - Ground
8 GND I - Ground
9 GND I - Ground
10 AC_DOWN - - Not use
YC26 1 OVSYNCMON I 3.3 V DC (pulse) VSYNC monitor
2 PAGEST I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Page valid range
3 SCAN_E2C_SCK I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan communication clock
4 SCAN_C2E_SDAT O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan communication data
5 SCAN_E2C_SDAT I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan communication data
6 SCAN_E2C_SEL I 3.3 V DC Scan communication start request
7 SCAN_C2E_RDY O 3.3 V DC Scan communication permission
8 C2E_SCK I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee communication clock
9 C2E_SDAT O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee communication data
10 E2C_SDAT I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee communication data
11 E2C_SDIR I 3.3 V DC Enginee communication direction
12 E2C_IR I 0V Enginee communication interrupt
13 E2C_SBSY I 3.3 V DC Enginee communication permission
14 GND - - Ground
15 EG_SCL I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Video register communication clock
16 GND - - Ground
17 EG_SDA IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Video register communication data
18 GND - - Ground
19 PVSYNC I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Sub scanning start signal
20 5 V DC 4_IL I 5 V DC Power supply input
21 C2E_QUICK_START O 0V Recovery from sleep mode or other status
notification
22 E2C_WKUP_BGD_N I 3.3 V DC Background recovery request
23 ENGHLD O 0V Enginee hold
24 SCANHLD O 0V Scan hold
25 DUTY_COTROL O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Duty control
26 E2C_WKUP_RDY_N I 3.3 V DC Ready recovery request
27 5 V DC 2_E O 5 V DC Power supply output
28 C2E_STBY_ASIC O 3.3 V DC ASIC access permission
29 3.3 V DC 2_E O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
33 NC - - Not use
34 NC - - Not use
35 GND O - Ground
36 GND O - Ground
37 GND O - Ground
38 JOB_LED I Job separator LED
YC27 1 VBUS1 O 5 V DC VBUS
8-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 USB_DN1 IO -400 to +400mV(pulse) Data(-)
YC27 3 USB_DP1 IO -400 to +400mV(pulse) Data(+)
4 AUDIO1 - - Not use
5 WAKEUP1 I 3.3 V DC Recovery request
6 RESET1 O 5 V DC Reset
7 GND O - Ground
8 GND O - Ground
9 GND O - Ground
10 GND O - Ground
11 GND O - Ground
12 NC - - Not use
13 5 V DC 2_C2 O 5 V DC Power supply output
20 5 V DC 1_C O 5 V DC Power supply output
23 NC - - Not use
24 GND O - Ground
25 GND O - Ground
26 GND O - Ground
27 GND O - Ground
28 VBUS0 O 5 V DC VBUS
29 USB_DN0 IO -400 to +400mV(pulse) Data(-)
30 USB_DP0 IO -400 to +400mV(pulse) Data(+)
31 AUDIO0 I Analog FAX Audio
32 WAKEUP0 I 3.3 V DC Recovery request
33 RESET0 O 5 V DC Reset
YC3001 *1 1 OS6_RE I Analog Image signal
2 GND O - Ground
3 OS5_RO I Analog Image signal
4 GND O - Ground
5 OS3_GO I Analog Image signal
6 GND O - Ground
7 OS4_GE I Analog Image signal
8 GND O - Ground
9 OS2_BE I Analog Image signal
10 GND O - Ground
11 OS1_BO I Analog Image signal
12 GND O - Ground
13 CCD_SH O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Shift gate
14 GND O - Ground
15 CCDCLK2 O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Transfer clock
8-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

16 GND O - Ground
YC3001 *1 17 CCD_RS O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Reset gate
18 GND O - Ground
19 CCDCLK1 O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Transfer clock
20 NC - - Not use
23 NC - Not use
24 +12V3_C O 12V Power supply output
YC3002 *2 1 +12V3_C O 12V Power supply output
3 LED_PWM O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Lamp lighting control
4 LED_ENA O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Lamp lighting control
5 GND O - Ground
6 GND O - Ground
YC3003 *2 1 3.3 V DC 5 O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
4 Pull-down - Pull-down
5 LED_COM2 O LED anode
6 LED2_B I LED cathode
7 LED2_G I LED cathode
8 LED2_R I LED cathode
9 MODE O 3.3 V DC (pulse) CIS control signal
10 SP O 3.3 V DC (pulse) CIS control signal
11 VREF O 1.1V Reference Power supply output
12 GND O - Ground
13 CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) CIS control clock
14 GND O - Ground
15 OS1 I Analog Image signal
16 GND O - Ground
18 GND O - Ground
20 GND O - Ground
22 GND O - Ground
24 GND O - Ground
26 GND O - Ground
28 GND O - Ground
30 GND O - Ground
8-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

32 GND O - Ground
YC3003 *2 33 LED_COM1 O LED anode
34 LED1_B I LED cathode
35 LED1_G I LED cathode
36 LED1_R I LED cathode
*1: CCD model, *2: CIS model
8-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Enginee PWB
(2-1)PWB photograph
YC28 14 1
1 13
YC17 YC10
1 2
YC15 YC3
3
38
1 YC4
18 1 18
YC16
1 YC9
1
10 1
1
YC13
YC23
1 5
4 1
YC7
1 4
13 YC12 YC14 YC8
1 1
U15
YC21
16
6 7
1
5
1
YC27 YC19 YC20
2 6 1 12 1 YC26
12 YC24 1
1
YC25
6 1 YC18 YC6 YC5
12 1 12 1 10 1
8-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: Main PWB
• YC4: Document Processor
• YC5: Finisher (option)
• YC6: Paper feeder (option)
• YC7: Bridge detection switch
• YC8: Developer relay PWB, Drum relay PWB, Container relay PWB
• YC9: Toner sensor, Toner container lock sensor, Toner container switch, Temperature sensor, LSU fan motor
• YC10: High voltage PWB
• YC12: Power source fan motor
• YC13: Thermopile, Fuser thermistor, Fuser pressure release sensor
• YC15: Scanner motor, Home position sensor, Original sensor, Original size sensor
• YC16: Exit motor, Exit sensor, Exit full sensor, Exit sensor, JS exit sensor, Exit fan motor
• YC17: feed-shift solenoid
• YC18: Paper feed clutch, Registration clutch, Duplex clutch, MP solenoid, Lift motor, Developer clutch
• YC19: Lift sensor, Registration sensor
• YC20: Paper sensor 1, Paper sensor 2, Paper length switch, Paper width switch
• YC21: Conveying fan motor, DU sensor, Conveying sensor, MP paper sensor
• YC23: Polygon motor
• YC24: Main motor, Fuser motor
• YC25: Developer motor
• YC27: Right cover switch
• YC28: Paper fan motor

YC3 1 JOB_LED O 3.3 V DC /0V Job Separator paper detection
2 GND I - Ground
3 GND I - Ground
4 GND I - Ground
5 NC - - Not use
6 NC - - Not use
7 3.3 V DC 1 I 3.3 V DC Power supply input
8 3.3 V DC 2_E I 3.3 V DC Power supply input
11 C2E_STBY_ASIC I 3.3 V DC ASIC access permission
12 5 V DC 2_E I 5 V DC Power supply output
13 E2C_WKUP_RDY_N O 3.3 V DC /0V Ready recovery request
14 DUTY_COTROL I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Duty control
8-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]

15 SCANHLD I 3.3 V DC /0V Scan hold
YC3 16 ENGHLD I 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee hold
17 E2C_WKUP_BGD_N O 3.3 V DC Background recovery request
18 C2E_QUICK_START I 3.3 V DC /0V Recovery from sleep mode or other status
notification
19 5 V DC 4_IL O 5 V DC Power supply output
20 PVSYNC O 3.3 V DC /0V Sub scanning start signal
21 GND I - Ground
22 EG_SDA IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Video register communication data
23 GND I - Ground
24 EG_SCL O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Video register communication clock
25 GND I - Ground
26 E2C_SBSY O 3.3 V DC /0V Main-Enginee communication permission
27 E2C_IR O 3.3 V DC /0V Main-Enginee communication interrupt
28 E2C_SDIR O 3.3 V DC /0V Main-Enginee communication direction
29 E2C_SDAT O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Main-Enginee communication data
30 C2E_SDAT I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Main-Enginee communication data
31 C2E_SCK I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Main-Enginee communication clock
32 SCAN_C2E_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-Scan communication permission
33 SCAN_E2C_SEL O 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-Scan communication start
request
34 SCAN_E2C_SDAT O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-Scan communication data
35 SCAN_C2E_SDAT I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-Scan communication data
36 SCAN_E2C_SCK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-Scan communication clock
37 PAGEST O 3.3 V DC /0V Page valid range
38 OVSYNCMON I 3.3 V DC /0V VSYNC monitor
2 GND O - Ground
3 GND O - Ground
4 GND O - Ground
9 DP_CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication clock
10 DP_SO O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication data
11 DP_SEL O 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-DP communication select
12 DP_SI I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication data
13 DP_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-DP communication status
14 DP_TMG I 3.3 V DC /0V VSYNC output to Enginee
15 DP_OPEN I 3.3 V DC /0V DP open/close detection
16 DP_ORG_SET I 3.3 V DC /0V DP original set detection
18 GND O - Ground
YC5 1 EH_CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-EH communication clock
2 EH_SI I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-EH communication data
3 EH_SO O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-EH communication data
4 BR_SEL O 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-AK communication select
8-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 DF_SEL O 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-DF communication select
YC5 6 DF_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-DF communication ready
9 GND O - Ground
10 GND O - Ground
YC6 1 EH_CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-EH communication clock
2 EH_SI I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-EH communication data
3 EH_SO O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-EH communication data
4 PF_SEL O 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-PF communication select
5 PF_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Enginee-PF communication ready
6 PF_SET I 3.3 V DC /0V PF paper set detection
7 PF_PAUSE O 3.3 V DC /0V PF timing adjustment
11 GND O - Ground
12 GND O - Ground
YC7 1 BR_SET I 3.3 V /2.26 V/1.65 V / AK set detection
1.34 V DC
2 GND O - Ground
3 LVU_SEL I 3.3 V/2.26 V/1.65 V/ Low-voltage power supply determination
1.34 V DC
4 GND O - Ground
2 1WIRE IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Toner container communication
4 DRUM_SDA IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Drum communication data
5 DRUM_SCL O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Drum communication clock
6 GND O - Ground
7 WT_LED O 3.3 V DC /0V Waste toner box level detection LED
8 WT_SENS I Analog Waste toner box level detection
9 3.3 V DC 2_LED O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
10 ERASE O 3.3 V DC /0V Eraser control
12 GND O - Ground
13 DLP_SDA IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Developer communication data
14 DLP_SCL O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Developer communication clock
16 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor
YC9 1 3.3 V DC 2_E O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 TNR_EMP I 3.3 V DC /0V Toner level detection
3 GND O - Ground
4 CON_LOCK I 3.3 V DC /0V Toner container lock detection
5 GND O - Ground
7 GND O - Ground
8 TCONSET I 3.3 V DC /0V Toner container set detection
8-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 THERM I Analog Machine outside temperature
11 HUM_OUT O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Machine outside humidity
12 HUM_CLK I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Machine outside humidity clock
13 24 V DC O 24 V DC Power supply output
14 LSU_FAN_REM O 24 V DC /0V LSU cooling fan control
3 MC_CLK O 10 V DC (pulse) Main charger high-voltage clock
4 MC_ACCNT O 10 V DC (pulse) Main charger high-voltage AC control
5 MC_DCCNT O 10 V DC (pulse) Main charger high-voltage DC control
6 MC_ISENS O Analog Main charger current monitor
7 DC_REM O H(24 V DC )/L(0V) Main charger/transfer high-voltage DC
remote
8 TRA_CNT O 10 V DC (pulse) Transfer high-voltage DC control
9 SEP_REM O H(24 V DC )/L(0V) Separation high-voltage DC remote
10 NC - - Not use
11 DLP_CLK O 10 V DC (pulse) Developer high-voltage clock
12 DLP_CNT O 10 V DC (pulse) Developer high-voltage DC control
13 GND O - Ground
14 GND O - Ground
YC12 1 SEC_CLK O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Communication clock
2 SEC_DATA IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Communication data
3 GND O - Ground
6 LVU_FAN_REM O 24 V DC /0V Cooling fan control
YC13 1 FSR_TOBJ I Analog Thermopile object temperature data
2 GND O - Ground
4 FSR_TAMB I Analog Thermopile surrounding temperature data
5 THP_SDA IO 3.3 V DC (pulse) Thermopile communication data
6 THP_SCL O 3.3 V DC (pulse) Thermopile communication clock
7 GND O - Ground
8 FSR_EDGE I Analog Fuser edge thermistor
10 GND O - Ground
11 FSR_PRESS I 3.3 V DC /0V Fuser pressure release detection
YC14 1 ZCROSS I 3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
2 RELAYREM O 3.3 V DC /0V Low-voltage relay remote
3 MHREM O 3.3 V DC /0V Main heater remote
4 SHREM O 3.3 V DC /0V Sub heater remote
5 ILVCC I Analog Power supply output for interlock
6 GND O - Ground
YC15 1 SCAN_/B O 24 V DC /0V Scanner motor drive
2 SCAN_/A O 24 V DC /0V Scanner motor drive
8-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 SCAN_B O 24 V DC /0V Scanner motor drive
YC15 4 SCAN_A O 24 V DC /0V Scanner motor drive
6 GND O - Ground
7 HP_SENS I 3.3 V DC /0V Scanner home position detection
9 GND O - Ground
10 TABLE_OPEN I 3.3 V DC /0V DP open/close detection
11 GND O - Ground
12 ORG_SENS I 3.3 V DC /0V Scanner original size detection
YC16 1 EXIT_/B O 24 V DC /0V Exit motor drive
2 EXIT_/A O 24 V DC /0V Exit motor drive
3 EXIT_B O 24 V DC /0V Exit motor drive
4 EXIT_A O 24 V DC /0V Exit motor drive
6 GND O - Ground
7 EXIT_FULL_UP I 3.3 V DC /0V Upper exit paper full detection
9 GND O - Ground
10 EXIT_FULL_DOWN I 3.3 V DC /0V Lower exit paper full detection
11 FUSER_SW I 3.3 V DC /0V Fuser conveying paper detection
12 GND O - Ground
15 GND O - Ground
16 JOB_TRAY I 3.3 V DC /0V Job Separator paper detection
17 EXIT_FAN_REM O 24 V DC /0V Exit cooling fan control
YC17 1 EJE_SOL_PULL O 24 V DC /0V Exit solenoid control
3 EJE_SOL_RETURN O 24 V DC /0V Exit solenoid control
YC18 1 FEED_CL_REM O 24 V DC /0V Conveying clutch control
3 REG_CL_REM O 24 V DC /0V Registration clutch control
5 DU_CL_REM O 24 V DC /0V Duplex clutch control
8 MPF_SOL_REM O 24 V DC /0V MPF solenoid control
9 GND O - Ground
10 LMOT_REM O 24 V DC /0V Lift motor control
11 DLP_CL_REM O 24 V DC /0V Developer clutch control
YC19 1 3.3 V DC 2_LED O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 GND O - Ground
3 LIFTFULL I 3.3 V DC /0V Lift motor upper limit detection
8-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC19 5 RESIST I 3.3 V DC /0V Registration paper detection
6 GND O - Ground
YC20 1 3.3 V DC 2_LED O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 GND O - Ground
3 PAPEMP1 I 3.3 V DC /2V/1.65 V DC Cassette paper level detection
/1.26V
5 GND O - Ground
6 PAPEMP2 I 3.3 V DC /2V/1.65 V DC Cassette paper level detection
/1.26V
7 PAPLSIZE3 I 3.3 V DC /0V Cassette paper size detection
8 GND O - Ground
11 PAPWSIZE1 I 3.3 V DC /0V Cassette paper size detection
12 GND O - Ground
YC21 1 FEED_FAN_REM O 24 V DC /0V Conveying cooling fan control
3 3.3 V DC 2_LED O 3.3 V DC -
4 GND O - Ground
5 DU_SW I 3.3 V DC /0V DU paper detection
7 GND O - Ground
8 FEED_SW I 3.3 V DC /0V Conveying paper detection
10 GND O - Ground
11 MPF_REMAIN I 3.3 V DC /0V MPF paper detection
12 GND O - Ground
13 FSR_PRESS_MOT_REM O 24 V DC /0V Fuser pressure release motor drive
YC23 1 24 V DC 2 O 24 V DC Power supply output
2 GND O - Ground
3 POL_REM O 3.3 V DC /0V Polygon motor remote
4 POL_READY I 3.3 V DC /0V Polygon motor ready
5 POL_CLK O 5 V DC (pulse) Polygon motor clock
2 GND O - Ground
3 MAIN_MOT_REM O 5 V DC /0V Main motor remote
4 MAIN_MOT_CLK O 5 V DC (pulse) Main motor clock
5 MAIN_MOT_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Main motor ready
6 MAIN_MOT_DIR O 5 V DC /0V Main motor rotation direction
8 GND O - Ground
9 FSR_MOT_REM O 5 V DC /0V Fuser motor remote
10 FSR_MOT_CLK O 5 V DC (pulse) Fuser motor clock
11 FSR_MOT_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Fuser motor ready
12 FSR_MOT_DIR O 5 V DC /0V Fuser motor rotation direction
8-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 GND O - Ground
YC25 3 DLP_MOT_REM O 5 V DC /0V Developer motor remote
4 DLP_MOT_CLK O 5 V DC (pulse) Developer motor clock
5 DLP_MOT_RDY I 3.3 V DC /0V Developer motor ready
6 DLP_MOT_DIR O 5 V DC /0V Developer motor rotation direction
YC26 1 24 V DC 2_IL1 I 24 V DC Power supply input
2 GND O - Ground
3 GND O - Ground
YC27 1 24 V DC 2_IL1 O 24 V DC Power supply output
2 24 V DC 2_IL2 I 24 V DC Power supply input
YC28 1 HUM_FAN_REM O 24 V DC /0V Intake fan control for the machine outside
temperature / humidity sensor
8-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)High voltage PWB

(3-1)PWB photograph
14 CN1 1
8-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• CN1: Enginee PWB

CN1 1 24 V DC 2_IL I 24 V DC Power supply input
2 24 V DC 2_IL I 24 V DC Power supply input
3 MC_CLK I 10 V DC (pulse) Main charger clock
4 MC_ACCNT I 10 V DC (pulse) Main charger AC control
5 MC_DCCNT I 10 V DC (pulse) Main charger DC control
6 MC_ISENS O 0 to 3V Main charger output current detection
7 DC_REM I H(24 V DC)/L(0 V) High-voltage remote
8 TRA_CNT I 10 V DC (pulse) Transfer control
9 SEP_REM I H(24 V DC)/L(0 V) Separation remote
10 NC - - Not use
11 DLP_CLK I 10 V DC (pulse) Developer clock
12 DLP_CNT I 10 V DC (pulse) Developer DC control
13 GND - 0V Ground
14 GND - 0V Ground
8-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4)Low voltage PWB

(4-1)PWB photograph
100-120V
220-240V
YC8
1 7
TB3
1
3
YC5
YC4
1 4
YC6
1
5
YC3
1
6
1 YC7
YC2
3 TB1 TB2 9
YC1
3 1
8-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• TB1/TB2: Inlet
• TB3: Thermal cutout
• YC1: Outlet *1
• YC2: Cassette heater switch
• YC3: Paper feeder (option), Cassette heater
• YC4: Fuser heater
• YC5: Front cover switch
• YC7: Main PWB
*1: 32 ppm model only

TB1 1 AC_LIVE I Commercial Power AC_LIVE
supply input voltage
TB2 1 AC_NEUTRAL I Commercial Power AC_NEUTRAL
TB3 1 LIVE O Commercial Power Fuser heater AC_LIVE output
supply output voltage
YC1 *1 1 AC_LIVE O Commercial Power DF LIVE
3 AC_NEUTRAL O Commercial Power DF NEUTRAL
YC2 1 CH_SW O Commercial Power LIVE output to switch
2 N.C - - Not use
3 CH_COM I Commercial Power LIVE input from switch
YC3 1 Cassette_H_LIVE O Commercial Power LIVE output to the dehumidifying heater
2 Cassette_H_LIVE O Commercial Power LIVE output to the dehumidifying heater
3 N.C - - Not use
4 N.C - - Not use
5 Cassette_H_NEUTRAL O Commercial Power NEUTRAL output to the dehumidifying
supply output voltage heater
6 Cassette_H_NEUTRAL O Commercial Power NEUTRAL output to the dehumidifying
supply output voltage heater
YC4 1 MH O Commercial Power AC output to fuser unit main heater
2 SH O Commercial Power AC output to fuser unit sub heater
YC5 1 ILVCC I 3.3 V DC Power supply input at sleep mode
2 24 V DC 2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC 2 output to the interlock switch
3 N.C - - Not use
8-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 24 V DC IL1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC through the interlock switch
YC6 1 24 V DC 2_IL1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC through the interlock switch
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 24 V DC 2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC output to Enginee PWB
5 24 V DC 2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC output to Enginee PWB
YC7 1 24 V DC 2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC output to Main PWB
2 GND O 0V GND to Main PWB
3 5 V DC 0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC output to Main PWB
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 SLEEP I H(3.3 V DC)/L(0 V) Sleep control signal
YC8 1 24 V DC 2_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC through the interlock switch
2 GND - - Ground
3 ILVCC O 3.3 V DC Power supply output at sleep mode
4 SHREM I H(3.3 V DC)/L(0 V) Sub heater control
5 MHREM I H(3.3 V DC)/L(0 V) Main heater control
6 RELAYREM I H(3.3 V DC)/L(0 V) Relay control for the fuser heater
7 ZCROSS O H(3.3 V DC)/L(0 V) Zero-cross signal
*1: 32 ppm model only
8-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5)Operation PWB
(5-1)PWB photograph
7-inch panel model
8-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
7-inch panel model
YC9 YC8
YC3 1
50 1 4
YC5
1 5 19
1
YC4
12
1
5 YC2 1
5 YC1 1
2
YC10 A15 A1
1
7 1 YC6
YC7
B1 B15
YC8
4 1 YC20 YC3
YC5
40 1 1 5 19
1
YC4
12
1
5 YC2 1
5 YC1 1
2
YC10 A15 A1
1
7 1 YC6
YC7
B1 B15
8-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: NFC PWB
• YC4: Panel key PWB R
• YC5: Panel key PWB L
• YC6: Speaker
• YC7: Main PWB
• YC8: Touch panel
• YC9: CCD PWB *2
• YC10: Main PWB
• YC20: CCD PWB *1
*1: 4.3-inch panel model, *2: 7-inch panel model

YC3 1 3.3 V DC 2_NFC O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 GND - - Ground
3 NFC_SWCLK O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) NFC data clock
4 NFC_SWDA I/O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) NFC input/output data
5 NIRQ I 0 V/3.3 V DC NFC interrupt
YC4 1 ENERGYSAVER KEY I 0 V/3.3 V DC Key input
2 ENERGYSAVER LED O 0 V/3.3 V DC LED output
3 SCAN2 O 0 V/3 V DC Key scan
4 ATTENTION O 0 V/5 V DC LED output
5 MEMORY O 0 V/5 V DC LED output
8 LED1 O 0 V/3.3 V DC LED output
9 KEY3 I 0 V/3.3 V DC Key input
16 GND - - Ground
18 PROCESSING O 0 V/5 V DC LED output
YC5 1 GND - - Ground
4 NC - - Not use
6 NC - - Not use
8-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC5 8 SCAN2 O 0 V/3 V DC Key scan
9 NC - - Not use
10 NC - - Not use
12 JOB_LED I 0 V/3.3 V DC Job separator LED input
YC6 1 SPEAKER_P O Pulse Speaker output
2 SPEAKER_N O Pulse Speaker output
YC7 A1 5 V DC 1 I 5 V DC Power supply input
A2 5 V DC 1 I 5 V DC Power supply input
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 INT_ANYKEY O 0 V/3.3 V DC Panel sleep recovery
A7 DISPLAY_POWERON I 0 V/3.3 V DC Display lit
A8 C2P_SCK I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main-Panel communication clock
A9 P2C_SBSY O 0 V/3.3 V DC Main-Panel communication busy
A10 P2C_SDIR O 0 V/3.3 V DC Main-panel communication direction
A11 C2P_SDAT I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main-Panel communication data
A12 P2C_SDAT O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main-Panel communication data
A13 FPRST I 0 V/3.3 V DC Panel reset
A14 3.3 V DC 2_NFC I 3.3 V DC Power supply output
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) NFC-Panel communication clock
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) NFC-Panel communication data
B2 NIRQ I 0 V/3.3 V DC NFC-Panel communication interrupt
B3 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY O 0 V/3.3 V DC Energy saver interrupt
_N
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I 0 V/3.3 V DC Operation panel recovery request
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio signal
NC - - Not use
B7 LED_ATTENTION I 0 V/3.3 V DC LED drive
B8 LED_MEMORY I 0 V/3.3 V DC LED drive
B9 BEEP_POWERON I 0 V/3.3 V DC Speaker input
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 JOB_LED O 0 V/3.3 V DC Job separator LED output
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 NC - - Not use
YC8 1 XR I 0 V to 3 V DC Touch panel coordinate data
2 YB I 0 V to 3 V DC Touch panel coordinate data
3 XL I 0 V to 3 V DC Touch panel coordinate data
4 YT I 0 V to 3 V DC Touch panel coordinate data
YC9 *2 1 NC - - Not use
2 NC - - Not use
3 GND - - Ground
4 DITH O 3.3 V DC Dithering function permission
8-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 VCOM O 0 V/3.3 V DC Power supply output
7 RSTB O 0 V/3.3 V DC Reset
8 AVDD O 0V/10.5 V DC Power supply output
9 VEEG O 0 V/-8 V DC Power supply output
10 VDDG O 0 V/18 V DC Power supply output
11 UPDN O 0 V DC Up and down display select
12 SHLR O 3.3 V DC Right and left display select
13 GND - - Ground
14 DCLK O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Display data clock
15 GND - - Ground
16 R0 O 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD display data
24 G0 O 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD display data
32 B0 O 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD display data
B7 O 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD display data
40 HSD O 0 V/3.3 V DC Horizontal display data sync
41 VSD O 0 V/3.3 V DC Vertical display data sync
42 DE O 0 V/3.3 V DC Data input permission
43 MODE O 0 V/3.3 V DC Display mode select
44 DVDD O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
45 VCOM O 0 V/3.3 V DC Power supply output
46 GND - - Ground
47 VLED- I 0 V/0.3 V DC LED input
48 VLED- I 0 V/0.3 V DC LED input
49 VLED+ O 0 V/19 V DC LED output
8-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 LCD_OFF I 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD display off
YC10 3 LOCKN I 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD display permission
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I/O Pulse LCD display data
6 RX0P I/O Pulse LCD display data
7 GND - - Ground
2 NC - - Not use
3 NC - - Not use
4 NC - - Not use
5 GND - - Ground
6 NC - - Not use
7 DEN O 0 V/3.3 V DC Data input permission
8 VSYNC O 0 V/3.3 V DC Vertical display data sync
9 HSYNC O 0 V/3.3 V DC Horizontal display data sync
10 RESET O 0 V/3.3 V DC LCD reset
11 CLK O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Display data clock
12 GND - - Ground
37 DVDD O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
38 GND - - Ground
40 VLED- I 0 V DC LED input
*1: 4.3-inch panel model, *2: 7-inch panel model
8-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6)DP PWB
(6-1)PWB photograph
6 18
1 YC6 1 YC4
1 YS1
19
YC2
YC3 YC7
1 3 14 1
8-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Destination
• YC3: DP cover open/close switch
• YC4: DP original sensor, DP feed sensor, DP registration sensor, DP open/close switch, DP feed-shift sensor, DP
timing sensor
• YC6: Original length sensor, Original width sensor
• YC7: DP feed motor, DP conveying motor, DP feed-shift motor, DP registration clutch

YC2 1 FG - - Ground
2 GND - - Ground
3 3.3 V DC 3 I 3.3 V DC Power supply input
4 DP_ORG_SET I 0 V/3.3 V DC DP original set detection
5 DP_OPEN I 0 V/3.3 V DC DP open/close detection
6 DP_TMG O 0 V/3.3 V DC VSYNC output to Enginee
7 DP_RDY O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication status
8 DP_SI O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication data
9 DP_SEL I 0 V/3.3 V DC Enginee-DP communication select
10 DP_SO I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication data
11 DP_CLK I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Enginee-DP communication clock
16 GND - - Ground
17 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
19 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 24 V DC 2 O 24 V DC Power supply output
2 NC - - Not use
3 24 V DC IL_DP O 24 V DC Power supply output
YC4 1 3.3 V DC 3 O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 GND - - Ground
3 SET_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC DP original set detection
5 GND - - Ground
6 FEED_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC Original conveying detection
8 GND - - Ground
9 REGIST_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC Original conveying registration detection
11 GND - - Ground
12 DP_OPEN_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC DP open/close detection
14 GND - - Ground
8-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC4 15 HP_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC Home position detection for the feed-shift
guide and conveying pressure
17 GND - - Ground
18 TIMING_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC Original conveying timing detection
YC6 1 3.3 V DC 2_E O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LS_SW I 0 V/3.3 V DC Original length detection
5 WSIZE I 0 V to 3 V DC Original width detection
6 GND - - Ground
YC7 1 FEED_MOT_A O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Feed motor output
2 FEED_MOT_B O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Feed motor output
3 FEED_MOT_/A O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Feed motor output
4 FEED_MOT_/B O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Feed motor output
5 CONV_MOT_A O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Conveying motor output
6 CONV_MOT_/A O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Conveying motor output
7 CONV_MOT_B O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Conveying motor output
8 CONV_MOT_/B O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) Conveying motor output
9 JNC_MOT_A O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) feed-shift motor output
10 JNC_MOT_B O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) feed-shift motor output
11 JNC_MOT_/A O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) feed-shift motor output
12 JNC_MOT_/B O 0 V to 24 V DC (analog) feed-shift motor output
13 CL_REM O 0 V/24 V DC Registration clutch remote
14 24 V DC IL_DP O 24 V DC Power supply output
8-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION)
8 - 2 Description for PWB (OPTION)

(1)PF PWB (PF-410/PF-471)
YC1 YC2 YC7

1 1 8 1
U4
6
12
YC6 YC4
6 8 U1
1
1
YC5
14 YC3
12 U2 U3
1 1
YC8
1 6
Destination
• YC2: PF drive motor
• YC3: PF lift sensor 1, PF paper sensor 1(U), PF paper sensor 1(L), PF conveying sensor 1
• YC4: PF lift motor 1, PF feed clutch 1, PF conveying clutch
• YC5: PF lift sensor 2, PF paper sensor 2(U), PF paper sensor 2(L), PF conveying sensor 2
• YC6: PF lift motor 2, PF feed clutch 2
• YC7: PF paper length switch 1, PF paper width switch 1, Right cover switch 3
• YC8: PF paper length switch 2, PF paper width switch 2

2 GND - - Ground
3 3.3V4 I 3.3 V DC Power supply input
5 24V4 I 24 V DC Power supply input
6 PF_PAUSE O 0 V/3.3 V DC Pause signal
7 PF_SET O 0 V/3.3 V DC Set signal
8 PF_RDY O 0 V/3.3 V DC Ready signal
9 PF_SEL I 0 V/3.3 V DC Paper Feeder select signal
8-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 EH_SI I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal input
YC1 11 EH_SO O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal output
12 EH_CLK I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication clock signal
YC2 1 MAIN_DIR O 0 V/3.3 V DC PF motor drive change signal
2 MAIN_READY I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF motor ready signal
3 MAIN_CLK O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) PF motor clock signal
4 MAIN_REM O 0 V/3.3 V DC PF motor
5 GND - - Ground
6 24V4 O 24 V DC Power supply output
YC3 1 3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PFLS1 I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF lift sensor 1
4 3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC Power supply output
5 GND - - Ground
6 PFPS1(U) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF upper feed sensor 1
8 GND - - Ground
9 PFPS1(L) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF lower feed sensor 1
11 GND - - Ground
12 PFFS1 I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF conveying sensor 1
YC4 1 LIFT_REM1 O 0 V/3.3 V DC PF lift motor 1
3 REG_CL_REM1 O 0 V/3.3 V DC PF feed clutch 1
4 NC - - Not use
6 REG_CL_REM O 0 V/3.3 V DC PF conveying clutch
7 NC - - Not use
2 GND - - Ground
3 PFLS2 I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF lift sensor 2
5 GND - - Ground
6 PFPS2(U) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF upper paper sensor 2
8 GND - - Ground
9 PFPS2(L) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF lower paper sensor 2
11 GND - - Ground
12 PFFS2 I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF conveying sensor 2
13 NC - - Not use
14 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 LIFT_REM2 O 0 V/24 V DC PF lift motor 2
3 REG_CL_REM2 O 0 V/24 V DC PF feed clutch 2
4 NC - - Not use
8-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]

YC7 1 PAPLSIZE1(3) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF paper length switch 1
2 PAPLSIZE1(2) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF paper length switch 1
3 GND - - Ground
5 PAPWSIZE1 I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF paper width switch 1
6 GND - - Ground
7 COVEROPEN I 0 V/3.3 V DC DF right cover switch
8 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 PAPLSIZE2(3) I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF paper length switch 2
3 GND - - Ground
5 PAWLSIZE2 I 0 V/3.3 V DC PF paper width switch 2
6 GND - - Ground
8-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)BR PWB (AK-470)

YC4 YC5
3 1 12 1
YC3
1
2 1
9 1
YC2 YC6
Destination
• YC2: BR conveying sensor 1, 2 and 3
• YC3: BR motor
• YC4: BR cover switch
• YC5: DP relay PWB
• YC6: BR fan motor

2 GND - - Ground
3 JAM_SENCE3 I 0 V/3.3 V DC BR conveying sensor 3
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 SMOTB_ O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) BR motor control signal
2 SMOTA_ O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) BR motor control signal
3 SMOTB O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) BR motor control signal
4 SMOTA O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) BR motor control signal
YC4 1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply output
8-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 NC - - Not use
YC4 3 24VIL I 0 V/24 V DC BR cover switch
YC5 1 BR_CLK I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial clock signal
2 BR_SI O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal output
3 BR_SO I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal input
4 BR_SEL I 0 V/3.3 V DC Select signal
5 BR_RDY O 0 V/3.3 V DC Ready signal
7 FAN_CONT I 0 V/24 V DC BR fan motor
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 24V_DF I 24 V DC Power supply input
12 24V_DF I 24 V DC Power supply input
YC6 1 FAN_CONT O 0 V/24 V DC BR fan motor
2 +24V_DFD O 24 V DC Power supply output
8-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)DF PWB (DF-470)

2 1 4 1 3 1
CN16 CN19 CN18 CN10 CN9

12 1
CN21 CN17 8 1 4 1 3 1
CN20
9
1
CN7
6
1
1
6
4
CN14 CN6
1
CN5
1
CN15 PTH2
F2
1 5
2 CN8
1
F1
CN13
CN12 CN22
CN11 CN1
1 9 1 2 1 6 1 3 1 12
Destination
• CN1: DF relay PWB
• CN5: Tray upper limit sensor, Tray lower limit sensor
• CN6: Paper detection sensor 1, Paper detection sensor 2
• CN7: Exit paper sensor, Adjustment sensor 1, 2
• CN8: Staple position sensor
• CN9: Conveying sensor
• CN10: Belt sensor
• CN11: Roller sensor, DF top cover sensor
• CN12: Drive motor in the staple unit, Home position sensor, Self-priming sensor, Staple sensor
• CN13: Staple cover switch
• CN14: Slide motor
• CN15: Tray motor
• CN16: Paddle solenoid
• CN17: Paper detection solenoid
• CN18: Adjustment motor 1, 2
• CN19: Conveying motor, Bundle exit motor
• CN20: Roller motor
• CN21: Belt solenoid
• CN22: Slide sensor
8-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]

CN1 1 DF_CLK I 0 V/5 V DC (pulse) Serial clock signal
2 DF_SI O 0 V/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal output
3 DF_SO I 0 V/5 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal input
4 DF_SEL I 0 V/5 V DC Select signal
5 DF_RDY O 0 V/5 V DC Ready signal
6 DF_SET O 0 V/5 V DC Finisher connect signal
7 +24V I 24 V DC Power supply input
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
CN5 1 T_LL_SEN I 0 V/5 V DC DF tray lower sensor
2 SGND - - Ground
3 +5V O 5 V DC Power supply output
4 T_UL_SEN I 0 V/5 V DC DF tray upper sensor
5 SGND - - Ground
7 NC - - Not connected
CN6 1 +5V O 5 V DC Power supply output
2 SGND - - Ground
3 RHDS1 I 0 V/5 V DC DF paper sensor 1
5 SGND - - Ground
6 RHDS2 I 0 V/5 V DC DF paper sensor 2
2 SGND - - Ground
3 EMPS I 0 V/5 V DC DF exit sensor
5 SGND - - Ground
6 FJ_HPS I 0 V/5 V DC DF adjustment sensor1
8 SGND - - Ground
9 RJ_HPS I 0 V/5 V DC DF adjustment sensor 2
2 SGND - - Ground
3 JIS I 0 V/5 V DC DF staple pojition sensor
4 NC - - Not use
5 NC - - Not use
2 SGND - - Ground
3 PINS I 0 V/5 V DC DF conveying sensor
2 SGND - - Ground
3 BRS I 0 V/5 V DC DF belt sensor
4 NC - - Not use
8-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 SGND - - Ground
3 RUDS I 0 V/5 V DC DF roller sensor
5 SGND - - Ground
6 JAMCVR_S I 0 V/5 V DC DF top cover sensor
CN12 1 STPM+ O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF staple motor control signal
2 STPM+ O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF staple motor control signal
3 STPM- O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF staple motorcontrol signal
4 STPM- O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF staple motor control signal
6 STP_HPS O 0 V/5 V DC STHPS: On/Off
7 SELF_P I 0 V/5 V DC STSPS: On/Off
8 LS I 0 V/5 V DC STES: On/Off
9 SGND - - Ground
2 H_SW I 0 V/24 V DC DF staple cover switch
CN14 1 SLD_*A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF slide motor control signal
2 SLD_A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF slide motor control signal
3 SLD_B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF slide motor control signal
4 SLD_*B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF slide motor control signal
CN15 1 TM_+ O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF tray motor control signal
2 TM_- O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF tray motor control signal
3 NC - - Not use
2 P_SOL O 0 V/24 V DC DF paddle solenoid
3 NC - - Not use
4 NC - - Not use
2 S_SOL O 0 V/24 V DC DF paper solenid
3 NC - - Not use
CN18 1 FJMOT_*A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 1 control signal
2 FJMOT_A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 1 control signal
3 FJMOT_B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 1 control signal
4 FJMOT_*B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 1 control signal
5 RJMOT_*A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 2 control signal
6 RJMOT_A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 2 control signal
7 RJMOT_B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 2 control signal
8 RJMOT_*B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF adjustment motor 2 control signal
CN19 1 FMOT_*B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF conveying motor control signal
3 FMOT_B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF conveying motor control signal
4 FMOT_A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF conveying motor control signal
6 FMOT_*A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF conveying motor control signal
7 TMOT_*B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF bundle discharge motor control signal
8-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]

CN19 9 TMOT_B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF bundle discharge motor control signal
10 TMOT_A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF bundle discharge motor control signal
12 TMOT_*A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF bundle discharge motor control signal
CN20 1 ROMOT_*B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF roller motor control signal
3 ROMOT_B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF roller motor control signal
4 ROMOT_A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF roller motor control signal
6 ROMOT_*A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) DF roller motor control signal
2 BR_SOL O 0 V/24 V DC DF belt solenoid
2 SGND - - Ground
3 SLP_HP I 0 V/5 V DC DF slide sensor
8-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge
9Appendixes
9 - 1 Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
38 mm/1 1/2” Chager roller

40 mm/1 9/16” Developing roller
46 mm/1 13/16” Registration roller
52 mm/2 1/16” Transfer roller
63 mm/2 1/2” Developer DS pulley
89 mm/3 1/2” Fuser heat roller

94 mm/3 11/16” Drum/Fuser press roller
*The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.
9-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands
9 - 2 Firmware environment commands

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters may be changed permanently
with the FRPO (Firmware Reprogram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming the firmware
The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter values
before the changes are made. FRPO INIT command can reset all the FRPO parameters to the default settings of the
printer. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Items FRPO Setting value Factory
setting
Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Default copy number C0 1 to 999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0

1: Landscape
Default font C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switch C8 0: HP compatibility mode (Characters higher than 127 are 0
not printed.)
32: Conventional mode (Characters higher than 127 are
printed.)
Supported symbol sets: ISO-60 Norway [00D], ISO-15 Italian
[00I], ISO-11 Sweden [00S], ISO-6 ASCII [00U], ISO-4 U.K.
[01E], ISO-69 France [01F], ISO-21 Germany [01G], ISO-17
Spain [02S], Symbol [19M]*
*: 128 or more of the high code section can be printed with
any C8 value. But, when setting C8 value to 0, character
code 160 is not printed.
Print density control D4 1: Light 3
2: Slightly light
3: Standard
4: Slightly dark
5: Dark
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6

1(100V model)
9-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Reduction rate J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
Auto linefeed (LF) mode *1 J7 0: Auto linefeed 0
1: No auto linefeed
Integer section of User horizontal offset K0 -7 to +7 (cm) 0
*1
Decimal section of User horizontal offset K1 -99 to +99 (1/100 cm) 0
*1
Integer section of User vertical offset *1 K2 -7 to +7 (cm) 0
Decimal section of User vertical offset *1 K3 -99 to +99 (1/100 cm) 0
Kanji font number *1 K4 0: Same as V7 0
1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots
New/old JIS code switching *1 K6 0: New JIS mode 0
1: Old JIS mode
KIR N0 0: OFF 2
2: ON
Duplex printing mode selection N4 0: OFF 0

1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)
Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes [0: OFF] 1
Eco Print mode N6 0: OFF 0

2: ON
Resolution N8 0: 300dpi 1
1: 600dpi
3: 1200dpi
Default emulation mode P1 6: PCL6 (except PCL XL) 6
9: KPDL 9(KDA)
Carriage-return action * P2 0: Ignores 1

1: CR
2: CR+LF
Linefeed action * P3 0: Ignores 1

1: LF
2: CR+LF
9-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0
(When the optional KPDL3 upgrade kit is 1: Auto switching 1(120V model)
installed)
AES option 1-After AES is started, the P7 After AES is started, the data neither applicable to KPDL nor 10
data neither applicable to KPDL nor auto auto switching (alternate) emulation is processed in KPDL. 11(120V model)
switching (alternate) emulation is 0: AES activated by all the page exit commands.
processed in KPDL (When the optional
1: None
KPDL3 upgrade kit is installed).
2: AES activated by all the page exit commands and
Prescribe EXIT command.
3: AES activated by Prescribe EXIT command only.
4: AES activated by ^L command only.
6: AES activated by Prescribe EXIT command and ^L
command.
After AES is started, the data neither applicable to KPDL nor
auto switching (alternate) emulation is processed in KPDL.
10: AES activated by all the page exit commands and
Prescribe EXIT command.
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)
Stacker setting at start-up R0 1(Main tray) 1

3 3 (When DF-
5 470 is installed)
9-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Paper Size R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
10: ISO A3
11: JIS B4
12: Ledger
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19 Custom
30: C4
31: Cardstock
32: 20: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2 (Envelope)
53: Youkei type 4 (Envelope)
Default paper source R4 0: Multi Purpose Tray 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
MP tray paper size R7 Same as the R2 values except: 0 8
6(120V model)
A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1
1: ON 0(100V model)
Host buffer size rate S5 0: 10 KB 1
(H8 value and integration) 1: 100 KB
2: 1 MB
RAM disk size S6 1 to 1024 MB 128
RAM disk mode S7 0: OFF 1

1: ON
Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
9-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Line spacing * U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
Line spacing U1 Lines per inch (fraction value) 0
Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
Character spacing U3 Characters per inch (fraction value) 0
Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41

1: France 0(100V model)
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
21: US ASCII (U7 = 50 SET)
77: HP Roman-8 (U4 = 52 SET)
Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53
1: IBM 0(100V model)
6: IBM PC-8
50: US ASCII (U6 = 21 SET)
52: HP Roman-8 (U6 = 77 SET)
Default font pitch U8 0 to 99 10
U9 0 to 99 0
ANK outline font size at start-up* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 12
Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99
V2 Decimal value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
9-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
ANK outline font name at start-up* V3 ANK outline font name at power-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font size (100 V model V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font size at start- 0
only)*, *1 up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up 10

Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font size at start-up 0

Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMINCHO

-W3
Default weight (courier and letter Gothic) V9 0: Courier = darkness 5

Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
Media type (MP tray) X0 1: Plain 1

2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Cardstock
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom 1 to Custom 8
9-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Media type (Paper cassettes 1) X1 1: Plain 1
3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
Media type (Cassette 2, 3) X2 1: Plain 1

X3 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
Cassette selection mode (PCL) X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence 0

compatible with HP-LJ5Si
2: Paper selection depending on an escape sequence
compatible with HP-LJ8000
Auto error clear at an error (For errors to Y0 0: OFF 0

clear by pressing [Go] key only) 1: ON
Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6

(30 sec)
Paper error detection at duplex printing Y3 0 to 255 127
9-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]

setting
Forced duplex printing setting (Media Y4 0: OFF 0
type is Preprinted, Prepunched and 1: ON
Letterhead only)
PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zoom depending on paper size 0
1: Loads paper which is the same size as the image
2: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the image size
Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size
8: Printed in full magnification
Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size
e-MPS error Y6 0: No error control 3
1: Output the error list
2: Displays the error
3: Displays the error and prints the error report
*1: 100V model only

*: Ignored depending on emulation
9-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Chart of image adjustment procedures
9 - 3 Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjusting Maintenance mode Setting procedure
Item Image Page Remarks
order No. Mode Method Adjustment
1 Adjusting the center line of the MP tray U034 LSU Out Left P.6-31 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Adjustment of writing) A
numeric keys, change the moves rightward.
2 Select the adjustment content.
setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select [Dup].
Changes the LSU writing start timing. [LSU Out Left] - [MPT]
2 Press the Start key to set the
(original: Test pattern) 3 Press the System Menu key. setting value.
4 Press the Start key.
(Pattern output) 3 Press the [Stop] key.
5 Press the System Menu key.
6 Execute the adjustment.
2 Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left P.6-31 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the image
cassettes A
numeric keys, change the moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) 2 Select the adjustment content.
setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select [Dup].
[LSU Out Left] - [Cass1] to [Cass3]
Changes the LSU writing start timing.
3 Adjusting the leading edge registration U034 LSU Out Top Full P.6-31 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the image
of the MP tray A
numeric keys, change the moves downward.
setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select [Duplex].
[Lsu Out Top Full] - [MPT]
Changes the secondary paper feed
timing.
4 Adjusting the leading edge registration U034 LSU Out Top Full P.6-31 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the image
of the cassette A
numeric keys, change the moves downward.
setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select [Duplex].
[Lsu Out Top Full] – [Cass]
Changes the secondary paper feed
timing.
9-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead P.6-94 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the margin get
numeric keys, change the larger.
setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start [Lead]
timing.
6 Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-94 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the margin get
numeric keys, change the larger.
setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination end [Trail]
timing.
7 Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-94 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the *When the setting value is increased, the margin get
C Margin numeric keys, change the larger.
setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start/end Select [A Margin] or [C Margin].
timing.
8 Adjusting magnification of the scanner U065 Main Scan P.6-39 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the U065: When using on the contact glass
in the main scanning direction numeric keys, change the *When the setting value is increased, the image get
setting value. larger.
Processes data. [Main Scan]
(original: Test copy) 3 Press the System Menu key. setting value.
4 Place an original and press the Start key.
(Test copy output) 3 Press the [Stop] key.
9-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Adjusting magnification of the scanner U065 Sub Scan P.6-39 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the U065: When using on the contact glass
in the sub scanning direction (scanning numeric keys, change the *When the setting value is increased, the image get
adjustment) 2 Select the adjustment content.
U070 Sub Scan(F) P.6-45 setting value. larger.
U065: [Sub Scan]
Sub Scan(B) 2 Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scanning speed. U070: When using document processor
U070: [Sub Scan(F)] or [Sub Scan(B)] setting value.
(original: Test copy) *When the setting value is increased, the image get
longer.
4 Place an original and press the Start key. 3 Press the [Stop] key.
(Test copy output)
10 Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-43 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the U067: When using on the contact glass
(Adjustment of reading) numeric keys, change the *When the setting value is increased, the image
U072 Front P.6-48 setting value. moves leftward.
Scan data is processed. U067: [Front]
Back 2 Press the Start key to set the
U072: [Front] or [Back] setting value. U072: When using document processor
(original: Test copy) *Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of duplex
mode.
4 Place an original and press the Start key. 3 Press the [Stop] key. *When the setting value is increased, the image
(Test copy output) moves rightward.

11 Adjusting the leading edge registration U066 Front P.6-41 1 Press the Start key. 1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the U066: When using on the contact glass
(Adjustment of reading) numeric keys, change the *When the setting value is increased, the image
U071 Front Head P.6-46 setting value. moves forward.
Changes the original scan start timing. 3 Place an original and press the Start key.
Back Head 2 Press the Start key to set the
(Test copy output) setting value. U071: When using document processor
(original: Test copy) 4 Press the System Menu key. *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the time of
duplex mode.
5 Select the adjustment content. 3 Press the [Stop] key.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
U066: [Front] moves forward.
U071: [Front Head]
9-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the
following adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
• LED light intensity
Copy: ±1.5%
• Scan timing Using DP: ±2.0%
• White reference correction factor Magnification Copy: ±2.0%
• Chromatic aberration correction filter in the main scanning direction *1 Using DP: ±2.5%
Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
• Color gamma input correction factor
Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
• Color correction matrix factor Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Copy: 2.0mm or less
*1: CCD model only
Using DP: 2.5mm or less
Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), (left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less (table)
the following adjustments are automatically made:
When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly positioned 1.5mm/100 mm or less (DP)
against the original. Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
• Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070) Copy: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
• Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072) ±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
• Adjusting the DP trailing edge registration (U071)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original, the following
adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
• Adjusting the DP trailing edge registration (U071)
9-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
9 - 4 Wiring diagram
(1) Engine
YC1 YC1
TH 2 1 TH YC2 YC8 YC18
N.C. 1 2 N.C. DLP_TH 1 1 16 16 DLP_TH
FEED_CL_REM 1 1 3 3 REM
N.C. 4 3 N.C. 3.3V2_E 2 2 15 15 3.3V2_E Feed clutch
24V2 2 2 1 1 24V
3.3V2_E 3 4 3.3V2_E DLP_SCL 3 3 14 14 DLP_SCL
N.C. 6 5 N.C. DLP_SDA 4 4 13 13 DLP_SDA
REG_CL_REM 3 3 3 3 REM
N.C. 5 6 N.C. GND 5 5 12 12 GND Registration clutch
24V2 4 4 1 1 24V
N.C. 8 7 N.C.
GND 7 8 GND
DU_CL_REM 5 5 3 3 REM
DLP_SDA 10 9 DLP_SDA Duplex clutch
EEPROM 24V2 6 6 1 1 24V
DLP_SCL 9 10 DLP_SCL
24V2 7 7 2 1 24V
Developer PWB Developer relay PWB Drum PWB Drum relay PWB MPF_SOL_REM 8 8 1
Relay 2 REM
MP solenoid
YC3 YC2 YC2
4 4 4 ERASE3 DRUM_SDA 2 1 DRUM_SDA YC1 GND 9 9 2 2 REM
Lift motor
3 3 3 ERASE2 WT_SENS 1 2 WT_SENS 24V2 1 1 11 11 24V2 LMOT_REM 10 10 1 1 24V
Eraser 2 2 2 ERASE1 3.3V2_E 4 3 3.3V2_E ERASE 2 2 10 10 ERASE
1 1 1 24V2 WT_LED 3 4 WT_LED DLP_CL_REM 11 11 3 3 REM
Developer clutch
DRUM_SCL 6 5 DRUM_SCL 3.3V2_LED 3 3 9 9 3.3V2_LED 24V2 12 12 1 1 24V
EEPROM 3.3V2_LED 5 6 3.3V2_LED WT_SENS 4 4 8 8 WT_SENS
NC 8 7 NC WT_LED 5 5 7 7 WT_LED YC17
YC1 ERASE_REM 7 8 ERASE_REM GND 6 6 6 6 GND EJE_SOL_PULL 1 1 PULL
4 4 3.3V2_LED GND 10 9 GND 24V2 2 2 24V Feed-shift solenoid
3 3 WT_SENS 24V2 9 10 24V2 DRUM_SCL 7 7 5 5 DRUM_SCL EJE_SOL_RETURN 3 3 RETURN
Waste toner sensor
2 2 WT_LED DRUM_SDA 8 8 4 4 DRUM_SDA
1 1 3.3V2_E 3.3V2_E 9 9 3 3 3.3V2_E YC16
EXIT_/B 1 1 4 4 /B
EXIT_/A 2 2 3 3 /A
EXIT_B 3 3 2 2 B Exit motor
EXIT_A 4 4 1 1 A
1WIRE 2 2 1 2 2 1WIRE 3.3V2_LED 5 5 3 3 3.3V

Container PWB Container relay PWB GND 3 1
Relay
2 1 1 GND GND 6 6 2 2 GND JS full sensor
EXIT_FULL_UP 7 7 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 8 8 3 3 3.3V
YC9 GND 9 9 2 2 GND Paper full sensor
3.3V2_E 3 3 1 1 3.3V2_E EXIT_FULL_DOWN 10 10 1 1 Vout
Toner sensor Vout 2 Relay 2 2 2 TNR_EMP
GND 1 1 3 3 GND FUSER_SW 11 11 3 3 1 1 Vout
GND 12 12 2 Relay 2 2 2 GND Exit sensor
3.3V2_LED 13 13 1 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 1 4 4 CON_LOCK 3.3V2_LED 14 14 3 3 3.3V
Container lock sensor GND 2 2 4 2 5 5 GND GND 15 15 2 2 GND JS paper sensor
3.3V 3 3 3 3 6 6 3.3V2_LED JOB_TRAY 16 16 1 1 Vout
Relay
Container switch GND 2 1 2 4 7 7 GND EXIT_FAN_REM 17 17 2 2 GND

SW 1 2 1 5 8 8 TCONSET 24V2 18 18 1 Relay 1 24V Exit fan motor
YC28
THERM 4 1 4 4 9 9 THERM FUM_FAN_REM 1 1 2 2 REM
GND 3 2 3 3 10 10 GND Relay HUM FAN
Temp/Humid sensor Relay 24V2 2 2 1 1 24V
HUM_OUT 2 3 2 2 11 11 HUM_OUT
HUM_CLK 1 4 1 1 12 12 HUM_CLK
YC24
24V 1 2 13 13 24V 24V2_IL 1 1 1 1 24V
LSU fan motor REM 2 Relay 1 14 14 LSU_FAN_REM GND 2 2 2 2 GND
MAIN_MOT_REM 3 3 3 3 MAIN_MOT_REM
Main motor
MAIN_MOT_CLK 4 4 4 4 MAIN_MOT_CLK
YC4 YC14 MAIN_MOT_RDY 5 5 5 5 MAIN_MOT_RDY
ZCROSS 7 7 1 1 ZCROSS MAIN_MOT_DIR 6 6 6 6 MAIN_MOT_DIR
RELAYREM 6 6 2 2 RELAYREM
MHREM 5 5 3 3 MHREM 24V2_IL 7 7 1 1 24V
SHREM 4 4 4 4 SHREM GND 8 8 2 2 GND
ILVCC 3 3 5 5 ILVCC FSR_MOT_REM 9 9 3 3 FSR_MOT_REM
Fuser motor
GND 2 2 6 6 GND FSR_MOT_CLK 10 10 4 4 FSR_MOT_CLK
24V2_IL 1 1 7 7 24V2_IL FSR_MOT_RDY 11 11 5 5 FSR_MOT_RDY
FSR_MOT_DIR 12 12 6 6 FSR_MOT_DIR
YC2 YC26
24V2_IL1 1 1 1 1 24V2_IL1 YC25
GND 2 2 2 2 GND 24V2_IL 1 1 1 1 24V
GND 3 3 3 3 GND GND 2 2 2 2 GND
24V2 4 4 4 4 24V2 DLP_MOT_REM 3 3 3 3 DLP_MOT_REM
DLP_MOT_CLK 4 4 4 4 DLP_MOT_CLK Developer motor
24V2 5 5 5 5 24V2
DLP_MOT_RDY 5 5 5 5 DLP_MOT_RDY
Low voltage DLP_MOT_DIR 6 6 6 6 DLP_MOT_DIR
power source PWB (1/2) YC2 YC25 YC27
24V2 1 1 1 1 GND 24V2_IL1 1 1
Right cover switch
GND 2 2 2 2 24V2 24V2_IL2 2 2
5V0 3 3 3 3 5V0 YC21
5V0 4 4 4 4 5V0
5V0 5 5 5 5 5V0 FEED_FAN_REM 1 1 5 1 2 2 REM
Relay Conveying fan motor
GND 6 6 6 6 SLEEP 24V2_IL 2 2 4 2 1 1 24V
GND 7 7 7 7 GND Engine PWB Relay
GND 8 8 8 8 GND 3.3V2_LED 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,.3V
SLEEP 9 9 9 9 GND GND 4 4 2 4 2 2 GND DU sensor
10 10 AC_DOWN DU_SW 5 5 1 5 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 6 6 3 3 3.3V
YC3 Main PWB GND 7 7 2 2 GND Conveying sensor
24VIL1 4 4 1 1 FEED_SW 8 8 1 1 Vout
N.C. 3 3
24V2 2 2 2 3 Front cover switch 3.3V3_LED 9 9 3 1 3 3 3.3V
ILVCC 1 1 3 2 GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 2 2 GND MP paper sensor
MPF_REMAIN 11 11 1 3 1 1 Vout
YC19
3.3V 3 3 1 6 1 1 3.3V2_LED GND 12 12 1 3 REM
Lift sensor GND 2 2 2 5 2 2 GND FSR_PRESS_MOT_REM 13 13 2 2 Fuser pressure release motor
Vout 1 1 3 4 3 3 LIFTFULL 3 1 24V
Relay YC12
5V 3 3 4 3 4 4 5V2_E
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 5 2 5 5 RESIST 1
GND 1 1 6 1 6 6 GND 2
3
4
24V2 5 3 1 1 24V
YC20 6 2 2 Relay 2 REM Power source fan motor
LVU_FAN_REM
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V2_LED
Upper paper sensor GND 2 2 2 2 GND
Vout 1 1 3 3 PAPEMP1 YC23
24V2 1 1 5 1 5 5 24V2
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3V2_LED GND 2 2 4 2 4 4 GND
Lower paper sensor GND 2 2 5 5 GND POL_REM 3 3 3 Relay 3 3 3 S/S Polygon motor
Vout 1 1 6 6 PAPEMP2 POL_READY 4 4 2 4 2 2 READY
POL_CLK 5 5 1 5 1 1 CLK
CN-3 4 4 7 7 PAPLSIZE3
Paper length switch GND 3 3 8 8 GND
Paper width switch SIZE_SW 2 2 11 11 PAPWSIZE1

GND 1 1 12 12 GND
9-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
(2) Engine / ISU/ EH/ LVU/ Fuser
YC15
SCAN_/B 1 1 4 4 B/
SCAN_/A 2 2 2 2 A
SCAN_B 3 3 3 3 B Scanner motor
SCAN_A 4 4 1 1 A/
3.3V2_LED 5 5 3 3 3.3V
GND 6 6 2 2 GND Home position sensor
HP_SENS 7 7 1 1 Vout
(CIS model)
YC4 3.3V2_LED 8 8 3 3 3.3V
GND 19 19 1 19 1 1 GND GND 9 9 2 2 GND Origial size timing sensor
GND 18 18 2 18 2 2 GND TABLE_OPEN 10 10 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 3 17 3 3 GND
GND 16 16 4 16 4 4 GND GND 11 11 3 3 GND
24V2 15 15 5 15 5 5 24V2 ORG_SENS 12 12 2 2 Vout Original size sensor
24V2 14 14 6 14 6 6 24V2 5V2_E 13 13 1 1 5V
3.3V2_E 13 13 7 13 7 7 3.3V2_E
3.3V2_E 12 12 8 12 8 8 3.3V2_E
DP_CLK 11 11 9 11 9 9 DP_CLK
DP unit DP_SO 10 10 10 Relay 10 10 10 DP_SO
DP_SEL 9 9 11 9 11 11 DP_SEL
DP_SI 8 8 12 8 12 12 DP_SI YC15
DP_RDY 7 7 13 7 13 13 DP_RDY SCAN_/B 1 1 4 4 B/
DP_TMG 6 6 14 6 14 14 DP_TMG SCAN_/A 2 2 3 3 A/
SCAN_B 3 3 2 2 B Scanner motor
DP_OPEN 5 5 15 5 15 15 DP_OPEN
DP_ORG_SET 4 4 16 4 16 16 DP_ORG_SET SCAN_A 4 4 1 1 A
3.3V3 3 3 17 3 17 17 3.3V3
GND 2 2 18 2 18 18 GND 3.3V2_LED 5 5 3 3 3.3V
1 1 19 1 GND 6 6 2 2 GND Home position sensor
HP_SENS 7 7 1 1 Vout
(CCD model)
3.3V2_LED 8 8 3 3 3.3V
YC5 GND 9 9 2 2 GND Origial size timing sensor
EH_CLK 2 1 1 EH_CLK TABLE_OPEN 10 10 1 1 Vout
EH_SI 4 2 2 EH_SI
EH_SO 3 3 3 EH_SO GND 11 11 3 3 GND
BR_SEL 1 4 4 BR_SEL ORG_SENS 12 12 2 2 Vout Original size sensor
DF_SEL 15 5 5 DF_SEL 5V2_E 13 13 1 1 5V
EH_RDY 5 6 6 DF_RDY
N.C. 6
DF (option) 3.3V2_E 12 7 7 3.3V2_E
3.3V_DFSLEEP 13 8 8 3.3V2_E
GND 8 9 9 GND YC10 CN1
GND 10 10 10 GND 24V2_IL 1 1 1 1 24V2_IL
N.C. 7 24V2_IL 2 2 2 2 24V2_IL
N.C. 9 MC_CLK 3 3 3 3 MC_CLK
N.C. 11 MC_ACCNT 4 4 4 4 MC_ACCNT
KEY 14 MC_DCCNT 5 5 5 5 MC_DCCNT
MC_ISENS 6 6 6 6 MC_ISENS
Engine PWB DC_REM 7 7 7 7 DC_REM
TRA_CNT 8 8 FFC 8 8 TRA_CNT High volltage PWB
32 ppm model only SEP_REM 9 9 9 9 SEP_REM
NC 10 10 10 10 NC
DLP_CLK 11 11 11 11 DLP_CLK
DLP_CNT 12 12 12 12 DLP_CNT
GND 13 13 13 13 GND
GND 14 14 14 14 GND
YC7
BR_SET 1 1 2 2 SW
GND 2 2 1 1 GND BR switch (32 ppm model)
LVU_SEL 3 3 (Not connected for E)
GND 4 4
YC6
7 1 1 EH_CLK YC7
6 2 2 EH_SI
5 3 3 EH_SO BR_SET 1 1
GND 2 2 (25 ppm model)
4 4 4 PF_SEL (Not connected for E)
3 5 5 PF_RDY LVU_SEL 3 3
2 6 6 PF_SET GND 4 4
1 7 7 PF_PAUSE
YC13
5 8 8 24V2
4 9 9 3.3V3 FSR_TOBJ 1 1 7 7 FSR_TOBJ
3 10 10 3.3V2_E GND 2 2 6 6 GND
2 11 11 GND 3.3V2_E 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_E
1 12 12 GND FSR_TAMB 4 4 4 4 FSR_TAMB Thermopile
THP_SDA 5 5 3 3 THP_SDA
THP_SCL 6 6 2 2 THP_SCL
1 1 WP
PF (option)
2 1 GND
GND 7 7 5 1 Relay Fuser thermistor
FSR_EDGE 8 8 4 2 1 2 TH1
3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 3
4 GND 10 10 2 4 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS 11 11 1 5 2 2 GND Fuser pressure release sensor
1 1 Vout
PF connection switch
BLACK YC5 TB4 Thermal cutout Thermal cutout
1 AC_LIVE AC_LIVE 1 1 Cassette_H_LIVE LIVE 1 1 1 1 #250 #250 #250 #250
2 AC_NEUTRAL AC_NEUTRAL 5 5 Cassette_H_NEUTRAL YC4

WHITE 3 N.C MH 1 1 2 2 Fuser main heater
4 N.C
AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE 2 2 Cassette_H_LIVE SH 2 2 3 3 Fuser sub heater
Cassette heater Fuser heart roller Zener PWB
AC_NEUTRAL 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL 6 6 Cassette_H_NEUTRAL
YC6
AC_LIVE 1 1 CH_SW Low voltage
Cassette heater switch 2 N.C power source PWB (2/2)
AC_LIVE 3 3 CH_COM
BLACK TB1 YC8 BLACK

AC_LIVE #250 1 AC_LIVE AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
Inlet WHITE
WHITE TB2 AC_NEUTRAL 3 3 AC_NEUTRAL Outlet
AC_NEUTRAL #187 1 AC_NEUTRAL
32 ppm model only
9-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
(3) Operation Panel / LCD
YC13 YC10
GND 1 1 1 1 GND
LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF LCD PWB
LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN YC9
GND 4 4 4 4 GND VLED+ 50 50 50 LED+
TX0N 5 5 5 5 RX0N VLED+ 49 49 49 LED+
TX0P 6 6 6 6 RX0P VLED- 48 48 48 LED-
GND 7 7 7 7 GND VLED- 47 47 47 LED-
GND 46 46 46 GND
VCOM 45 45 45 VCOM
DVDD 44 44 44 DVDD
Main PWB Operation panel PWB MODE 43 43 43 MODE
DE 42 42 42 DE
VSD 41 41 41 VS
HSD 40 40 40 HS
YC12 YC7 B7 39 39 39 B7
5V1 29 29 A1 A1 5V1 B6 38 38 38 B6
5V1 27 27 A2 A2 5V1 B5 37 37 37 B5
5V1 25 25 A3 A3 5V1 B4 36 36 36 B4
5V1 23 23 A4 A4 5V1 B3 35 35 35 B3
GND 21 21 A5 A5 GND B2 34 34 34 B2
INT_ANYKEY 19 19 A6 A6 INT_ANYKEY B1 33 33 33 B1
DISPLAY_POWERON 17 17 A7 A7 DISPLAY_POWERON B0 32 32 32 B0
C2P_SCK 15 15 A8 A8 C2P_SCK G7 31 31 31 G7
P2C_SBSY 13 13 A9 A9 P2C_SBSY G6 30 30 30 G6
P2C_SDIR 11 11 A10 A10 P2C_SDIR G5 29 29 29 G5 (7 inch model)
C2P_SDAT 9 9 A11 A11 C2P_SDAT G4 28 28 28 G4
P2C_SDAT 7 7 A12 A12 P2C_SDAT G3 27 27 27 G3
FPRST 5 5 A13 A13 FPRST G2 26 26 26 G2
3.3V2_NFC 3 3 A14 A14 3.3V2_NFC G1 25 25 FPC 25 G1
I2C_SCL_NFC 1 1 A15 A15 I2C_SCL_NFC G0 24 24 24 G0
R7 23 23 23 R7
R6 22 22 22 R6
R5 21 21 21 R5
R4 20 20 20 R4
I2C_SDA_NFC 2 2 B1 B1 I2C_SDA_NFC R3 19 19 19 R3
NIRQ 4 4 B2 B2 NIRQ R2 18 18 18 R2
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY 6 6 B3 B3 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N R1 17 17 17 R1
PNL_WKUP_REQ 8 8 B4 B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ R0 16 16 16 R0
AUDIO 10 10 B5 B5 AUDIO GND 15 15 15 GND
NC 12 12 B6 B6 NC DCLK 14 14 14 DCLK
LED_ATTENTION 14 14 B7 B7 LED_ATTENTION GND 13 13 13 GND
LED_MEMORY 16 16 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY SHLR 12 12 12 L/R
BEEP_POWERON 18 18 B9 B9 BEEP_POWERON UPDN 11 11 11 U/D
GND 20 20 B10 B10 GND VDDG 10 10 10 VGH
GND 22 22 B11 B11 GND VEEG 9 9 9 VGL
GND 24 24 B12 B12 GND AVDD 8 8 8 AVDD
JOB_LED 26 26 B13 B13 JOB_LED RSTB 7 7 7 RESET
B14 B14 GND NC 6 6 6 ID1
GND 28 28 2 Relay 1 RED B15 B15 NC VCOM 5 5 5 VCOM
POWER_SW 30 30 1 2 BLACK DITH 4 4 4 DITHB
GND 3 3 3 GND
Power switch NC 2 2 2 ID2
NC 1 1 1 ID3
YC1 YC5
GND 12 12 1 1 GND
SCAN0 11 11 2 2 SCAN0
KEY0 10 10 3 3 KEY0
NC 9 9 4 4 NC
KEY1 8 8 5 5 KEY1
NC 7 7 6 6 NC
Panelkey-L PWB SCAN1 6 6 FFC 7 7 SCAN1
SCAN2 5 5 8 8 SCAN2 LCD PWB
NC 4 4 9 9 NC YC20
NC 3 3 10 10 NC VLED- 40 40 40 LEDK
LED0 2 2 11 11 LED0 VLED+ 39 39 39 LEDA
JOB_LED 1 1 12 12 JOB_LED NC 38 38 38 GND
DVDD 37 37 37 VCC
R0 36 36 36 R0
R1 35 35 35 R1
R2 34 34 34 R2
R3 33 33 33 R3
YC1 YC4 R4 32 32 32 R4
SCAN7 1 1 19 19 SCAN7 R5 31 31 31 R5
SCAN6 2 2 18 18 SCAN6 R6 30 30 30 R6
SCAN5 3 3 17 17 SCAN5 R7 29 29 29 R7
SCAN4 4 4 16 16 SCAN4 G0 28 28 28 G0
SCAN3 5 5 15 15 SCAN3 G1 27 27 27 G1
SCAN2 6 6 14 14 SCAN2 G2 26 26 26 G2
KEY3 7 7 13 13 KEY3 G3 25 25 25 G3
KEY2 8 8 12 12 KEY2 G4 24 24 24 G4
KEY1 9 9 11 11 KEY1 G5 23 23 23 G5
Panelkey R PWB KEY0 10 10 FFC 10 10 KEY0 G6 22 22 22 G6 (4.3 inch model)
ENERGYSAVER KEY 11 11 9 9 ENERGYSAVER KEY G7 21 21 21 G7
ENERGYSAVER LED 12 12 8 8 ENERGYSAVER LED B0 20 20 FPC 20 B0
PROCESSING 13 13 7 7 PROCESSING B1 19 19 19 B1
MEMORY 14 14 6 6 MEMORY B2 18 18 18 B2
ATTENTION 15 15 5 5 ATTENTION B3 17 17 17 B3
GND 16 16 4 4 GND B4 16 16 16 B4
LED2 17 17 3 3 LED2 B5 15 15 15 B5
LED1 18 18 2 2 LED1 B6 14 14 14 B6
5V1 19 19 1 1 5V1 B7 13 13 13 B7
GND 12 12 12 GND
CLK 11 11 11 CLK
RESET 10 10 10 DISP
HSYNC 9 9 9 HSYNC
VSYNC 8 8 8 VSYNC
YC6 DEN 7 7 7 DEN
- 1 1 SPEAKER_P NC 6 6 6 NC
Speaker + 2 2 SPEAKER_N GND 5 5 5 GND
NC 4 4 4 ID1
YC8 NC 3 3 3 ID2
XR 1 1 1 XR NC 2 2 2 ID3
YB 2 2 2 YB NC 1 1 1 ID4
Touch panel XL 3 FPC 3 3 XL
YT 4 4 4 YT
YC1 YC3
3.3V2 5 5 1 1 3.3V2_NFC
GND 4 4 2 2 GND
NFC PWB NFC_SWCLK 3 3 3 3 NFC_SWCLK
NFC_SWDA 2 2 4 4 NFC_SWDA
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ
9-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
(4) Main/ Engine/ Operation Panel/ ISU/ LSU
YC3
SD_D3 1 1 1 1 SD_D3 YC6
Engine PWB Main PWB SD_D2 2 2 2 2 SD_D2 VBUS 1 1
SD_CMD 3 3 3 3 SD_CMD DATA- 2 2
GND 4 4 4 4 GND DATA+ 3 3 USB host (Side)
SD_CLK 5 5 5 5 SD_CLK ID 4 4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND SHEELD-G 5 5
YC3 YC26 SD_D1 7 7 7 7 SD_D1 LockPin(1) LP-1
OVSYNCMON 38 38 1 1 OVSYNCMON SD_D0 8 8 8 8 SD_D0 LockPin(2) LP-2
PAGEST 37 37 2 2 PAGEST GND 9 9 9 9 GND
SCAN_E2C_SCK 36 36 3 3 SCAN_E2C_SCK VIO 10 10 FFC 10 10 VIO Wi-Fi PWB YC5
SCAN_C2E_SDAT 35 35 4 4 SCAN_C2E_SDAT VBAT 11 11 11 11 VBAT VBUS 1 1
SCAN_E2C_SDAT 34 34 5 5 SCAN_E2C_SDAT GND 12 12 12 12 GND (100/120V: Standard) DATA- 2 2
SCAN_E2C_SEL 33 33 6 6 SCAN_E2C_SEL PAVDD 13 13 13 13 PAVDD (Other: Option) DATA+ 3 3 USB host (Front)
SCAN_C2E_RDY 32 32 7 7 SCAN_C2E_RDY GND 14 14 14 14 GND ID 4 4
C2E_SCK 31 31 8 8 C2E_SCK HOSTWAKE 15 15 15 15 HOSTWAKE SHEELD-G 5 5
C2E_SDAT 30 30 9 9 C2E_SDAT GND 16 16 16 16 GND LockPin(1) LP-1
E2C_SDAT 29 29 10 10 E2C_SDAT RESET 17 17 17 17 NC LockPin(2) LP-2
E2C_SDIR 28 28 11 11 E2C_SDIR GND 18 18 18 18 GND
E2C_IR 27 27 12 12 E2C_IR USB_+ 19 19 19 19 USB_+
E2C_SBSY 26 26 13 13 E2C_SBSY USB_- 20 20 20 20 USB_-
GND 25 25 14 14 GND
EG_SCL 24 24 15 15 EG_SCL CCD PWB
GND 23 23 16 16 GND YC3002 YC1
EG_SDA 22 22 17 17 EG_SDA +12V3_C 25 1 +12V3_C
GND 21 21 18 18 GND YC1 +12V3_C 24 2 +12V3_C
PVSYNC 20 20 19 19 PVSYNC YC27 YC3 5V1 1 1 5V1 NC 23 3 NC
FFC
5V4_IL 19 19 20 20 5V4_IL VBUS1 1 1 1 1 VBUS1 GND 2 2 GND 5V5 22 4 5V5
C2E_QUICK_START 18 18 21 21 C2E_QUICK_START USB_DN1 2 2 2 2 USB_DN1 RESETN 3 3 RESETN 5V5 21 5 5V5
E2C_WKUP_BGD_N 17 17 22 22 E2C_WKUP_BGD_N USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1 5V2 4 4 5V2 NC 20 6 NC
ENGHLD 16 16 23 23 ENGHLD AUDIO1 4 4 4 4 AUDIO1 GND 5 5 GND CCDCLK1 19 7 CCDCLK1
SCANHLD 15 15 24 24 SCANHLD WAKEUP1 5 5 5 5 WAKEUP1 WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP GND 18 8 GND
DUTY_COTROL 14 14 25 25 DUTY_COTROL RESET1 6 6 6 6 RESET1 AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO CCD_RS 17 9 CCD_RS
E2C_WKUP_RDY_N 13 13 26 26 E2C_WKUP_RDY_N GND 7 7 7 7 GND RESERVE 8 8 NC GND 16 10 GND
5V2_E 12 12 27 27 5V2_E GND 8 8 8 8 GND RESERVE 9 9 NC CCDCLK2 15 11 CCDCLK2
C2E_STBY_ASIC 11 11 28 28 C2E_STBY_ASIC GND 9 9 9 9 GND RESERVE 10 10 NC eKUIO PWB GND 14 12 GND
3.3V2_E 10 10 29 29 3.3V2_E GND 10 10 10 10 GND GND 11 11 GND (option) CCD_SH 13 13 CCD_SH
3.3V2_E 9 9 30 30 3.3V2_E GND 11 11 11 11 NC RESERVE 12 12 NC GND 12 FFC 14 GND
3.3V2_E 8 8 31 31 3.3V2_E NC 12 12 12 12 5V1 RESERVE 13 13 NC OS1_BO 11 15 OS1_BO
3.3V1 7 7 32 32 3.3V1 5V1 13 13 13 13 5V1 GND 14 14 GND GND 10 16 GND
NC 6 6 33 33 NC 5V1 14 14 14 14 5V1 RESERVE 15 15 NC OS2_BE 9 17 OS2_BE
NC 5 5 34 34 NC 5V1 15 15 15 15 5V2 RESERVE 16 16 NC GND 8 18 GND
GND 4 4 35 35 GND 5V2 16 16 16 16 5V2 GND 17 17 GND OS4_GE 7 19 OS4_GE
GND 3 3 36 36 GND 5V2 17 17 FFC 17 17 5V2 USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP GND 6 20 GND
GND 2 2 37 37 GND 5V2 18 18 18 18 5V2 USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN OS3_GO 5 21 OS3_GO
JOB_LED 1 1 38 38 JOB_LED 5V2 19 19 19 19 5V2 VBUS 20 20 VBUS GND 4 22 GND
5V2 20 20 20 20 5V2 LockPin1 LP-1 OS5_RO 3 23 OS5_RO
5V2 21 21 21 21 5V2 LockPin2 LP-2 GND 2 24 GND
5V2 22 22 22 22 NC OS6_RE 1 25 OS6_RE
NC 23 23 23 23 GND YC2
GND 24 24 24 24 GND 5V1 1 1 VDD5
GND 25 25 25 25 GND GND 2 2 GND
YC2 GND 26 26 26 26 GND RESETN 3 3 RESETN
1 CD/DAT3 GND 27 27 27 27 GND 5V2 4 4 VDD5_CUT
2 CMD VBUS0 28 28 28 28 VBUS0 GND 5 5 GND
3 VSS USB_DN0 29 29 29 29 USB_DN0 WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
4 VDD USB_DP0 30 30 30 30 USB_DP0 AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
LED drive PWB LED F PWB
5 CLK AUDIO0 31 31 31 31 AUDIO0 RESERVE 8 8 NC YC3003 YC1 YC2 YC1
6 VSS WAKEUP0 32 32 32 32 WAKEUP0 RESERVE 9 9 NC +12V3_C 1 1 +12V3_C LED F_C 2 2 1 1 LED F_C
7 DAT0 RESET0 33 33 33 33 RESET0 RESERVE 10 10 NC eKUIO PWB +12V3_C 2 2 +12V3_C
SDCard LED F_A 1 1 2 2 LED F_A
(option) 8 DAT1 LockPin(1) LP-1 LP-1 LockPin(1) GND 11 11 GND (option) LED_PWM 3 3 LED_PWM
9 DAT2 LockPin(2) LP-2 LP-2 LockPin(2) RESERVE 12 12 NC LED_ENA 4 FFC 4 LED_ENA
10 CD LockPin(3) LP-3 LP-3 LockPin(3) RESERVE 13 13 NC GND 5 5 GND
11 COMMON GND 14 14 GND GND 6 6 GND YC3 YC1
12 WP RESERVE 15 15 NC LED R_C 2 2 1 1 LED F_C
LP-1 LockPin(1) RESERVE 16 16 NC LED R_A 1 1 2 2 LED F_A
LP-2 LockPin(2) GND 17 17 GND
LP-3 LockPin(3) USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
LP-3 LockPin(4) USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN LED R PWB
VBUS 20 20 VBUS
LockPin1 LP-1 YC3001
YC4 LockPin2 LP-2 LED1_R 36 36 LED1_R
1 VBUS LED1_G 35 35 LED1_G
2 D- LED1_B 34 34 LED1_B
3 D+ LED_COM1 33 33 LED_COM1
USB Device 4 GND GND 32 32 GND
5 STDB_SSTX- OS9 31 31 OS9
6 STDB_SSTX+ GND 30 30 GND
7 GND OS8 29 29 OS8
8 STDB_SSRX- GND 28 28 GND
9 STDB_SSRX+ YC24 YC105 OS7 27 27 OS7
LP-1 LockPin(1) 3.3V4 12 12 1 12 1 9 3.3V4 GND 26 26 GND
LP-2 LockPin(2) PDN 11 11 2 11 2 8 PDN OS6 25 25 OS6
VCONT 10 10 3 10 3 7 VCONT GND 24 24 GND
OUTPEN 9 9 4 9 4 6 OUTPEN OS5 23 23 OS5
YC9 SAMPLE1 8 8 5 8 5 5 SAMPLE1 GND 22 22 GND
R1 TD1+ 7 7 6 7 OS4 21 21 OS4
R2 TD1- VDATA1P 6 6 7 Relay 6 6 4 VDATA1P APC PWB GND 20 20 GND
R3 TD2+ VDATA1N 5 5 8 5 7 3 VDATA1N OS3 19 19 OS3
R4 TD2- 4 4 9 4 GND 18 18 GND
R5 CT1 3 3 10 3 OS2 17 17 OS2
CIS PWB
FFC
R6 CT2 GND 2 2 11 2 8 2 GND GND 16 16 GND
Ethernet R7 TD3+ 5V4_IL 1 1 12 1 9 1 5V4_IL OS1 15 15 OS1
R8 TD3- GND 14 14 GND
R9 TD4+ CLK 13 13 CLK
R10 TD4- GND 12 12 GND
L1 GRLED_A VREF 11 11 VREF
L2 GRLED_K SP 10 10 SP
L3 GRLED_A_OGLED_K MODE 9 9 MODE
L4 GRLED_K_OGLED_A LED2_R 8 8 LED2_R
LP-1 LockPin(1) LED2_G 7 7 LED2_G
LP-2 LockPin(2) LED2_B 6 6 LED2_B
LED_COM2 5 5 LED_COM2
PullDown 4 4 PullDown
3.3V5 3 3 3.3V5
3.3V5 2 2 3.3V5
3.3V5 1 1 3.3V5
9-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram
(5) Document Processor

YC2 YC4
*1' 19 19 1 19 1 1 *1'
*1' 18 18 2 18 2 2 *1'
*1' 17 17 3 17 3 3 *1'
'33:% *1' 16 16 4 16 4 4 *1'
24V2 15 15 5 15 5 5 24V2
24V2 14 14 6 14 6 6 24V2
3.3V2_E 13 13 7 13 7 7 3.3V2_E
3.3V2_E 12 12 8 12 8 8 3.3V2_E
'3B&/. 11 11 9 11 9 9 '3B&/. (QJLQH3:%
(1*,1(ĺ'3 '3B62 10 10 10 5HOD\ 10 10 10 '3B62
'3B6(/ 9 9 11 9 11 11 '3B6(/
'3ĺ(1*,1( '3B6, 8 8 12 8 12 12 '3B6,
'3B5'< 7 7 13 7 13 13 '3B5'<
'3B70* 6 6 14 6 14 14 '3B70*
'3B23(1 5 5 15 5 15 15 '3B23(1
'3B25*B6(7 4 4 16 4 16 16 '3B25*B6(7
3.3V3 3 3 17 3 17 17 3.3V3
*1' 2 2 18 2 18 18 *1'
FG 1 1 19 1
YC4
3.3V3 1 1 3 3 3.3V3
*1' 2 2 2 2 *1' '3RULJLQDOVHQVRU
SET_SW 3 3 1 1 SET_SW
3.3V2_E 4 4 3 3 3.3V2
*1' 5 5 2 2 *1' '3IHHGVHQVRU
)(('B6: 6 6 1 1 )(('B6:
3.3V2_E 7 7 3 1 3 3 3.3V2
*1' 8 8 2 5HOD\ 2 2 2 *1' '3UHJLVWUDWLRQVHQVRU
REGIST_SW 9 9 1 3 1 1 REGIST_SW
3.3V3 10 10 3 3 3.3V3
*1' 11 11 2 2 *1' '3RSHQFORVHVZLWFK
'3B23(1B6: 12 12 1 1 '3B23(1B6:
3.3V2_E 13 13 3 3 3.3V2
*1' 14 14 2 2 *1' '3IHHGVKLIWVHQVRU
+3B6: 15 15 1 1 +3B6:
3.3V2_E 16 16 3 3 3.3V2
*1' 17 17 2 2 *1' '3WLPLQJVHQVRU
TIMING_SW 18 18 1 1 TIMING_SW
YC7
)(('B027B$ 1 1 1 1 )(('B027B$
)(('B027B% 2 2 4 4 )(('B027B%
'3IHHGPRWRU
)(('B027B$ 3 3 3 3 )(('B027B$
)(('B027B% 4 4 6 6 )(('B027B%
CONV_MOT_A 5 5 1 1 CONV_MOT_A
CONV_MOT_/A 6 6 3 3 CONV_MOT_/A
'3FRQYH\LQJPRWRU
CONV_MOT_B 7 7 4 4 CONV_MOT_B
CONV_MOT_/B 8 8 6 6 CONV_MOT_/B
JNC_MOT_A 9 9 1 1 JNC_MOT_A
JNC_MOT_B 10 10 2 2 JNC_MOT_B
'3IHHGVKLIWPRWRU
JNC_MOT_/A 11 11 3 3 JNC_MOT_/A
JNC_MOT_/B 12 12 4 4 JNC_MOT_/B
CL_REM 13 13 1 1 CL_REM
2 2 NC '3UHJLVWUDWLRQFOXWFK
9,/B'3 14 14 3 3 9,/B'3
YC6
3.3V2_E 1 1 3 3 3.3V2
*1' 2 2 2 2 *1' '3RULJLQDOOHQJWKVHQVRU
LS_SW 3 3 1 1 LS_SW
3.3V2_E 4 4 3 3 3.3V2
WSIZE 5 5 2 2 WSIZE '3RULJLQDOZLGWKVHQVRU
*1' 6 6 1 1 *1'
YC3
24V2 1 1 1 1 24V2
NC 2 2 '3WRSFRYHUVZLWFK
9,/B'3 3 3 2 2 9,/B'3
YC1
3.3V2_E 1 1
02'( 2 2
5;' 3 3
7;' 4 4
NC 5 5
RSTN 6 6
*1' 7 7
YC5
9,/B'3 1 1
FAN_REM 2 2
9-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Wiring diagram (Options)
9 - 5 Wiring diagram (Options)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-470/PF-471)
Main body PF PWB YC3

3.3V4 1 1 3 1 3 3
GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 PF lift sensor 1
Engine PWB YC1
PFLS1 3 3 1 3 1 1
EH_CLK 1 1 7 1 12 12 EH_CLK 3.3V4 4 4 3 3
EH_SI 2 2 6 2 11 11 E H _ S O GND 5 5 2 2 PF upper paper sensor 1
EH_SO 3 3 5 3 10 10 EH_SI PFPS1(U) 6 6 1 1
PF_SEL 4 4 4 4 9 9 PF_SEL
PF_RDY 5 5 3 5 8 8 PF_RDY 3.3V4 7 7 3 3
PF_SET 6 6 2 6 7 7 PF_SET GND 8 8 2 2 PF lower paper sensor 1
P F _ PA U S E 7 7 1 7 6 6 P F _ PA U S E PFPS1(L) 9 9 1 1
24V4 8 8 5 1 5 5 24V4 3.3V4 10 10 3 1 3 3

3.3V0 9 9 4 2 4 4 3.3V0 G N D 11 11 2 2 2 2 PF conveying sensor 1
3.3V4 10 10 3 3 3 3 3.3V4 PFFS1 12 12 1 3 1 1
G N D 11 11 2 4 2 2 GND
GND 12 12 1 5 1 1 GND
YC4
LIFT_REM1 1 1 2 2
PF lift motor 1
24V4 2 2 1 1
REG_CL_REM1 3 3 3 3
3 3 NC 4 4 2 2 PF feed clutch 1
24V4 5 5 1 1
PF low voltage
4 4 REG_CL_REM 6 6 3 3
power source PWB NC 7 7 2 2 PF conveying clutch
24V4 8 8 1 1
Cassette_H_LIVE 1 1 1 1
Cassette_H_NEUTRAL 5 5 2 2 YC7
NC 3 PA P L S I Z E 1 ( 3 ) 1 1 4 4
NC 4 PA P L S I Z E 1 ( 2 ) 2 2 3 3
Cassette_H_LIVE
PF paper length sensor 1
2 2 GND 3 3 2 2
Cassette_H_NEUTRAL 6 6 PA P L S I Z E 1 ( 1 ) 4 4 1 1
PA P W S I Z E 1 5 5 2 2
PF paper width sensor 1
GND 6 6 1 1
1 1
COVEROPEN 7 7 2 2
2 2 PF right cover switch
GND 8 8 1 1
AC_LIVE
PF casstte heater
AC_NEUTRAL
YC5
3.3V4 1 1 3 1 3 3
YC2 GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 PF lift sensor 2
6 6 1 1 MAIN_DIR PFLS2 3 3 1 3 1 1
5 5 2 2 MAIN_READY
4 4 3 3 MAIN_CLK 3.3V4 4 4 3 3
PF motor GND 5 5 2 2 PF upper paper sensor 2
3 3 4 4 MAIN_REM
2 2 5 5 GND PFPS2(U) 6 6 1 1
1 1 6 6 24V4
3.3V4 7 7 3 3
GND 8 8 2 2 PF lower paper sensor 2
PFPS2(L) 9 9 1 1
3.3V4 10 10 3 1 3 3
G N D 11 11 2 2 2 2 PF conveying sensor 2
PFFS2 12 12 1 3 1 1
NC 13 13
GND 14 14
YC6
LIFT_REM2 1 1 2 2
PF lift motor 2
24V4 2 2 1 1
REG_CL_REM2 3 3 3 3
NC 4 4 2 2 PF feed clutch 2
24V4 5 5 1 1
YC8
PA P L S I Z E 2 ( 3 ) 1 1 4 4
PA P L S I Z E 2 ( 2 ) 2 2 3 3
PF paper length sensor 2
GND 3 3 2 2
PA P L S I Z E 2 ( 1 ) 4 4 1 1
PA P W S I Z E 2 5 5 2 2
PF paper width sensor 2
GND 6 6 1 1
Paper feeder (double cassette) only
9-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) Attachment Kit (AK-470): 32ppm model only
Finisher Power source unit
YC3
CN1 13 13 NC
1 1 12 12 12 1 12 12 DF_CLK
DF PWB DF_CLK
DF_SI 2 2 11 11 11 2 11 11 DF_SI
DF_SO 3 3 10 10 10 3 10 10 DF_SO
DF_SEL 4 4 9 9 9 4 9 9 DF_SEL
DF_RDY 5 5 8 8 8 5 8 8 DF_RDY
DF_SET 6 6 7 7 7 6 7 7 DF_SET
24V2 7 7 6 6 6 7 6 6 24V_DF
24V2 8 8 5 5 5 8 5 5 24V_DF
24V2 9 9 4 4 4 9 4 4 24V_DF
GND 10 10 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND
GND 11 11 2 2 2 11 2 2 GND
GND 12 12 1 1 1 12 1 1 GND
Bridge unit DF relay PWB

BR PWB
YC2
1 1
3.3V2 1 YC5
Vout 9 9 JAM_SENS1
TMTxD 2 1 1 FAN_CONT
BR conveying sensor 1 GND 2 2 8 8 GND
TMRxD 3 2 2 GND
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V2
N.C. 4
GND 5
Main body
Vout 1 1 6 6 JAM_SENS2
BR conveying sensor 2 GND 2 2 5 5 GND YC1
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3V2 3.3V2 1
FLMD0 2
WRSO 3
Vout 1 1 3 3 JAM_SENS3 WRSI 4
BR conveying sensor 3 GND 2 2 2 2 GND SCK 5
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V2 ERSTN 6
GND 7
Engine PWB
YC3 YC2
A 1 1 4 4 SMOTA YC5 YC4 EH_CLK 1 1 2 2 1 1 EH_CLK
B 2 2 3 3 SMOTB EH_SO 2 2 4 4 2 2 EH_SI
BR motor A_ 3 3 2 2 SMOTA_ BR_CLK 1 1 12 12 12 1 12 12 BR_CLK 3 EH_SO
EH_SI 3 3 3 3 3
B_ 4 4 1 1 SMOTB_ BR_SI 2 2 11 11 11 2 11 11 BR_SI 4 4 BR_SEL
BR_SEL 4 4 1 1
BR_SO 3 3 10 10 10 3 10 10 BR_SO 5 5 DF_SEL
DF_SEL 5 5 15 15
YC4 BR_SEL 4 4 9 9 9 4 9 9 BR_SEL EH_RDY 6 6 5 5 6 6 DF_RDY
#187 3 3 24VIL BR_RDY 5 5 8 8 8 5 8 8 BR_RDY 7 7 3.3V2_E
3.3V2_E 7 7 12 12
2 2 NC 3.3V4 6 6 7 7 7 6 7 7 3.3V4 8 3.3V2_E
BR cover switch 3.3V2_E 8 8 13 13 8
1 1 24V FAN_CONT 7 7 6 6 6 7 6 6 FAN_CONT 9 9 GND
#187 GND 9 9 8 8
GND 8 8 5 5 5 8 5 5 GND 10 10 GND
GND 10 10 10 10
YC6 GND 9 9 4 4 4 9 4 4 GND NC 11 11 6 6
GND 1 1 1 1 FAN_CONT GND 10 10 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND FG 12 12 7 7
BR fan motor 24V_DF 11 11 2 2 2 11 2 2 24V_DF
24V 2 2 2 2 +24V_DFD 9 9
24V_DF 12 12 1 1 1 12 1 1 24V_DF 11 11
14 14
BR low voltage power source PWB

YC1
Main body 24V2 1 1 1 1 24V_DF
AC_LIVE 24V2 2 2 2 2 24V_DF
Outlet GND 3 3 3 3 GND
Inlet
AC_NEUTRAL GND 4 4 4 4 GND
PS_REM 5 5 5 5 +24VOE(+3.3V4)
9-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) 500 sheets Finisher (DF-470): 32ppm model only

GY
CN19 1 FMOT_*B
GY
GY 2 +24V
FMOT_*B 1 GY
GY 3 FMOT_B
+24V 2
GY
GY
4 FMOT_A DF conveying motor
FMOT_B 3 GY
Power source unit FMOT_A 4
GY
GY
5 +24V
GY 6 FMOT_*A
+24V 5
GY
FMOT_*A 6
BK
DF relay PWB CN1 TMOT_*B 7
BK
BK BK +24V 8 BK
SGND 1 1 DF_CLK BK 1 TMOT_*B
BK BK TMOT_B 9 BK
SGND 2 2 DF_SI TMOT_A 10
BK
BK
2 +24V
BK BK TMOT_B
SGND 3 3 DF_SO BK 3
+24V 4
BK BK
4 DF_SEL
+24V 11
BK
BK
4 TMOT_A DF bundle discharge motor
BK BK TMOT_*A 12 BK
+24V 5 5 DE_RDY BK
5 +24V
BK BK TMOT_*A
YC3 +24V 6
BK BK
6 DF_SET 6
DF_SET 7
BK BK
7 +24V DF PWB CN20 BK BK
DE_RDY 8 8 +24V ROMOT_*B 1 1 ROMOT_*B
BK BK BK BK
DF_SEL 9 9 +24V +24V 2 2 +24V
BK BK BK BK
DF_SO 10 10 SGND ROMOT_B 3 3 ROMOT_B
DF_SI 11
BK BK
11 SGND ROMOT_A 4
BK BK
4 ROMOT_A
DF roller motor
BK BK BK BK
DF_CLK 12 12 SGND +24V 5 5 +24V
BK BK
ROMOT_*A 6 6 ROMOT_*A
BK BN
4 FJ_MOT_*A 1
BK BK
3 FJ_MOT_A 2
CN18
BK
BK
2 FJ_MOT_B 3
OE DF adjustment motor 1
FJ_MOT_*A 1 BK YW
BK 1 FJ_MOT_*B 4
FJ_MOT_A 2
BK
FJ_MOT_B 3
BK
FJ_MOT_*B 4
OE
CN13 RJ_MOT_*A 5
BK
OE BK
COM. 1 +24V
DF staple cover switch N.O.
WE WE
2 H_SW
RJ_MOT_A 6
BK
RJ_MOT_B 7
BK
RJ_MOT_*B 8
BK BN
4 RJ_MOT_*A 1
BK BK
3 RJ_MOT_A 2
CN14
BK
2 RJ_MOT_B 3
OE DF adjustment motor 2
BK YW
RHDS1 1
BK CN6 SLD_*A 1
BN 1 RJ_MOT_*B 4
BK BK BK
1 +5V SLD_A
DF paper sensor 1 SGND 2
BK BK 2
OE
+5V 3 BK
2 SGND SLD_B 3
YW
DF slide motor
3 RHDS1 SLD_*B 4
GY
4 +5V
GY GY
RHDS2 1 5 SGND
GY GY
DF paper sensor 2 SGND 2
GY
6 RHDS2
+5V 3
EMPS 1
GY CN21 BE
GY CN7 +24V 1
DF exit sensor SGND 2
GY GY BR_SOL 2
BE DF belt solenoid
+5V 3 1 +5V
GY
2 SGND
GY
BK BK
3 EMPS CN16 BE
FJ_HPS 1 4 +5V +24V 1
DF adjustment sensor 1 SGND 2
BK BK
5 SGND P_SOL 2
BE DF paddle solenoid
BK BK
+5V 3 6 FJ_HPS NC 3
BK
7 +5V NC 4
BK BK
8 SGND
RJ_HPS 1
BK BK
9 RJ_HPS
CN17 RD
BK +24V 1
DF adjustment sensor 2 SGND 2
BK S_SOL 2
RD DF paper solenoid
+5V 3
NC 3
BK
CN9
BK
PINS 1 1 +5V
BK BK
DF conveying sensor SGND 2
BK BK
2 SGND
CN12 VT
+5V 3 3 PINS VT 1 STPM+
STPM+ 1 VT
VT 2 STPM+
GY GY
CN10 STPM+ 2
VT
VT
3 STPM- DF staple motor
1 +5V STPM- 3 VT
BRS 1 VT 4 STPM-
GY GY STPM- 4
DF belt sensor SGND
+5V
2
3
GY GY
2
3
SGND
BRS +5V 5
BE
BE
STPL_HP 6 BE
4 NC
SELF_P 7
BE 1 SGND STHPS STSPS STES
BE BE LS
BK 2
RUDS 1 BK
CN11 LS 8
BE BE
3 SELF_P
BK 1 +5V SGND 9 BE
SGND 2
DF roller sensor +5V 3
BK BK
2 SGND BE
4 STPL_HP
BK 5 +5V
BK
3 RUDS CN8 BE
4 +5V +5V 1
BK BK BE
JAMCVR_S 1 5 SGND SGND 2
BK BK BE
DF top cover sensor SGND 2 6 JAMCVR_S JIS 3 BE
BK 1 JIS
+5V 3 NC 4 BE
2 SGND DF staple position sensor
NC 5 VT BE
3 +5V
CN22
BK BK
SLD_HP 1 1 +5V VT
BK BK
DF slide sensor SGND 2
BK BK
2 SGND Staple unit
+5V 3 3 SLD_HP
BK
1 T_UL_SEN
BK
BK
2 SGND DF tray upper limit sensor
3 +5V
CN5 BK BK
1 +5V 1
BK BK BK
T_LL_SEN 1 2 SGND 2
BK BK BK
SGND 2 3 T_UL_SEN 3 BK
BK BK BK 1 T_LL_SEN
+5V 3 +5V BK
T_UL_SEN 4
BK BK
4
5 SGND
4
5
BK
BK
2 SGND DF tray lower limit sensor
BK BK BK 3 +5V
SGND 5 6 T_LL_SEN 6
BK BK BK
+5V 6 7 TM_- 7
BK BK
NC 7 8 TM_+ 8
BK
BK
1 TM_+ DF tray motor
CN15 2 TM_-
BK
TM_+ 1
BK
TM_- 2
NC 3
Tray unit
9-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Installation guide
9 - 6 Installation guide
(1) IB-50
IB-50
(Network interface)
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IB-50
Black & White Black & White

1 1
MFP 25/32 MFP 25/30
2 3 4
OPT2/
NETWORK
5 6 7
8 9 10
2017.7
305JV5671003
9-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2) IB-51
IB-51
(Wireless Interface)
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IB-51
Black & White 1

MFP 25/32
2 3 4
OPT2/
NETWORK
5 6 7
8 9 10
2017.7
305J55672001
9-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3) IB-36
IB-36
(Wireless Interface)
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
[CONFIDENTIAL]
IB-36
Black & White 1

MFP 25/32
2 3 4
5 6 7
2017.7
303S55671001
9-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(4) PF-470/PF-471
PF-470/471
(500 sheet×1 Paper feeder)
(500 sheet×2 Paper feeder)
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
[CONFIDENTIAL]
PF-470/471 PAPER FEEDER

Black & White Color Black & White Color
PF-470 PF-471 1 MFP 25/32 MFP 24/30 MFP 25/30 MFP 20/25
2 PF-470 PF-471
3 4 5-1
5-2 6 7
2
1
2017.7
303NN5671002
9-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
8 9 10
11 12
13 14
9-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(5) AK-470/DF-470
AK-470/DF-470
(Conveying Unit)
(500 sheet Finisher)
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
[CONFIDENTIAL]
DF-470 DOCUMENT FINISHER , AK-470 ATTACHMENT KIT

for
Black & White Color Color
Black & White MFP 32 1 MFP 32 MFP 30
Black & White
MFP 25/30 MFP 20/25
Black & White MFP 25/30
Color MFP 30
Color MFP 20/25 E
A C
B
F
D G
2 3
2
1
4 Black & White MFP 32

Black & White MFP 25/30
A B
Color MFP 30
Color MFP 20/25
A B
2017.7
305JS5671003
9-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
5 C 6
D
7 Black & White MFP 32 Color MFP 30

Black & White MFP 25/30 Color MFP 20/25
8
8 9 F
10 G
9-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(6) Fax System 13
Fax System 13
INSTALLATION
GUIDE
[CONFIDENTIAL]
FAX System 13
Black & White MFP 1

25/32
................................................. 1
................................................. 1
(100V .................................. 0 )
AU JP US
................................................. 1
2 3 4
OPT/FAX
5 6 7
1 LINE connector Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this connector.
8 2 TEL connector When using a commercially available telephone set, connect the
modular cord to this connector. 9
1 Connecteur LINE Brancher le cordon pour la ligne téléphonique sur cette prise.
2 Connecteur TEL Lors de l'utilisation d'un téléphone standard, brancher le cordon
téléphonique à cette prise.
1 Conector de LÍNEA Conecte el cable modular de la línea telefónica a este conector.

2 Conector TEL Si utiliza un aparato telefónico de los disponibles en el mercado,
conecte el cable modular a este conector.
1 Leitungs- Verbinden Sie diesen Anschluss mit der Telefondose.

anschluss-buchse
2 Telefonan- Hier kann ein Telefon angeschlossen werden.
schlussbuchse
1 Connettore LINEA Collegare a questo connettore il cavo modulare della linea

telefonica.
1 2 Connettore TEL Se si desidera collegare al sistema un normale telefono, collegarlo

a questo connettore. ON
1 LINHA conector Conecte o cabo modular para a linha telefônica a este conector.
2 2 TEL conector Ao usar um aparelho telefônico disponível comercialmente,
conecte o cabo modular a este conector.
1 LINE
2 TEL
2017.7
303S45611001
9-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
10
FAX Setup Wizard
9-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia L

Headquarters 13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
225 Sand Road, New Territories, Hong Kong
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA Phone: +852-2496-5678
Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Fax: +852-2610-2063
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America KYOCERA Document Solutions
8240 NW 52nd Terrace, Suite 301 (China) Corporation
Miami, Florida 33166, USA 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu Di
Phone: +1-305-421-6640 Shanghai,200003, China
Fax: +1-305-421-6666 Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Canada (Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
Phone: +1-905-670-4425 335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Ban
Fax: +1-905-670-8116 Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Fax: +66-2-586-0278
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Ciudad de Mexico, C.P. 11560 Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Phone: +52-555-383-2741 12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Fax: +52-555-383-7804 Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda. Fax: +65-6748-3788
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP KYOCERA Document Solutions
06543-306, Brazil Hong Kong Limited
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353
16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304
New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA Fax: +852-3185-1399
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile
Phone: +56-2-2670-1900 KYOCERA Document Solutions
Fax: +56-2-2350-7150 Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Australia Pty. Ltd. Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113, Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588 #10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro
Seoul, Korea
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +822-6933-4050
New Zealand Ltd. Fax: +822-747-0084
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand KYOCERA Document Solutions
Phone: +64-9-415-4517 India Private Limited
Fax: +64-9-415-4597 Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course R
Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
[CONFIDENTIAL]
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, Deutschland GmbH
The Netherlands Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Phone: +31(0)20-654-0000 Germany
Fax: +31(0)20-653-1256 Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
The Netherlands Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,
Phone: +31-20-5877200 Austria
Fax: +31-20-5877260 Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road, KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS, Borgarfjordsgatan 11, 164 40 Kista, Sweden
United Kingdom Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy, Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Denmark
Belgium Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Espace Technologique de St Aubin Portugal
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, Phone: +351-21-843-6780
France Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A. South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain 90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +34-91-6318219 Fax: +27-11-466-3050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,
Finland Russia
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +358-9-47805212 Fax: +7(495)741-0018
KYOCERA Document Solutions KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, United Arab Emirates
Switzerland Phone: +971-04-433-0412
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions Czech, s.r.o.
Harfa Office ParkýHVkomoravská 2420/15, Praha 9
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions Phone: +420-222-562-246
Turkey A.S.
Altunizade Mah. Prof. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:45 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
h6.h'$5ø67$1BUL, TURKEY 2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Phone: +90-216-339-0020 Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Fax: +90-216-339-0070 Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
© 2019 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

M4125idn_M4132idn Service Manual Rev.7

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

M4125idn_M4132idn Service Manual Rev.7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M4125idn_M4132idn Service Manual Rev.7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

[CONFIDENTIAL]

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

Notation of products in the manual

Product name Print Display Scanning 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia

6-89Page Correction: U332 Setting range/Initial setting

3-5Page Correction: Position number of DP motors

2-3Page Deleated: No,25 Warranty card

2 2018/01/05 1-1Page Correction: (1) Common function/Paper specification

1-3Page Correction: Numbers of continuous copying

2-37Page Change: Contents of country code list

4-82Page Added: Precaution when detach the PWB

6-5Page Added: U930

6-5Page Change: U964 HDD → nonvolatile memory

6-121Page Change: Contents of country code list

7-1Page Change: The test sample to MIP-PG pattern

7-19Page Deleted: Border Erase function

Revision Date Pages Revised contents

7-45Page Correction: The description of (J0000) of the 7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures

7-152Page Correction: The description of (2 to4) of the 7-8 Abnormal Noise

2-25Page Deleated: The fixing screw of SD card cover

5-4Page Correction: USB folder structure

6-39Page Correction: Setting Range (0 -75)

6-102Page Correction: Test pattarn (2 1)

5 2019.04.26 6-170Page Deletion: Supplement

6 2019.06.17 7-102Page Addition: F60X

7 2019.10.30 2-2Page Correction: Delete the word "Altitude adjustment"

Safety warnings and precautions

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

2. Precautions for Maintenance

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

This page is intentionally left blank.

2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

(15) Completion of installing the main unit ..................................................................................................... 2-16

3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

(2-1)Image scanner section (CIS model) ............................................................................................... 3-40

4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

5 Firmware ........................................................................................................ 5-1

6 Maintenance mode ........................................................................................ 6-1

7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 7-1

(2-14)Image is dark partly or light ............................................................................................................ 7-9

7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................................... 7-37

checking/removing paper remaining in the main unit ........................................................................... 7-149

8 PWBs .............................................................................................................. 8-1

9 Appendixes .................................................................................................... 9-1

9-6 Installation guide ..................................................................................................................................... 9-22

32 ppm model 25 ppm model

7 inch LCD 4.3 inch LCD

Printing Method Electro-photography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2

Multi Purpose 60 to 256 g/m2

Warm-up Time Power on 21 seconds or less (Wi-Fi available model)

Sleep 16.4 seconds or 13.9 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m2)*1

Multi Purpose 100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m2)